JP6669846B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a symbol is displayed on a display based on a game ball fired based on a player's operation having won a starting winning opening, and the symbol is stopped on the display after a predetermined period has elapsed. There is a game that executes a big hit game when a symbol that is displayed and stopped and displayed on the display device has a specific display mode. In the jackpot game, a round game for controlling opening and closing of the special winning opening is executed a plurality of times, and when a game ball enters the large winning opening, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to obtain a large amount of prize balls to the player. Is possible. In this type of gaming machine, a plurality of types of big hit games can be executed by making the number of round games executed and the opening period of a special winning opening in the round games different (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-131776 A

In the above-described gaming machine, although the effect of expecting the execution of the jackpot game is performed to increase the expectation for the jackpot game, there is still room for contriving the effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that is devised for an effect .

In order to solve the above-mentioned object, a gaming machine of the present invention comprises a display unit for displaying an effect, an acquisition unit for acquiring start information when a start condition is satisfied, and a start condition among the start information acquired by the acquisition unit. A special lottery at the start of performing a predetermined winning lottery based on the start information in which the winning lottery is established, and a special display result is derived to the display means when the winning lottery is performed by the starting lottery means and the result is a winning lottery. On the other hand, the display control means for deriving and displaying a non-special display result on the display means when the winning lottery is performed by the start lottery means and the result is a lost lottery result, and the starting obtained by the acquisition means is displayed. Storage means for storing start information in which the start condition is not satisfied among the information; and the starting lottery based on the start information acquired by the acquisition means when the start condition is satisfied. Before the stage performs the winning lottery, whether or not the start information belongs to a value determined as the winning lottery result by the starting lottery means is displayed and controlled in any one of a plurality of variation modes. And a pre-determination means for determining whether the value does not belong to the value determined as the winning lottery result, and the variation mode does not accompany the reach mode. A value in which the start information newly acquired by the acquisition means in a state where only the unsuccessful start information determined to be in the normal unsuccessful manner is stored in the storage means is determined as the winning lottery result by the advance determination means. In a state in which the winning start information determined to belong to the specified is stored, the specific notice effect is executed by the notice execution means, and the start stored in the storage means is performed. It is possible to shorten the period until the non-special display result is derived and displayed according to the number of stored information, and the specific notice effect includes the non-special display according to the number of stored start information. There is a first specific announcement effect that is executed when the period until the result is derived and displayed is shortened, and a second specific announcement effect that is executed when the period is not shortened. A part of the effect form of the effect and the second specific notice effect is common, and an effect state that is not displayed in the second specific notice effect is displayed in the first specific notice effect, The first specific notice effect, which is common to a part of the second specific notice effect performed when the period until the non-special display result is derived and displayed is shortened, is determined by the preliminary determination unit. By the said lottery The unselection start information that is determined not to belong to the value determined as the result and that the variation mode is determined to be the normal unselection mode without the reach mode is continuously stored in the storage unit. A gaming machine characterized in that the game can be executed in a symbol variation corresponding to each of the lost selection start information stored as above.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which an effect is devised .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which opened the door frame from the main frame and opened the main frame from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. . (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state which removed the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the upper hinge member is attached to the main body side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. FIG. 2A is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 2B is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened together with a door frame with respect to an outer frame in FIG. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of the plate unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from above. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked at from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the attachment base unit of the effect operation unit and looked at from above. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as viewed from below when disassembled. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from above. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit when disassembled and viewed from below. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit of the effect operation unit and looked at from above. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit when viewed from below. It is a top view of a plate unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the effect operation unit in BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the effect operation unit in CC cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the lower right effect unit of the plate unit, and (b) is a right side view of the lower right effect unit. (A) is a perspective view of the lower right door effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower right door effect unit as viewed from behind. It is DD sectional drawing in the door lower right effect unit of FIG.42 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower right effect unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower right effect unit and looked from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotator inside unit of the door lower right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rotating body internal unit from the disassembly. (A) is a front view of a state where the lower right rotator of the door of the lower right door effect unit faces forward, and (b) is a front view of a state where the lower right rotator of the door faces rearward. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit with the upper plate removing unit attached to the plate unit base, viewed from the front, and (b) of FIG. It is the perspective view seen. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at from the front by decomposing | disassembling an upper plate ball removal unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back plate removal unit from the disassembled view. (A) is a perspective view of the lower tray emptying unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower bowl emptying unit as seen from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 4A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 4B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from the disassembly before. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from back and disassembled. (A) is a front view of a payout apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in (a). (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the payout device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the payout blade in a payout apparatus. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball path unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit in the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower full tank path unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower full tank path unit from behind and disassembled. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is the front view which cut | disconnected the front structural member and the front unit in the game board at the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit in the front unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit from the back. FIG. 2A is a perspective view of the lower side unit and the upper side of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 2B is a perspective view of the lower side unit and the upper side of the side unit as viewed from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the center role of the front unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center role of a front unit from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path on the right side in a center role in cross section. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the second attacker unit in the center role, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in (a). It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structure and looked at from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the back box and the like in the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back box and the like as viewed from the back. FIG. 7A is a perspective view of the rear-facing movable effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. 7B is a perspective view of the rear-facing movable effect unit seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear underside movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rear underside movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration and thereafter. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the rear lower back movable effect unit as viewed from the front together with the rear lower back first decorative body and the rear lower back second decorative body. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rotational drive unit, as viewed from the rear together with the first back decoration and the second back decoration. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back-to-back lower movable effecting unit from the front. (A) is a front view of the rear lower back movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a back lower back first decorative body and a rear lower back second decorative body that are rotated together from the normal state. It is a front view in the state where the 2nd decoration surface of the lower back second decoration object was turned to the front, and (c) shows the 1st decoration object after back lower and the 2nd decoration body after lower back in the state of (b). It is a front view of the state where it was moved to the moving end on the left side as viewed. FIG. 104D shows the state of FIG. 104C in which the first back decoration and the second back decoration are rotated together, and the first decoration surface of the first back decoration is turned to the front. It is a front view of a state, (e) rotates a 1st decoration body after backing from the state of (d), opens a 1st decoration body after backing and a 2nd decoration body behind backing, It is a front view in the state where the 2nd decoration surface of the 1st decoration object and the 2nd decoration surface of the back lower back 2nd decoration object turned to the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper left movable rendering unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper left movable production unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper left movable effect unit and looked from behind. (A) is a front view which shows a back upper left movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of a back upper left first decorative body and a back upper left second decorative body in a back upper left movable effect unit. It is the front view shown in the state where it moved to the position of the right end, and (c) is the front view showing the state where the back upper left first decoration and the back upper left second decoration were developed from the state of (b). It is. (A) is a perspective view of the back left movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back left movable rendering unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is a front view showing the back left movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit in a protruding state. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper middle movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back decoration body unit from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper middle decoration body unit and looked from behind. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the drive structure of the back upper middle decoration body unit from the front, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line in (a). (A) is a front view of the back upper middle decorative body unit in a normal state, and (b) shows a pair of back upper middle decorative bodies of the back upper middle decorative body unit in a state where they are half opened outward. It is a front view, (c) is a front view showing a state in which a pair of back upper middle decorations of a back upper middle decoration unit were completely opened outward. (A) is a perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit of the rear upper middle movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit of the rear upper middle movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. is there. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 7A is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle rotation unit of the rear upper middle drive unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the movable effect production unit in a back upper part roughly from the front. (A) is a front view of the back upper middle movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing the back upper middle decoration unit in the back upper middle movable effect unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back lower front movable effect unit except the back lower front decorative body unit from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower front movable effect unit other than the back lower front decorative body unit, and looked from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower front decoration body unit of the back lower front movable effect unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower front decoration body unit of the back lower front movable effect unit, and was seen from behind. It is a front view which shows roughly the raising / lowering mechanism in a back lower front movable production unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the state of the decoration body unit raising / lowering mechanism at the time of raising the back lower front decoration body unit, and (b) is an enlarged view of the part of the unit lifting pin in (a). It is explanatory drawing, (c) is explanatory drawing which expands (b) further and shows the relationship between a unit raising / lowering pin and a raising / lowering slit. (A) It is a front view which shows the lower back front movable production unit in a normal state, (b) is a front view which shows the state which raised the back lower front decoration unit from the state of (a), (c) () Is a front view showing a state where the lower back front first decorative body of the lower back lower decorative body unit is raised from the state of (b). A game board showing a state in which the first decorative body after the back and the second decorative body after the back are rotated together in a normal position in the movable production unit behind the back of the back unit with the second decorative surface facing the front. It is a front view. After the back of the back unit, the game area with the first decorative body behind the back and the second decorative body behind the back of the directing unit closed, and the first decorative surface of the first decorative body after the back facing the front. A state in which the upper left first decorative body and the upper rear left second decorative body of the back upper left movable effect unit are slid to the horizontal direction substantially center of the game area, while being slid to approximately the center in the left-right direction of the inside. It is a front view of the game board shown by. From the state of FIG. 133, the first decorative body after the back of the back-to-back movable movable unit is hinged to open, and the second decorative surfaces of the first decorative body after the back and the second decorative body below the back are front-facing. While turning the hinge on the back upper left second decorative body of the back upper left movable rendering unit to open the fixed decorative member of the back upper left first decorative body and the second decorative member of the back upper left second decorative body. It is a front view of the game board shown facing the front. From the state of FIG. 133, the first decorative body after the back of the back-to-back movable movable unit is hinged to open, and the second decorative surfaces of the first decorative body after the back and the second decorative body below the back are front-facing. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state facing. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable production unit of the back unit slid to the appearance position of the right end in front view. In the back unit, move the back middle decoration unit of the back top middle movable production unit to the position of the descending end, and extend the back top middle decoration unit in a counterclockwise direction in front view so as to extend diagonally downward and left in front view It is a front view of the game board shown in the rotated state. FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which a pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies are separated from the state of FIG. 137 and slid to a position of a half-open middle open state; FIG. 138 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the pair of back upper middle decorations is further separated from the state of FIG. 138 and slid to a fully opened position; It is a front view of the game board which shows the back lower front decoration body unit of the rear lower front movable effect unit of the back unit located at the rising end. FIG. 140 is a front view of the game board in a state where the lower back front first decorative body is hinge-rotated from the state of FIG. 140 to ascend above the lower back front second decorative body. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, and (b) is an interrupt process periodically executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect predetermination process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a pre-judgment table used for effect pre-judgment processing, and (B) is a table for details of types of pre-judgment information determined by the pre-judgment table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for a lottery process for a big hit, (B) is a reach determination table used for a lottery process for a reach, and (C) is a lottery process for a big hit type. It is a symbol determination table used for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design change processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16ms regular processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the notice determination process performed by the peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect control processing performed by the peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the fluctuation effect start processing performed by the peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the fluctuation effect ending process performed by the peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a table which shows an example of the production content of a specific notice production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the production contents of a chancel-so chance production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the production contents of a chancel-so chance production.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a player that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is connected to lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are openably and closably mounted by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape in a front view and having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear, and a game mounted on a lower front part of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing spheres, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front part of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the left front part of the door frame base unit 100 A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball attached to the lower right part of the front face of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201. Handle unit 500 operable by a player to drive the player into the game area of the game board 5, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A foul cover unit 520 that receives a game ball that has been hit into the game area and is ejected to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a game ball that is mounted on the lower portion of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and has an upper plate 201 A ball feed unit 540 for sending the ball to the ball launching device 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 to close the through-hole 111, and a security cover 580 covering a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided. ing.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main frame base 600, which is partially insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. The upper hinge member 60 and the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 are rotatably attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, respectively, and the upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are rotatable. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, the reinforcing frame 660 mounted on the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the main body frame base 600 And a ball launcher 680 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and a frame 2 and a body frame 4 mounted on the right side of the body frame base when viewed from the front. , And door A locking unit 700 for locking between the main frame 3 and the main frame 4; and an inverted L-shaped payout which is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view and pays out game balls to the player side. The unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and the back of the game board 5 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main frame base 600. And a back cover 980.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and a game ball in the ball tank 802 which is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left in a front view. A left and right tank rail 803 for guiding, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 in front view for guiding game balls from the tank rail 803 in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820 Game balls that are detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 at the lower side and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 A payout device 830 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board 951 (see FIG. 142) housed in a payout control board box 950, and a payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 that guides the game balls downward and discharges the game balls from the normal discharge port or the full discharge port according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. And a normal taxiway attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 to guide the game balls discharged from the normal discharge port of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and to guide the game balls from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. And a full guide path for guiding the game balls released from the full tank discharge port forward and guiding the game balls to the full tank receiving port 530 of the door frame 3 from the front end. And a lower full sphere path unit 860, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. Speaker unit 920 having a power supply board 921, a power supply board box 930 that is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and houses a power supply board therein, An interface control board box 940 accommodating an interface control board therein, and a payout control board 951 mounted on the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. And a payout control board box 950. .

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides an outer periphery of a game area 5a into which the game ball is to be shot and places the game ball fired from the ball firing device 680 on the upper part of the game area 5a as shown in FIGS. Front member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to the front, a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front member 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a; A box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower portion on the rear side of the machine and opened upward, and a main control substrate 1310 attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. The main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning holes mounted in the game area 5a in front of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game area 5a. A table unit that (illustration is omitted), and a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 in the upper substrate box 1200, the.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launching device 680 plays the game with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in a winning port (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning ports. . Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the players can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front by exploding. 15A is a perspective view of a portion of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 15B is an exploded perspective view showing the exploded view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated from each other and extends left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. , And a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that extend to the right. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Also, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same. Have been.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion side of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably mounted.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 having both ends attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position closer to the left from the left and right center, A right sliding member 82 in the form of a flat plate attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, or the like), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. , Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, or the like) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch 11 which penetrates vertically and is depressed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. Inside the engagement notch 11, an upper left and right fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. In addition, the upper frame member 10 includes, on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in front view, a mounting step portion 12 that is recessed from the general surface. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, or the like) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 has the right and left lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses formed to be the same dimensions as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths are the same. Is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes engagement notches 21 that penetrate vertically and are depressed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch 21, a lower left and right fixing portion 88 of a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 has a front end notch portion 22 that is recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same size as the front-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 20 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetric shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are depressed inward on the side surface outside in the left-right direction from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end. The recesses 31 and 41 include projections 32 and 42 that bulge out of the side surface opposite to the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow interior. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. In the protruding portions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on the surface. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility such as a game hall or transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by fingers and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is opened. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51, A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a front surface bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go backward as it goes toward.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 when assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 when assembled to the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 (see FIG. 18 and the like).

  The upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined such that the front end side is lower. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting a right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via a left sliding member 81 and a right sliding member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-shaped decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a lattice shape, thereby increasing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown, the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like upper fixing portion 61 having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A front extending portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the right and left center of the front extending portion 62 from the right end of the front extending portion 62 to the front, and vertically penetrating, and an upper fixing portion 61 in plan view. A horizontal fixing portion 64 having a flat plate shape extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the edge extending from the left end to the front end of the front extension portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 15B).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). I have. The front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. The horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state where the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the concave portion 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 allows the main frame 4 to cooperate with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped lock body 66 a having a predetermined width on the left and right and extending back and forth, and an operation unit protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and then extending diagonally left forward, and a mounting hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is mounted at a position behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. In a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion of the hanging portion 65 of the 60 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 17).

  The distal end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17). In this state, a space is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a, in which a main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 described later can be accommodated.

  By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper main frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown, the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands up from a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71, which is located behind the center in the front-rear direction. An upright flat rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a size that penetrates the horizontal portion 71 vertically so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is provided. Are fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 in front of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) of the main frame 4 at the main frame 4. In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 74 coincide with the left discharge holes 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and it is possible to discharge from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game balls from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. 86, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided to be separated from each other in the front and rear directions. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of contacting the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 11 of the upper frame member 10, and are fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. The lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front sides of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 protrusions 32 and 42. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is screwed into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32, 42 and screwed from the outer side surface. It is fixed to the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is lower than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40. Furthermore, the lower left and right fixing members 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end surfaces of the lower frame member 20. .

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lock mechanism of the main frame 4 to the main frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main frame is detached from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member was attached to the upper hinge member. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the lock member on the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the distal end of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a U-shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame side of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 according to the present embodiment includes the front end of the lock body 66a in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. Of the lock body 66a (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65). In the normal bearing state (not shown), the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the center of the front end face of the lock main body 63 are displaced obliquely and opposed. It is in a state.

  In this normal pivoting state, since the hinge pin 622 on the body frame that supports the heavy body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin on the body frame is There is almost no load on the front end face of the lock member 66a from 622. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end face of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operation part 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly. I have. In the figure, the center of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is pulled out along the inclination of the U-shaped bearing groove 63 and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F, a component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame and the front end face of the arc shape; And the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the one side inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (the mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment for rotating the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging part 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame moves the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is subjected to the normal pin support state or the action force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. This prevents the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and prevents the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from dropping out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move rightward, the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the hanging portion 65 and Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  In addition, even if the shape of the front end face of the lock body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the above-described component force F1 or the front end of the lock member 66 is directed outward of the front protruding portion 62. By positioning the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) of the lock member 66 at a position where the rotational moment to be rotated is generated, a load is not always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, and the lock is not performed. Even if the member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a is opposed to the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a, which has closed the bearing groove 63, retreats and the bearing groove 63 is opened, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  Then, when the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is urged by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves rightward, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame is accommodated in a space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked).

  When removing the upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. Thus, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a ball security for preventing a game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1. The mechanism will be described with reference to FIG. 18A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened together with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in FIG.

  In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to a left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (the pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear. In addition, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when an invalid tool that has contacted the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the return portion 55 causes the tip of the invalid tool to be bent. Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. When the game ball falls on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) in the state of being, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is discharged backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. Therefore, there is a possibility that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which game balls can pass and a right discharge hole 52. , And the left discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is caught between them.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and the outer frame 2 is not closed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the door frame. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a square external shape when viewed from the front, a plate unit 200 attached to a lower front part of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to an upper front part of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 350, a left side unit 400 attached to the left front part of the door frame base unit 100, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower right part of the front face of the door frame base unit 100. And a handle unit 500 which is attached through the dish unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a foul cover unit 520 mounted on a lower portion of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, a ball feed unit 540 mounted on a lower portion of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a vertically long rectangular shape and having a through hole 111 penetrating front and rear, A tubular handle mounting member 120 mounted on the front lower right corner of the front of the door frame base 110 for mounting the handle unit 500, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 And a door frame side attached to upper and lower ends on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 in a front view and protruding forward and rotatably attached to the main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. An upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, and a glass rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  As will be described later in detail, the plate units 200 of the door frame 3 are arranged vertically and swelled forward, and upper plates 201 and lower plates 202 capable of storing game balls, and upper plates 201 and lower plates 202. , A plate-shaped plate unit base 210 attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 and a plate liquid crystal display device 244 attached to the plate unit base 210 in front of the plate 201 and capable of displaying images. An effect operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 and an upper plate effect button 257 that can be operated by the player, a plate unit cover 260 covering the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and a right side of the upper plate 201 in front view. A door lower right production unit 270 having a door lower right rotator 270A that is arranged and rotates according to the game state, and covers the door lower right production unit 270 from the front side. A transparent effect unit cover 300, an upper plate ball removing unit 310 for removing game balls stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and a lower unit for removing game balls stored in the lower plate 202 downward. A lower plate ball removing unit 320, a ball rental operation unit 330 for operating a ball rental machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, An upper plate top decoration member 340 attached to the upper portion of the plate unit base 210 and capable of luminous decoration is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 partially attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side, and A top decoration member 370 having a light-transmitting property attached to the front left and right centers of the front and rear sides of the 360 and bulging forward, and a top speaker attached to the inside of the top decoration member 370 and outputting a high-range sound ( (Not shown), and a decorative board 380 on the door frame, which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and has a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 attached along the left outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a unit. A translucent left side decoration member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decoration member 370 of the top unit 350; and a front door frame on the front side of the left side decoration member 420. 3 and a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) and a door frame mounted on the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on a front surface thereof. And a left decorative substrate 440.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a unit. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350; 3 and a right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) mounted between the unit base 460 and the right side decorative member 470. And a door frame right decorative board (not shown) to which is attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is rotatably mounted on the handle main body 502 mounted on the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 and the handle main body 502. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and cooperates with the handle body 502 to rotatably support the handle lever 504. And Although not shown, the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle main body 502, and is attached to the handle main body 502 and a handle operation sensor 507 (see FIG. 142) for detecting the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. It has a stop button that can be operated by a cage player, and a contact detection sensor 509 (see FIG. 142) mounted in the handle body 502 and detecting contact between the player and the handle lever 504.

  The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is a shallow box-shaped unit body attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and opened at the front side as shown in FIGS. 522 and a flat lid member 524 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 522. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray supply port 210a of the tray unit 200. 526, a full-filled ball receiving port 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the through-ball passage 526 when viewed from the front and that can communicate with the full-filled guide path of the lower full-filled ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A furl that receives a game ball (foul ball) that opens upward on the right side of the ball receiving port 528 in a front view and that does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4. A ball receiving port 530 and a front opening at the lower right corner in a front view, which release the game balls received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530, and a plate unit 200. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to a box-shaped unit main body 542 that extends left and right and has an open rear side, and a rear side of the unit main body 542. A unit cover 544 detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front cover unit 520 in a box shape with an open front side, and an upper plate that is open frontward and is open forward; A ball entrance 546 into which the game balls stored in 201 enter, a ball ejection port 548 capable of releasing the game balls entering the ball entrance 546 and opening rearward, and a ball entrance A ball discharge port 550 is provided, which is capable of discharging game balls entering the 546 and is opened forward below the ball entrance 546. Although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 includes a ball feed solenoid 551 (see FIG. 142) for discharging game balls entered from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and a ball entrance. A switching mechanism for switching the game ball entered from the port 546 to either the ball discharge port 548 side or the ball discharge port 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front and rear sides of the unit frame 562 as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 and the like, and the frame unit 562 is larger than the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A pair of glass plates 564 for closing the inside of the cage unit frame 562.

[3-1. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 30A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 30B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from above, and FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit of the effect operation unit when disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit disassembled and viewed from below.

  FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit as viewed from below. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as viewed from below. 39 is a plan view of the plate unit, FIG. 40 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the effect operation unit in the BB section in FIG. 39, and FIG. 41 is an effect operation in the CC section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 42 (a) is a front view of a lower right effect unit of the plate unit, FIG. 42 (b) is a right side view of the lower right effect unit, and FIG. 43 (a) is a lower right effect unit of the door. It is the perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is the perspective view seen from the back of the door lower right production unit. FIG. 44 is a DD cross-sectional view of the lower right effect unit of FIG. 42 (b). FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit viewed from behind. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body inner unit of the lower right door effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body inner unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 49 (a) is a front view of a state where the lower right rotating body of the door of the lower right direction effect unit faces forward, and FIG. 49 (b) is a front view of a state where the lower right rotating body of the door faces rearward.

  FIG. 50 (a) is a perspective view of the dish unit with the upper dish removing unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 50 (b) is a perspective view of the dish with the upper dish removing unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the upper tray removing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the upper tray removing unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 53 (a) is a front perspective view of the lower tray removing unit, and FIG. 53 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower tray removing unit as viewed from the front.

  The plate unit 200 protrudes forward from the door frame base unit 100. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls to be paid out from the payout device 830 and driven into the game area 5a, and a game provided below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing spheres. The plate unit 200 has a flat plate unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and a plate unit base 210 mounted on the upper front of the plate unit base 210 and having a left side bulging forward from the center in the left and right direction. And a lower plate main body 214 attached to the lower center of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 at the left and right centers and greatly swelling forward to form the lower plate 202. .

  Further, the plate unit 200 covers the front and lower sides of the effect operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper plate main body 212 and the front surface of the plate unit base 210, and the upper and lower plate main body 212, the lower plate main body 214, and the effect operation unit. A plate unit cover 260 attached to the front of the plate unit base 210, a door lower right effect unit 270 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 220 and attached to the front right portion of the plate unit base 210, and a door lower right effect unit The effect unit cover 300 which covers the front side of the plate unit 270 and is attached to the front of the plate unit base 210, and the game balls which are attached so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from front and rear and are stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate body 212. And a lower portion of the lower plate main body 214 for extracting the upper plate into the lower plate 202. Mounted it includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Further, the plate unit 200 is mounted on the upper surface of the effect operation unit 220, and a ball rental operation unit 330 for operating a ball rental machine disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall; An upper plate top decoration member 340 that is mounted on the upper portion of the unit base 210 and can be illuminated and decorated, and is mounted on the left side of the front of the plate unit base 210 behind the plate unit cover 260 so that light can be emitted forward. The dish unit left decorative board 345 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and the rear side of the effect unit cover 300 and the lower right side of the effect unit 270, are attached to the front right side of the dish unit base 210 and are directed forward. A dish unit right decorative board 346 having a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light, and a dish unit base 210 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 A decorative board 233 before the upper plate, a decorative substrate 235 after the upper plate, an upper liquid crystal substrate 241, a vibrating device 242, a touch panel 246, an effect button decorative substrate 251, an effect button pressing sensor 258, a lower right relay board 281 to be described later, A dish unit left decorative board 345 and a dish unit relay board 347 that relays the connection between the dish unit right decorative board 346 and a peripheral control board 1510 (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

[3-1a. Dish unit base]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the plate unit base 210 of the plate unit 200 extends leftward and rightward over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit base 210 penetrates forward and backward near the upper left corner in a front view and extends rearward in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates forward and backward below the upper dish ball supply port 210a. A speaker slit 210b comprising a plurality of elongated holes extending upward and downward, a lower tray ball supply port 210c penetrating forward and rearward and extending rearward in a lower portion at the lower left and right center of the front view, and a lower tray An upper plate ball feed port 210d penetrating back and forth at the upper right side of the ball supply port 210c in front view and extending vertically and having an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate body 212.

  Further, the dish unit base 210 has a square-shaped inner opening 210e that penetrates forward and backward on the left side in the front view of the upper saucer ball outlet 210d, and a receiving plate that projects forward from the lower side of the opening 210e in a plate shape. A piece 210f, an escape opening 210g that penetrates forward and backward at the upper right side of the upper counter ball sending port 210d, and a handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 that penetrates forward and backward at the lower right corner of the front view. Handle insertion opening 210h, a cylinder insertion opening 210i that penetrates the front and rear near the right corner in the front view and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a right front view right side of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply opening 210c. And a notch 210j which is cut out from the rear end toward the front on the side surface of.

[3-1b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the upper plate main body 212 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a container shape that is greatly bulged forward on the left side from the left and right center in front view, and is opened upward and rearward. ing. The upper plate main body 212 is open to the left and rear only on the right end side in front view, and includes a guide passage portion 212a through which game balls can flow. The upper plate body 212 is inclined such that the bottom surface is entirely lower at the right end. More specifically, when the upper plate main body 212 is attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is positioned from the lower side of the upper plate ball supply port 210a to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. Are inclined so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of. Thereby, the game balls discharged forward from the upper ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate main body 212, and the received game balls can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed port 210d.

  Further, the upper plate main body 212 includes a metal grounding member 212b extending from the left and right center to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the grounding metal 212b is electrically grounded (grounded), so that the static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed by contact with the game ball.

[3-1c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the lower plate main body 214 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a trapezoidal shape in a plan view with a rear end side longer than a front end side, and is formed in a container shape with upper and rear sides opened. The lower plate main body 214 has a ball hole 214a vertically penetrating through the bottom surface and can be closed by the lower plate hole removing unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the ball hole 214a. are doing. The lower plate main body 214 can receive and store the game balls discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit base 210, and transfer the game balls from the ball hole 214a to below the plate unit 200. Can be discharged.

[3-1d. Overall configuration of staging operation unit]
As shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, the effect operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the plate unit base 210 and the upper plate main body 212 at the center in the right and left directions when viewed from the front, and to the mounting base unit 220A. A touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C mounted on the mounting base unit 220A on the left side in a front view of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A. , A unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer peripheries of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end of the attachment base unit 220A in a front view.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed at the center in the axial direction on the outer peripheral surface over the entire circumference. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220A and the plate unit base 210 side by reducing the impact when the touch unit 220B is hit, and also describe the touch unit 220B described later. The transmission of the vibration by the vibrating device 242 to the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side can be reduced.

[3-1d-1. Mounting base unit]
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the mounting base unit 220A of the staging operation unit 220 has a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and having an open top, and an upper side of the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 which is attached and has a rear end attached to the front end of the upper plate main body 212 and has an open upper portion capable of accommodating the touch unit 200B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231. A front lens member 232, a front plate decorative plate 233 disposed between the front plate lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and having a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a unit cover for covering the front side of the front plate lens member 232. And a translucent upper plate front decoration member 234 attached to the 224.

  The mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231 and has a plurality of upper decorative boards 235 provided with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward, and an upper side of the upper decorative board 235. And a translucent upper decorative member 236 attached to the unit cover 224 and mounted on the unit cover 224, and the upper decorative plate 235 sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper decorative member 236. A linear light-emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light to emit light linearly, a cylindrical button mounting member 238 mounted on the unit cover 224 on the right side in front view of the upper decorative member 236, and a button mounting member 238, which is provided so as to be slidable up and down by 238.

  The mounting base 230 includes a flat mounting-side receiving portion 230a that is inclined so as to become lower toward the front from a substantially center in the front and rear, and a two-sided, penetrating through the mounting-side receiving portion 230a. It has two through-holes 230b and a cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c extending downward from the periphery of the through-hole 230b. The through hole 230b has a square inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramid shape so as to be narrowed downward (see FIG. 41). More specifically, in the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, the front inner peripheral wall extends substantially perpendicular to the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a, and the rear inner peripheral wall is lower than the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a. It is inclined to extend forward as it goes. Further, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c extends so that the inner peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined such that the lower ends (tips) thereof are slightly closer to the vertical of the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a.

  The unit case 231 is open upward and can accommodate the touch unit 220B. The unit case 231 projects forward and backward from the vicinity of both left and right ends of the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a in a front-rear direction. A horizontal support pin 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a and projecting upward from the vicinity of the bottom end of the housing recess 231a. It has a central support projection 231d projecting upward, and two receiving projections 231e projecting in a pyramid shape so as to be narrowed from the lower side of the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a toward the lower side, and separated from each other left and right. .

  Further, the unit case 231 penetrates vertically in a circular shape on the left side as viewed from the front with respect to the accommodation recess 231a, and is disposed around an insertion hole 231f through which a lower portion of the button unit 220C is inserted and an insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends left and right on the rear outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the housing recess 231a and that are recessed downward from the upper end are arranged. Notch 231h.

  The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 has a plan view shape formed by combining a rectangle extending left and right and a trapezoid protruding outward from both left and right sides of the rectangle. Further, in the housing recess 231a, the bottom surface of the rectangular portion is formed to be lower downward than the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion on both the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is formed slightly lower than the height (length in the axial direction) of the damper 222.

  The four lateral support pins 231b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the accommodation recess 231a, and are formed so as to be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped tapered portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end on the upper end side (see FIG. 40). The horizontal support pin 231b has a distance from the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a to the middle of the tapered portion 231i equal to the length of the damper 222, and is formed to be longer than the entire damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222, and are formed slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the housing recess 231a. The outer periphery of the receiving portion 231e is formed in the shape of a truncated cone having a quadrangular shape. The two receiving projections 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The receiving protrusion 231e has a front outer peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and is inclined such that the rear outer wall goes forward with respect to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. And extending. In addition, the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides of the receiving protrusion 231e are inclined and extend so that the lower ends (tips) thereof are slightly closer to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted into the through-hole 230a of the mounting base 230, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The front plate decorative member 234 has a front surface exposed to the outside when the plate unit 200 is assembled. The post-plate decoration board 235 includes a plurality of decoration LEDs 235a for light-emitting decoration of the post-plate decoration member 236, and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for light-emitting decoration of the linear light-emitting lens member 237. .

  The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right than the decoration member 236 after the dish, and a light receiving section 237a and a light receiving section 237a are arranged above the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the decoration board 235 after the dish. And a plate-shaped linear light-emitting portion 237b that is continuously fitted into the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. The linear light-emitting lens member 237 has the front surface of the linear light-emitting portion 237a forming a part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a by fitting the linear light-emitting portion 237b into the notch 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light-emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside when the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light-emitting lens member 237 can receive light from the peripheral LED 235b at the light-receiving portion 237a, guide the light received by the light-receiving portion 237a to the linear light-emitting portion 237b, and generate light of the linear light-emitting portion 237b. The entire upper end can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper countersunk button 239 is attached by a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable up and down, and includes an extension piece 239a extending below the button attachment member 238. By pushing down the upper bowl removing button 239, the upper bowl removing unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper bowl 201 from the upper bowl 201 to the lower bowl 202 (pull out). )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. Further, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two receiving protrusions 231e projecting below the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is mounted, and the mounting base 230 into which the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the cylindrical receiving portion and the inner peripheral surface. Accordingly, when a force (shock) such that the unit case 231 moves downward from the touch unit 220B side is not immediately transmitted to the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the concave portion 231a bends downward to some extent so that the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e abuts on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, so that the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when transmitting the force from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends, so that the bending can reduce the force to some extent and transmit the force to the mounting base 230.

  Further, the receiving portion 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to a surface on which they are formed (a surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). As a result, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving portion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in a direction along the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. I do. Thereby, the force from the receiving portion 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, and it is possible to prevent a large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is less likely to be damaged. .

[3-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the touch unit 220B of the staging operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 having an open upper side, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 mounted in the lower case 240 from above, A pair of vibrating devices 242 arranged on both left and right sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240, and a pair of vibrating devices 242 and the upper plate of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are covered and attached to the lower case 240 and , A shallow box-shaped base member 243 having an open top, an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 inserted into the base member 243 from above and capable of displaying an image controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. A frame-like grounding metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery, and a transparent touch panel covering the grounding metal fitting 245 and the upper surface of the upper liquid crystal display device 244. And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In a state where the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 are assembled, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on the rear end surface thereof. A water-proof sheet-like waterproof seal 248 that extends over the entire length of the left and right sides of the rear end face of the case 240 and the like and is attached to the rear end faces of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 ing.

  The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 213a of the unit case 231, and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 213a. The lower case 240 has a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending to the left and right, a plate-shaped protrusion 240b protruding in a trapezoidal shape from each of the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and an outer diameter of the damper 222 for each of the protrusions 240b. A pair of damper mounting recesses 240c which penetrate vertically in the same inner shape and are partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are formed to be spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. And a vibrating device mounting portion 240e that is disposed near the substrate mounting portion 240a between the pair of damper mounting concave portions 240c of the protruding portion 240b and to which the vibrating device 242 is mounted.

  The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 has a C-shape in plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C-shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided substantially at the center of the upper and lower portions of the damper mounting concave portion 240c and over the entire periphery of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting concave portion 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

  The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b whose center of gravity is eccentrically attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a. The vibration device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration drive motor 242a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from above and formed in a shallow box shape, an extending portion 243b extending outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a, A screw hole 243c vertically penetrating at a position corresponding to the damper mounting concave portion 240c of the lower case 240 at a tip end of the extension portion 243b, and an upper side is formed with a large diameter counterbore, and is formed at a lower end side of the screw hole 243c. C-chamfered tapered portion 243d (see FIG. 40) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 can pass through the tip side of the tapered portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b in the unit case 231, and the base end side (lower side) of the tapered portion 231i. It is formed in a size that cannot be passed.

  The touch panel 246 includes tempered glass that is strong against impact and is not easily broken, a transparent sensor sheet of a capacitance type provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. ing.

  The touch unit 220B can mount the damper 222 by inserting the damper 222 from the open side of the C-shape into the damper mounting concave portions 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper attachment recess 240c is inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222. Accordingly, the movement of the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c in the axial direction is restricted. When the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240 c, the upper end of the damper 222 contacts the lower surface of the extension 243 b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Protrude.

  In the touch unit 220B, the excitation drive motors 242a of the pair of excitation devices 242 are sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibration devices 242 can generate vibration independently of each other.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B can visually recognize an image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from above. Then, an image of a button or the like is displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and the button of the image can be operated by touching the touch panel 246 so that the player operates the button of the image.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B has the prevention water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the plate unit 200, the liquid is prevented from entering the touch unit 220B. Thus, the touch unit 220B can be prevented from being damaged by the intrusion of the liquid.

[3-1d-3. Button unit]
As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the button unit 220C of the staging operation unit 220 has a cylindrical unit body 250 attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g of the unit case 231 in the attachment base unit 220A, and a lower part of the unit body 250. An effect button decorative board 251 provided on the side and having an LED on the upper surface, and a board cover 252 which covers the lower side of the effect button decorative board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250 are provided.

  The button unit 220 </ b> C includes a cylindrical button base 253 inserted into the unit main body 250 so as to be slidable from above to below, and a button base 253 disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250 to attach the button base 253 upward. A biasing spring member 254, a light guide member 255 inserted into the button base 253 and capable of guiding light from the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 upward, and a plurality of minute members arranged above the light guide member 255. Sheet-like diffusion lens member 256 having a prism, a transparent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffusion lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251. And an effect button press sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the lower end.

  The unit body 250 includes three attachment pieces 250a extending outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and attached to the button unit attaching portion 231g, and a flange-shaped shelf 250b extending inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 includes a tubular lower tubular portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical tubular upper tubular portion 253b whose diameter increases upward from the upper end of the lower tubular portion 253a, A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b and has a lower end that can penetrate through the through-hole 250c of the unit main body 250 and protrudes outward from the lower end to engage (abut) with the lower surface of the unit main body 250. And a pair of engaging claws 253c having an outer peripheral surface protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylindrical portion 253b, which is shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end, and the lower end of which can contact the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250. A plurality of flat contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e extending outward from the outer peripheral surfaces of the lower cylindrical portion 253a and the upper cylindrical portion 253b in a flat shape and detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 are provided. There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The lower end of the spring member 254 is in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and the upper end is supported by a plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253.

  The light guide member 255 extends from the lower surface of the main body portion 255a to a position near the lower end of the lower cylindrical portion 253a of the button base 253 from the lower surface of the disc-shaped main body portion 255a fitted into the upper portion of the upper cylindrical portion 253b of the button base 253. And a plurality of columnar light guides 255b. The plurality of light guides 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration board 251 and can guide the light from the LEDs and emit the light from the entire upper surface of the main body 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, a button base 253, a light guide member 255, a diffusion lens member 256, and an upper plate effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down inside the unit main body 250 together. it can. The button base 253 and the like have the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 project upward from the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the urging force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 are connected to the unit main body. By engaging with the lower surface of 250, further rise is restricted, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are in the state of being located at the rise end.

  When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button press sensor 258. The pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 contact the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250, and further lowering is restricted. , The upper plate effect button 257 and the like are located at the lower end.

  In addition, the button unit 220C can make the upper plate effect button 257 emit light by lighting the LED of the effect button decoration board 251. The LED of the effect button decoration board 251 is a full-color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be illuminated in various colors.

[3-1d-4. Features of production operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 40, the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper attachment recess 240 c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220 </ b> B is lower than the lower surface of the lower case 240. Also project downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the tip surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four lateral support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom surfaces of the counterbored portions of the screw holes 243c of the base member 243, and are located above the touch unit 220B with respect to the lateral support pins 231b. The movement is restricted by the flat washer on the head of the screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231b and the tapered portion 243d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41, the effect operation unit 220 is configured such that the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the side of the horizontal support pin 231b. It protrudes upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231 c of the unit case 231 and the lower surface A gap is also formed between the case 240 and the lower surface. A gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the left and right lateral support pins 231b.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 220 is narrowed downward in the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is mounted from above in a pyramid-shaped cylindrical receiving portion 230c which narrows downward in the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A. The lower end of the pyramid-shaped receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Thus, in the normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the accommodation recess 231a) floating in the air.

  30, the upper end of the linear light-emitting portion 237b of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 along the rear side near the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B has a linear shape (see FIG. 30 and the like). It is exposed in the form of a band. The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is about ／ of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. The upper plate rear decoration member 236 is disposed behind the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper plate ball removal button 239 is disposed on the right side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 in a front view. Further, a button unit 220C is disposed on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to a game state that changes by hitting a game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, an image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 for entertaining.

  As an image displayed on the upper-panel liquid crystal display device 244, an image imitating operation buttons is displayed, and detection of a touch by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 can be received. The operation buttons can be operated, and effects using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of the effect using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation buttons, and various images can be displayed.

  In the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 in a state of being floated from the unit case 231, the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibrating device 242 according to the game state. Can be vibrated. By vibrating the touch panel 246 (the touch unit 220B) with the vibration device 242 at the time of the production using the touch panel 246, the vibration by the vibration device 242 is applied to the finger or the hand of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246. By transmitting the information, the player can be surprised by the illusion that the player is operating a physical operation button despite operating the operation button of the image. Can be suppressed to make the game more enjoyable for the player.

  Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 220, since the button unit 220C is provided on the left side in the front view of the touch unit 220B, the player is caused to press the upper plate effect button 257 according to the playing state, and the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed. You can entertain the operation. To be more specific, the operation buttons of the image on the touch panel 246 dislike the actual operation buttons because they only touch the touch panel 246. Therefore, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 without giving a sense of incongruity to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. .

  Since this effect operation unit 220 is arranged in the portion of the plate unit 200 that is bulging forward and provided with the upper plate 201, the game operation can be performed even during a stage other than during the effect using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a risk that the user will hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of being floated from the lower unit case 231. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 is increased. The impact can be absorbed to some extent by the force. More specifically, when an impact (load) acts on the touch unit 220B from the top, such as being hit, the touch unit 220B is transmitted to the damper 222 into which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted. Is compressed. The shock from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B further descends due to the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 contacts the upper end of the damper 222 in which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B descends. The damper 222 is compressed downward. Accordingly, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B further descends due to the impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces on the left and right sides of the housing recess 231a in the unit case 231 and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. Thus, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 is bent so that the center thereof moves downward by the load from the center support protrusion 231d. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. When the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a bends, the pair of receiving portions 231e projecting downward from below the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, when the receiving portion 231e further descends due to the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e contacts the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and The impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are formed in the shape of a pyramid that narrows downward, respectively, from the receiving portion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (toward the mounting base 230). The transmitted load is dispersed and transmitted in a direction along the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and in a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is arranged in multiple layers before the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is transmitted to the mounting base 230, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230, and the like can be hardly damaged by the impact.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 220 includes a linear light-emitting portion of a linear light-emitting lens member 237 that extends along the rear outer edge of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the upper decoration board 235 according to the game state. The upper end of 237b can emit light linearly. Thereby, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, and the like are enjoyed, and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, according to the game state, the decoration LED 235a of the decoration plate 235 on the upper plate causes the decoration member 236 disposed on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (on the rear side of the linear light emitting portion 237b) to emit light. be able to. By decorating the decorative member 236 after the upper plate with light emission, the player's interest is attracted to the staging operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, similarly to the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Thus, it is possible to entertain the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is connected to the lower cover 262 of the lower unit cover 260 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. And a waterproof seal 248 is affixed to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. As a result, even when water (droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate main body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). In addition, it is possible to prevent the dewed water from entering into the touch unit 220B, and to prevent a trouble from occurring in the touch unit 220B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41, the rear decoration board 235 for decoration of the rear decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. It is not exposed to the water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as short circuit and corrosion in the decorative plate 235 after the upper plate.

[3-1e. Dish unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the plate unit cover 260 of the plate unit 200 extends right and left, and the center of the left and right bulges forward, and is formed in a shell shape opened rearward. . The plate unit cover 260 is opened forward substantially at the center in the left and right directions, and a lower plate opening 261 whose rear end is closed by the plate unit base 210, and a top plate side (upper side) of the inner peripheral wall of the lower plate opening 261 And an upper plate lower covering portion 262 that covers the lower side of the upper plate main body 212 and the staging operation unit 220, and a bass sound of the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 which is disposed on the left side of the lower plate opening 261 in a front view. A speaker grill 263 for transmitting sound from the speaker, a dish unit left decorative member 264 arranged above the speaker grill 263 and illuminated by the dish unit left decorative board 345, and arranged on the right side of the lower dish opening 261 in a front view. A handle opening 265 through which the rear portion of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes, and a bottom surface of the plate unit cover 260 are formed. A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  The lower plate opening 261 is closed by the lower plate main body 214 on the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall. The speaker grill 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of a perforated metal having a plurality of holes formed in a metal plate.

  The plate unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and has a rough surface on the right side. In addition, the right side in the front view has substantially the whole translucency.

  When the plate unit cover 260 is assembled to the plate unit 200, a gap between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower cover portion 262 is formed such that it can be grasped with one hand. Thus, when the player performs the touch operation on the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261 and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be performed. Can be easily performed.

  More specifically, in an assembled state, the thickness between the upper surface of the front end of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the lower cover portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the upper surface of the rear end of the touch unit 220B and the lower cover portion 262 The thickness between the lower surface and the lower surface is approximately 50 mm, and the distance before and after the front end of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 from the rear end of the touch unit 220B is approximately 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined by about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. This allows the player to grasp the space between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the lower cover 262 with the hand of the player.

[3-1f. Direction lower right door unit]
The lower right effect unit 270 of the plate unit 200 is disposed above the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 200, as shown in FIGS. 42 to 49, and rotates according to the game state. It is provided with a spherical door 270A at the bottom right of the spherical door for luminous decoration. The lower right door effect unit 270 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 210 so as to close the escape opening 210g and rotatably supports the lower right door 270A, and is attached to the unit base 271. A lower right drive motor 272, a drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of the lower right drive motor 272, a driven gear 274 meshed with the drive gear 273 and attached to the lower right rotator 270 </ b>A; A shaft member 275 rotatably supporting the gear 274 and attached to the unit base 271.

  The lower right door effect unit 270 is attached to the driven gear 274 on the opposite side of the lower right rotator 270A and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271. A base-side bearing member 277 rotatably supporting the opposite side of the rotating body 270A to the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271; and a rotation of the lower right door rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side of the lower right rotator 270A when viewed from the front, and a decoration member 279 attached to the rear side of the unit base 271 and attached to the front. A door lower right base decorative board 280 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, Detection sensor 278, and a door bottom right base decorated substrate 280 door bottom right relay board 281 that relays the connection between the door bottom right rotator decorative substrate 291 and the peripheral control board 1510 and later, and.

  The lower right door rotating body 270A constitutes an outer shell, and is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which is a hemispherical shell-shaped front outer shell member 285 and a rear outer shell member 286. A rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are formed with semicircular cutouts 285a and 286a, respectively, about the rotation axis. The front outer shell member 285 has, on a translucent hemispherical shell-shaped surface, a band decoration 285b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction in a belt shape, and a heart shape arranged in the center of the band decoration 285b. Heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b having a metallic luster and extending like a band in the circumferential direction on the surface of a translucent hemispherical shell. When the front shell member 285 and the rear shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear shell member 286 are connected to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, the rotator internal unit 290 includes a disc-shaped lower right rotator decoration board 291 provided with a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and a center of the lower right rotator decoration board 291. The first fixed shaft member 292 and the first fixed shaft member 292 which extend perpendicular to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 and whose tip is attached to the shaft member 275 are It is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291, and its tip is attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. And the second fixed shaft member 293. Although not shown, a wiring cord for connecting the lower right relay board 281 and the lower right rotating body decorative board 291 is inserted into the second fixed shaft member 293.

  Further, the rotating body inner unit 290 is disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291, and is a flat and annular transparent reflector base 294 attached inside the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A first glare-shaped reflector 295 attached to the reflector base 294 and opened to the outside in the axial direction in an annular shape, and a hexagonal center attached to the reflector base 294 through the annular shape of the first reflector 295. A second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. Each of the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on its surface, and can reflect light from the lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of radially extending flat ribs.

  The rotating body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotating body decorative board 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296. They are separated from each other for relative rotation.

  The unit base 271 has an annular ring portion 271a disposed on the rear side of the lower-right rotating body 270A of the door, and a flat plate shape forward from a portion obliquely upper right in front view with respect to the center of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a. Of the first protruding piece 271b, the second protruding piece 271c protruding forward from a portion of the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first protruding piece 271b, and the second protruding piece 271c. And a bearing groove 271d into which the distal end of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted in a U-shape from the front end toward the rear.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first protruding piece 271b with the rotation shaft penetrating therethrough. The driven gear 274 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a that is mounted to the front end of the first protruding piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the mounting portion 275a. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can non-rotatably support the distal end of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  The rotator-side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat detection piece 276b extending outward. The base-side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second projecting piece 271c so as to close the open front end of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second projecting piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second projecting piece 271c symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis of the lower right rotating body 270A of the door. The two rotation detection sensors 275 include a rotation position where the heart decoration 285c of the lower right rotator 270A faces forward (see FIG. 49A) and a rotation position where the heart decoration 285c faces rearward (FIG. 49B). ) Can be detected respectively.

  The lower right door effect unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the lower right door rotator 270A by the lower right door drive motor 272 according to the game state, and stops the heart decoration 285c to face forward. Whether or not the player has a chance can be suggested depending on whether or not the game is performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from having a good time and enjoyment.

  In addition, the lower right door rotator 270A is provided with the lower right rotator decoration board 291 inside the lower right rotator 270A so that it cannot rotate. When the lower rotator decoration board 291 (LED) emits light, the position of light emitted from the lower right rotator decoration board 291 moves as the lower right rotator 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 and the second Since the direction of the light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, the lower right rotator 270A of the door is illuminated as if the light were flashing without blinking the LED of the lower right rotator decoration board 291. By irradiating various colors of light from the LEDs, the lower right rotator 270A can be illuminated and decorated in a rainbow color, and the player can be entertained.

[3-1 g. Production unit cover]
The effect unit cover 300 of the plate unit 200 includes, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, a hemispherical transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical door lower right rotating body 270A in the lower right door effecting unit 270. A decorative portion 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side of the plate unit cover 260 when viewed from the front, and a locking unit 700 penetrating back and forth on the lower right side of the rotating body cover portion 301. And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The effect unit cover 300 has a container-like shape with an open rear, and has translucency. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover part 301 is decorated with light emission by the door lower right base decorative board 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover part 301 is the dish unit right decorative board 346. Luminous decoration.

[3-1h. Unit for removing the upper plate ball]
As shown in FIG. 50 to FIG. 52, the upper dish removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the opening 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an insertion opening 311a through which the extension piece 239a of the upper tray ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through-hole 210e of the tray unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 mounted at the upper left position in a front view, a pressure transmitting member 313 rotatably supported by the front base member 312 and rotated by pressing the upper bowl button 239; And a first spring member 314 that urges the upper plate 313 in a direction in which the upper countersunk button 239 rises.

  In addition, the upper dish removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish sending port 210d of the dish unit base 210 from the rear, and a rear base member. A slider 316 disposed between the base plate 315 and the plate unit base 210 and attached to the rear base member 315 so as to be able to move up and down and contacting the pressure transmitting member 313 from above; A second spring member 317 for urging the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel with the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and has a flat base portion 312a attached to the cover 311. A pair of flat base portions 312a extending forward from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. An extension piece 312b, a shaft support 312c recessed rearward from the front end of the extension piece 312b in a U-shape, and a rear end of the first spring member 314 provided near the lower end of the front surface of the base 312a. A hook-shaped spring engaging portion (not shown).

  The pressure transmitting member 313 has a horizontally long cylindrical shaft portion 313a whose both ends are rotatably inserted into the pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rearward extension extending rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape. An upwardly extending piece 313c extending upwardly from the vicinity of the left end in front view of the upper surface of the extending piece 313b and the rearwardly extending piece 313b, and to which the lower end of the extending piece 239c of the button 239 can be contacted. A downwardly extending piece 313d extending downward from the right end in front view of the lower surface of the rearwardly extending piece 313b in a plate shape; and a first spring projecting downward from below the vicinity of the left end in front view of the shaft portion 313a. And a hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downwardly extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it goes rearward, and has a lower end that can contact the slider 316 that removes the upper dish.

  The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the plate unit base 210, and is provided with a base portion 315a attached to the plate unit base 210, and is separated from the front surface of the base portion 315a from side to side. A slider support portion 315b slidably supporting the left and right ends of the ball-sliding slider 316; and a front opening at a position corresponding to an upper portion of the upper plate ball sending port 210d at the upper end of the base portion 315a. An upper entrance 315c that opens downward on the rear side of the base 315a and through which game balls can flow.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 extends downward continuously with the upper entrance 315c on the rear side of the base portion 315a, is opened rearward, and has a lower end curved rearward. An L-shaped second guiding path 315e extending downward from the lower side of the one guiding path 315d, extending leftward in front view, and having a left end opened to the left and entirely open rearward, The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat passage cover 315f closing the rear end side of a portion of the guideway 315e that extends to the left and an L-shaped second guideway 315e. It has a penetrating opening 315g, and a spring engaging portion 315h which protrudes forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and is engaged with the upper end of the second spring member 317.

  The L-shaped second guiding path 315e of the rear base member 315 is inclined such that a portion extending to the left becomes lower toward the left. As shown in FIG. 50 (b), the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into the cutout portion 210j of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210, and the second guide path 315e and The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

  The slider 316 has a slider base 316a having a flat plate shape and both left and right ends slidably supported by a slider support portion 315b of a rear base member 315. A transmission piece 316b extending upward through the receiving piece 210f through the opening 210e of the unit base 210 so that the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d of the pressure transmitting member 313 can contact the upper surface, and a slider below the transmission piece 316b. A triangular-shaped operation transmitting portion 316c projecting rearward from the rear side of the base 316a downward, and a hook-shaped spring engagement projecting from the front surface of the slider base 316a and locking the lower end of the second spring member 317. And a stop 316d.

  In the state where the dish unit 200 is assembled, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 has an upper entrance 315c of the rear base member 315 opened at the lower end on the right side in front view of the guide passage 212a of the upper dish body 212. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be supplied from the upper entrance 315c to the ball feed unit 540 via the first guiding portion 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

  In addition, when the upper plate removing button 239 is pressed downward by the upper plate removing unit 310, the pressing transmitting member 313 resists the urging force of the first spring member 314 by the extended piece 239 a of the upper plate removing button 239. Then, the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d rotates around the shaft 313a in a direction in which the lower end moves downward. When the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the pressure transmitting member 313, the upperly extending ball is removed by the transmitting piece 316b of the upperly extending ball removing slider 316 with which the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d is in contact. The slider 316 slides downward against the urging force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper bowl removing slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmitting unit 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path. The state where the 315d side communicates with the second guide path 315e side is established. Thereby, the game ball in the upper plate 201 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper entrance 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feed unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  When the downward pressing of the upper ball removing button 239 is released, the upper ball removing slider 316 and the upper ball removing button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317, It can return to the original state.

[3-1i. Lower plate ball removal unit]
As shown in FIG. 53 and the like, the lower plate ball removing unit 320 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower plate body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the plate unit cover 260. A flat-plate-shaped lower-plate-ball-pulling base 321 having an opening 321a corresponding to the hole 214a, and a flat-plate-shaped slide lid 322 that can slide on the lower-plate-ball-pulling base 321 left and right to close the opening 321a. A knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front of the plate unit cover 260; and a spring for urging the slide lid 322 in a direction to close the opening 321a by the slide lid 322. A member 324, a holding device 325 that holds the slide lid 322 at a position where the opening 321 a is opened against the urging force of the spring member 324, It is provided.

  The opening 321a of the lower bowl removing base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right in the front view. By attaching the lower bowl removing base 321 to the lower bowl main body 212, the slide lid 322 can be supported so as to be slidable left and right between the lower bowl removing base 321 and the lower bowl main body 212. The slide lid 322 has a holding protrusion 322a held by the holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

  The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower bowl removing base 321 and a pair of holding claws 325b projecting from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and capable of gripping the holding protrusion 322a. When the holding protrusion 322a is inserted between the pair of open holding claws 325a and pressed toward the main body 325a, the holding device 325 closes the pair of holding claws 325b and holds the holding protrusions 322a. The claw 325b is maintained in a closed state. In this state, when the holding projection 322a is moved toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325a are opened, and the holding of the holding projection 322a is released.

  When the knob 323 (sliding lid 322) is moved to the right in front view, the sliding lid 322 is located between the opening 321a and the drilling hole 214a of the lower pan body 214. The game balls in the lower plate 202 can be stored in the lower plate 202 without the game balls in the lower plate 202 falling out of the ball hole 214a.

  By operating the knob 323 to the left from this state, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game balls in the lower plate 202 pass through the ball hole 214a and the opening 321a and fall below the plate unit 200, so that the game balls in the lower plate 202 can be pulled out. At this time, since the holding projection 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can keep pulling out the game balls inside.

  To close the slide cover 322, when the knob 323 is slightly operated to the left, the pair of holding claws 325b are opened to release the holding of the holding protrusions 322a, and the slide cover 322 is slid to the right by the urging force of the spring member 324. Then, the ball hole 214a is closed. As described above, by operating the knob 323 of the lower bowl removing unit 320, the game balls can be stored in the lower bowl 202, or the game balls stored in the lower bowl 202 can be pulled out.

[3-1j. Ball rental operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, the ball rental operation unit 330 of the plate unit 200 includes a unit case 331 that is attached to the upper surface near the right end in front view of the effect operation unit 220 and has translucency; A ball lending button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by a player; a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the ball lending button 332 and operable by the player; A display section 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the return button 333.

  The ball lending operation unit 330 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and presses a ball lending button 332 to place a predetermined number of game balls in a plate unit. The user can borrow (pay) the money into the upper plate 201 of the garment 200, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the remaining cash or the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the remainder of the borrowed money is returned. The display unit 334 displays the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, or an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-1k. Top plate top decorative member]
As shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, the upper plate top decorative member 340 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the upper left and right center of the upper end of the plate unit base 210 and has a translucent top plate lens extending in a band shape on the left and right. 340a, and an upper plate top decorative substrate 340b attached below the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface.

  The upper plate top decorative member 340 can cause the LED of the upper plate top decorative substrate 340b to emit light, thereby causing the upper plate top lens 340a to emit light in a band shape. Since the upper plate top decorative member 340 is disposed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper plate top decorative member is similar to the light emitting decoration such as the upper plate decorative member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237. By illuminating the 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. be able to.

[3-1l. Characteristic effects of the dish unit]
The plate unit 200 of the present embodiment includes a touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 for storing game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a, and a game ball in the game area 5a. When displaying an image on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 in accordance with a game state that is changed by hitting, a band-like shape is formed along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the upper liquid crystal display device 244 near the game area 5a. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the upper plate decoration member 236, the upper plate top decoration member 340, and the like can emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (sight) Can be noticed by the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like entering from outside, and the line of sight (interest) of the player can be attracted to the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like, that is, the upper liquid crystal display device 244 side. Can. Therefore, when presenting an effect such as an image in accordance with a game state, the upper liquid crystal display device 244 causes the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like to emit light, thereby providing the upper liquid crystal display device 244 to the player. The presentation of the effect can be noticed, and the effect of the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the plate unit 200 is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to a game state, when displaying an image indicating the arrival of a chance, the plate unit 200 is disposed outside the game area 5a. Since the arrival of a chance is suggested by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 being played, the player plays the game in the game area 5a and the effect on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. And both can be bothered. Therefore, by paying attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244), it is possible to enjoy a tight game with a sense of speed, and the interest of the player is reduced. When displaying an image indicating the arrival of a chance on the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, thereby allowing the player to move to the upper liquid crystal display device 244. Attention can be paid, and the arrival of a chance can be surely recognized and the player can be entertained. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a may be bothered, so that the player may not be able to concentrate on either of them and the interest may be reduced. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 etc. emits light in response to the arrival), it is possible to concentrate on the game area 5a until the linear light-emitting lens member 237 etc. emits light, and to enjoy a game in the game area 5a. At the same time, when the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, the effect of the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, so that the game can be sharpened and it is hard to get tired.

  Further, since the plate unit 200 bulging to the player side below the game area 5a is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is arranged at a position close to the player. Become. As a result, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is easily hidden by a player located in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is difficult to be seen by another player next to or behind. The effect presented by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the performance of the upper liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to reduce the feeling of being uncomfortable and lowering the interest by being peeped by other players, and also to reduce the upper liquid crystal display device. When the effect is presented by the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like at the time of presentation of the effect by the 244, it is difficult to overlook the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

  Further, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous as compared with the case of emitting light in a dot shape, and Even if the consciousness is concentrated in the game area 5a, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246, and the like can be enjoyed. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light in a strip shape, the light emission mode is different from the light emission of other light-emitting decorative bodies and the like, and it is possible to reduce erroneous recognition as light emission of the light-emitting decorative bodies and the like. Light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be reliably noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at a position on the rear side near the game area 5a in the outer peripheral edge of the upper liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, Light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily entered into the field of view of the player, and light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed so that the effect of the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed.

  Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, a rendering operation unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided, and the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is placed in the game area 5a. When the player turns his gaze to the upper plate 201 at a certain frequency, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 etc. It is easy to enter the field of view, and the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 is easily noticed. In addition, since the player turns his or her gaze to the upper plate 201 at a certain frequency, it is easy to direct the line of sight from the inside of the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (the upper liquid crystal display device 244). Therefore, when the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately transferred to the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect presented by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, thereby reducing the interest. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 200 is arranged below the game area 5a, and the player is irradiated with light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like from the lower side, so that it is arranged above the game area 5a. As compared with, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed by the player, and the player can be surely noticed by the upper liquid crystal display device 244. The effect by the operation unit 200 can be enjoyed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect operation unit 200 (upper liquid crystal display device 244) is arranged at a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, the center of the player's line of sight is located at any position in the game area 5a. However, the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the player can be surely focused on the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the effect operation unit 200 can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 200 is provided with the touch panel 246, in addition to the effect by the image, it is possible to perform an effect of causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, and to entertain the player with various effects. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to cause the player to participate in the effect, and to actively entertain the effect to the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 (the linear light-emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B sends the game ball on the upper plate 201 to the ball feed unit 540 (the ball firing device 680). In addition to being arranged along the guiding passage portion 212a to be fed, an upper tray ball removing button 239 for operating the upper tray ball removing unit 310 is disposed between the guiding passage portion 212a and the guiding passage portion 212a. In other words, a configuration in which the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of a place where the player checks the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position where the player cares even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, and the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (the effect image by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the effect of the touch panel 246). Touch operation, etc.) can be easily noticed.

  Further, the touch unit 220B having the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to the upper surface of the lower plate cover portion 262 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. And the waterproof unit 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Even if the condensed water (water droplets) flows below the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the dewed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41, the rear decoration board 235 for decoration of the rear decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. It is not exposed to the water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as short circuit and corrosion in the decorative plate 235 after the upper plate.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200, when the touch unit 220B including the touch panel 246 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibration device 242, a plurality (two) of the touch units 220B are provided. The vibration of the touch unit 220B (the vibration device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and is transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A because the vibration of the touch unit 220B (the vibrating device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the mounting unit 220A. As a result, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Therefore, when the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 when the touch operation is performed on the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B, only the touch unit 220B vibrates. The operation feeling of the touch panel 246 can be sufficiently imparted, and the player can enjoy the touch operation of the touch panel 246, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibration device 242, in addition to the operational feeling of the touch panel 246, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B or suggests the timing of operating the touch panel 246. It is possible to entertain the operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B is supported from below by the plurality of dampers 222, even if an impact or a load is applied to the touch unit 220B by hitting or strongly pressing the touch unit 220B from the upper side, the damper 222 may be used. Since the impact and the like can be absorbed, damage to the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A and the like due to the impact and the like can be reduced, and the game is interrupted due to the damage to the touch unit 220B and the like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being reduced.

  Also, since the touch panel 220B is operated by the touch panel 246, the time during which the player operates the touch panel 246 becomes longer than when pressing a button. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242 when the user touches the 246, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the finger (hand) of the player. Therefore, since the player can feel that the touch panel 246 is operated by vibrating the finger of the player, a sufficient operation feeling can be given, and the player can enjoy the operation of the touch panel 246. In this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, by changing the image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it is possible to cope with various effects, It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the various effects and to reduce the interest in the game. Further, since the touch unit 220B includes the touch panel 246, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and Various operations such as holding can be performed. As a result, a more versatile operation effect can be performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and the interest from being reduced.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as not to be able to move upward and to be able to move downward, and the elastic force (biasing force) of the plurality of dampers 222 causes the touch unit 220B to be attached. Is pressed against the upper moving end, it is possible to make it difficult for the touch unit 220B to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and to easily perform the operation of the touch panel 246. In addition, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it is possible to make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B that does not move does not vibrate according to the game state. By vibrating by the device 242, the player can be surprised, and it is possible to prevent the player from having fun and to reduce the interest.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the plurality of vibrating devices 242 separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibrating device 242 on the touch panel 246 at a position close to the part operated by the player, the touch unit 220B is strong. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, if the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player will be different, so that the player is notified that the operation is wrong. Can be performed, and the player can perform a correct operation, and can enjoy an operation effect using the touch panel 246, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 that are separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon can be generated at an arbitrary position on the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of vibration of each vibration device 242. Can be. Therefore, by controlling each of the vibrating devices 242 so that a resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, a further operational feeling can be given or the player can be greatly surprised. It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by entertaining the player.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pressed from above and an impact or a load acts on the touch unit 220B, the right and left ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the impact or the like from the upper side can be absorbed to some extent (attenuated) and transmitted to the unit case 231 side by the damper 222 and the bending of the touch unit 220B. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower attachment base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the attachment base 230. And can be transmitted widely. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e protruding downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c into which the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted at the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230. Since a gap is formed between the inner case and the inner peripheral wall, the receiving portion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other after the unit case 231 is bent downward due to an impact or a load from the touch unit 220B. Thus, an impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the bending or the like of the unit case 231 is transmitted to the mounting base 230 in a state where the impact or the like is further attenuated. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving portion 231e comes into contact with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, the receiving portion 231e (unit case) is formed. 231) Impacts, loads, and the like from the side are transmitted in an oblique direction to the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and along a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. The force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward direction) for bending the mounting base 230 is reduced, and the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit or pressed strongly from the upper side, the impact and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B Damage to the mounting base unit 220A can be suppressed.

[3-2. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 54A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 54B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 55 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. FIG. 56 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed.

  As illustrated, the foul cover unit 520 of the present embodiment is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and is a shallow box-shaped unit main body 522 having an open front side, and is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 522. And a flat lid member 524. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210 a of the dish unit 200. A passage 526, a full ball receiving port 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the through-ball passage 526 when viewed from the front and that can communicate with the full guide path 862 of the lower full-ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; It has.

  Further, foul cover unit 520 opens upward on the right side in front view of full-ball receptacle 528 and does not reach game area 5a despite being fired by ball firing device 680 of main body frame 4. Ball receiving port 530 for receiving a game ball (a foul ball), and a full ball receiving port 528 that opens forward at the lower right corner in front view and discharges a game ball received in the full ball receiving port 530. And a ball discharge port 532 that communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is formed between the full ball reception port 528 and the foul ball reception port 530 and the ball discharge port 532 by the unit body 522 and the cover member 524, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 533 having a possible size, a flat movable piece 534 constituting a part of an inner wall of the storage passage 533, and a lower end rotatably attached to the unit body 522; A full tank detection sensor 535 for detecting rotation of the piece 534 in a direction away from the storage passage 533 and a spring 536 for urging the movable piece 534 toward the center of the storage passage 533 are provided.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 becomes full of game balls and the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 532 to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 520 can be placed in the storage passage 533 to some extent. Game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the movable piece 534 rotates so that the upper end of the movable piece 534 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 533 by the weight of the game ball, The rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535. Thereby, since it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full of game balls, when the full tank detection sensor 535 detects that the game tank is full, the payout of further game balls is stopped, and That fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, and can be prompted to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 522 and below the penetrating ball passage 526, and the guideway opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. 863 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 537 to which the operation protrusion 863e can contact (see FIG. 79). The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operation protrusion 863 e of the guideway door member 863 comes into contact. When the operation protrusion 863e of the guideway opening / closing portion 863 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 537, the guideway door member 863 rotates, and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be opened.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. As illustrated, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to an island facility of a game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame base 600 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, respectively, and the reinforcing frame 660 mounted to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in a front view are provided. .

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to a lower part of the front of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; A locking unit 700 that is mounted and locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and is mounted on the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out game balls to the player side; a board unit 900 mounted on the lower rear portion of the main body frame base 600; And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view shape extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth in a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end, and a game board insertion slot 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board. A game board placement section 602 that forms the lower side of the board insertion port 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and a left and right side of the lower end of the game board 5 that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement section 602. And a game board regulating unit 603 for regulating backward movement.

  In addition, the main body frame 4 includes a launching device mounting portion 604 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in a front view for mounting the ball launching device 680, and front and rear right and left sides of the firing device mounting portion 604 in a front view. And the bass speaker of the board unit 900 which penetrates through the cylinder insertion opening 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and the lower left side from the left and right center from the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front. Opening 606 that allows the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 to face forward, and a connection opening 606 that allows the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 to face forward. And

  Further, the main body frame 4 extends in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 601 to the rear in a front view, and a locking unit 700 is mounted on the right side surface, and a back cover 980 is rotatably mounted on the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided. Further, the main body frame 4 is formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end in front view on the rear surface, and has an upper hinge mounting portion 609 and a lower hinge for mounting the main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. An attachment portion 610 is provided.

  In addition, the main body frame 4 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly below the left and right center of the game board placement unit 602 when viewed from the front, And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601.

[4-2. Upper hinge member on body frame side and lower hinge member on body frame side]
The body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 are mounted on the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

  The main frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L-shape, and a columnar protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The upper hinge member 622 pivotally supported by the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, and the upper hinge main body 621 penetrates the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side in the front view of the upper hinge pin 622 to pivotally support the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side. Hinge hole 623 for a door frame for use. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 has a portion of the upper hinge body 621 bent downward, which is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame 4.

  The main frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear part of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L-shape. A lower hinge hole (not shown) for the outer frame that is pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and a horizontally extending flat plate that is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641. The rear portion of the plate-shaped member is bent upward in an L-shape and penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 and the lower hinge second main body 643, so that the door frame-side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 is opened. A door frame lower hinge hole 644 for pivotal support and a door frame extending upward from the left end behind the door frame lower hinge hole 644 at a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a restricting piece 645 for restricting a rotation range of the third rotating member. .

  The lower hinge second main body 643 has a horizontally-extended portion with a predetermined interval above the horizontally-extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641, and a portion bent upward has a lower hinge first portion. The body 641 is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward. In this main body side lower hinge member 640, a portion bent upward of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross section in a plan view with its right side opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross section. In addition, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. A pair of left positioning members 661 are mounted vertically separated from each other.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600, and also enters the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Illegal insertion of a tool can be prevented.

[4-4. Ball launching device]
The ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57, 59, and 60. The ball firing device 680 is a device for driving game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball firing device 680, the hitting strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is mounted on a flat launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the rear surface of the launching base 681 on the right side in front view. A launch solenoid 682, which is a rotary solenoid that penetrates and extends forward, a hitting hammer 683 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the firing solenoid 682, and a diagonally upward left extension near the tip of the hitting hammer 683. And a launch rail 684 on which a game ball can be rolled.

  In this ball launching device 680, game balls are supplied from the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the firing rail 684, and the game balls are supplied to the upper right end of the firing rail 684. When the handle lever 504 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting hammer 683. The game ball hit by the ball hammer 683 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 684, and is hit into the game area 5a.

  If the hit ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the hit of the game ball or the like, the distance between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). From the foul cover unit 520 to the foul ball receiving port 530 below, and is discharged to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 520.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 700 protruding forward from the unit base 701 and locking with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower portion of the unit base 701 in a columnar shape, and from the front side. A key cylinder 710 for unlocking either the door frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703 in accordance with the rotation direction of the inserted unlock key.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 61 is a perspective view of the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the payout unit viewed from the back. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 67 (a) is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 67 (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. FIG. 70A is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 70B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. FIG. 71 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is closed by the movable ball removing piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 71 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is opened by the movable ball removing piece. It is. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing, in an enlarged manner, a portion of the dispensing blade in the dispensing device.

  FIG. 73A is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 73B is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 74 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 74 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from behind. is there. Further, FIG. 75 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit as exploded from the front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full ball path unit as exploded from the rear. Further, FIG. 78 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank route unit, and FIG. 78 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the taxiway opening / closing door is open. . FIG. 79 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62 and the like, the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment is attached to an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and attached to an upper portion of the payout unit base 801. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape extending left and right and opened upward and attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. And a tank rail 803 extending left and right to guide the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left in front view. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two front and rear rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 80) that is swingably suspended from above.

  The payout unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner. A payout device 830 which is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board 951 accommodated in a payout control board box 950. And The game balls circulate in two rows from the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, and the payout devices 830 pay out the game balls one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 to guide the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and to play the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. Guide path 861 that guides the game balls forward to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 from the front end, and guides the game balls discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e forward to the door frame 3 from the front end. The front end openings of the full guide path 862 that guides to the full tank receiving port 530 and the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 are connected to the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 extending up and down and having a rear side opened, a box-shaped rear case 822 attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and having a front side opened, and a front case. A flat partition plate 823 that is attached between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and that separates the front case 821 and the rear case 822 from each other. The front and rear ends of the partition plate 823 pass through the front case 821 and the rear race 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 mounted thereon, and a pair of movable piece members front 825 and rear 826 mounted rotatably by the shaft member 824 and arranged in the front case and the rear case, respectively. Ball detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational position of the pair of movable piece members 825 before and 826 after the movable piece member.

  The front case 821 has a ball guiding entrance 821a which is open at the upper part of the right side thereof so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a ball guiding exit which is open at a position closer to the right side than the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. 821b, and a guiding path 821c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 821a and the ball guiding outlet 821b and through which game balls can flow. The guide passage 821c extends from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end thereof at an obliquely lower angle with respect to the horizontal at a small angle, and at the center of the height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introducer 821d. The detection unit 821e includes a detection unit 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering unit 821f that extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 821d to the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 has a cutout portion 821g on the right wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c when viewed from the front.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guiding entrance 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side thereof so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a ball guidance exit that opens at a position closer to the right side than the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. 822b, and a guiding path 822c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 822a and the ball guiding outlet 822b and through which game balls can flow. The guiding passage 822c extends obliquely from the ball guiding entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end so as to be lower at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and the center of the height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introducing portion 822d. The detection section 822e includes a detection section 822e that extends straight down to the vicinity, and a meandering section 822f that extends in a meandering manner from the detection section 822d to the left and right widths of the rear case 822. In addition, the rear case 822 includes a cutout portion 822g on the right wall of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c when viewed from the front.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. When the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the rear case 822 is formed such that the guiding passage 821c and the guiding passage 822c coincide with each other. I have.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a vertically movable flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a, a shaft hole 825b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and through which a shaft member 824 is inserted, and a movable piece 825a. An extension 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a. The extension 825c and the movable piece 825a are connected to each other, and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight mounting portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through hole penetrating forward and backward; A detection piece 825f which extends outward from the right end and which can be detected by the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position close to the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 passes through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attachment portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. Then, the movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the cutout portion 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a projects into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 821c (detection unit 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts on the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is prevented from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 821c (leftward in front view). In addition, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in a direction (to the right in a front view) in which the lower end of the movable piece 825a approaches the wall of the guide path 821c, the left surface of the movable piece 825a Coincide with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f at the front of the movable piece member 825 is in a state of not detecting with respect to the ball cutout detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 821c, the ball-out detection sensor 827 does not detect.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a vertically movable plate-like movable piece 826a, a shaft hole 826b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a, and through which a shaft member 824 is inserted, and a movable piece 826a. An extension 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other, and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight mounting portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and has a through hole penetrating forward and backward, and A detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end and that can be detected by the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and a flat extension that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attachment portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the cutout portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a projects into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g is The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c (detection unit 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts on the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is prevented from further rotating in the direction that projects into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). In addition, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in a direction (to the right in front view) so as to approach the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left surface of the movable piece 826a Coincide with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f at the front of the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball cut detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 822c, the ball-out detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls being arranged in a row in front and rear by a tank rail 803, and a plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. 822 allows the user to be guided back and forth in two rows to the lower payout device 830 (see FIG. 80). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and can flow well. Can be.

  Also, when the game balls flow through the guide paths 821c and 822c of the ball guiding unit 820, the game balls come into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a at the front 825 of the movable piece member and at the rear 826 of the movable piece member, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The front of the movable piece 825 and the rear of the movable piece 826 rotate in the direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f at the front of the movable piece member 825 and at the rear of the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that a game ball is present in the guide paths 821c and 822c.

  When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 820 pays out the game balls, the game balls in the guide paths 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game balls flow in the guidance passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game balls flowing in the introduction portions 821d and 822d increases, and the game balls flowing in the introduction portions 821d and 822d are movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It rebounds to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game ball, the vibration causes the movable pieces 825a and 826a to be caught or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide paths 821c and 822c. Scratched dust and dirt can be removed, and the movable pieces 825 and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight and the like.

  Further, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls flowing through the respective guiding passages 821c and 822c by using separate movable member fronts 825 and 826, respectively, and also detects the movable ball front 825 and movable ball. Since each of the detecting pieces 825f and 826f of the rear of one piece 826 is detected by one ball out detecting sensor 827, when the game ball in any one of the guide paths 821c and 822c runs out, the front of the movable piece 825 is lost. Alternatively, the movable pieces 825a and 826a behind the movable piece member 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the ball out detection sensor 827. . Therefore, since the running out of the game ball can be detected at an early stage, the game ball can be quickly replenished, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, by screwing metal screws as weights into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the front movable member 825 and the rear movable member 826, the weight of the front movable member 825, the movable member rear 826, and the weight of the weight. Accordingly, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction in which they project into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably mounted outside the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. No dust or dust adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even when the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. By doing so, it is possible to rotate satisfactorily, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment includes the movable pieces 825a and 826a at the front of the movable piece member 825 and the rear of the movable piece member 826 whose lower ends protrude into the guide paths 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow by their own weight. By attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface in contact with the game ball, the movable piece 825a is determined by the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826 and the weight of the weight. , 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c, 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably mounted outside the guide passage 822c, and the lower ends protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt in the guide passages 821c and 822c are provided. Does not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even when the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. Thus, the movable pieces 825a and 826 (the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member) can be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as a weight is screwed into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e formed as through holes and mounted, even if the front of the movable piece member 825 and the rear of the movable piece member 826 frequently rotate, the weight is not changed. The front 825 and the rear 826 of the movable member can be maintained in a good state for a long time without coming off from the front 825 of the movable member and the rear 826 of the movable member (weight attachment portions 825e, 826e). . Further, the weight can be easily attached to the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, thereby simplifying the trouble of attaching the weight. Thus, the cost of assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the guide passages 821c and 822c have an introduction portion 822d that guides the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 825c, on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 825c protrude inward. When the game ball flows in the passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, by vibrating the movable pieces 825a and 826a, it is possible to remove dust, dirt, and the like that have been caught or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front part 825 and the rear part 826 of the movable part can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be favorably rotated, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to erroneous detection or the like. Even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide balls 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that promptness can be obtained. Can be replenished with game balls, and by reducing the time during which the game is interrupted as short as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The payout device 830 has a box shape with an open rear side, and has a payout opening 831a that is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. Payout exit 831b, a ball extraction outlet 831c that is open near the right end of the bottom surface in front view so that game balls can pass through, and a payout passage 831d that connects the payout inlet 831a and the payout outlet 831b and through which game balls can flow. And a front box 831 that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with a ball extraction outlet 831c and has a ball extraction passage 831e through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A payout opening 832a, which has a box shape with an open front side and is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass therethrough, and game balls near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. The dispensing outlet 832b is opened to be able to pass through, the ball extracting outlet 832c is opened near the right end of the bottom surface in front view so that the game ball can pass, and the dispensing inlet 832a communicates with the dispensing outlet 832b so that the game ball is distributed. It includes a possible payout passage 832d and a rear box 832 that has a ball free passage 832e that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicates with the ball emptying outlet 832c, and through which game balls can flow.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and is a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 whose rear side is open, and is attached to the inside of the front box 831 so that the rotating shaft passes through the front box 831. The dispensing motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, a driving gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 834, meshes with the driving gear 835, and can be rotated by the front box 831 and the front cover 833. , A driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 penetrating rotatably, and a front end attached to the front cover 833 and A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and a shaft member 837 penetrates the shaft member 837, which is rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832. A dispensing blade 839 that is disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 839. And

  Furthermore, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and has a flat partition plate 841 for separating the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832; And a rear box 832, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a game ball discharged by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, payout passages 831d and 832d, and a ball emptying passage. 831e and 832e are diverged from each other and are rotatably mounted by a front box 831 and a rear box 832, and can be used to close the ball passages 831e and 832e. A ball release lever 844 slidably mounted vertically slidably on the upper right side of the box 832 to make the ball release movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout entrance 831a to the ball ejection outlet 831c, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. Bends to extend vertically to the left, near the center of the total height, to the left to extend substantially horizontally, and then extends vertically downward about 1/3 from the left end to the left and right width of the front box 831 again Thus, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 831b. The dispensing blade 839 is disposed at a portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball emptying passage 831e is a form in which a portion extending obliquely downward and to the right from the payout entrance 831a in the payout passage 831d is further extended. It diverges to the height near the center.

  In addition, the front box 831 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout exit 831b in the payout passage 831d, and protruding rearward as it goes downward, and is formed at an upper portion on the right side in front view. And a lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball ejection outlet 832c, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. After being bent so as to extend vertically to the left and approximately horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right widths of the rear box 832. Thus, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the rear box 832, and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 832b. The dispensing blade 839 is disposed at a portion of the dispensing passage 832d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball emptying passage 832e is a form in which the portion extending obliquely downward and to the right from the payout entrance 832a in the payout passage 832d is further extended from the height of about 1/3 from the upper surface to the total height of the rear box 832. It diverges to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout exit 832b in the payout passage 832d, and is formed at an upper portion of a guide shelf 832f protruding forward as it goes downward, and on the right side in front view. And a lever mounting portion 832g for mounting the ball pullout lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The pay-out passages 831d and 832d and the ball empty passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the back box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout blades 839 are arranged. Further, between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached. In other words, the game balls flowing through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls flowing through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are separated from the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought near the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angle of 60 degrees in the circumferential direction from a spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detecting pieces 837b and a connecting portion 837c projecting rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and having irregularities formed on a peripheral surface at a rear end thereof and connectable to the dispensing blade 839 are provided. .

  The dispensing blade 839 extends cylindrically forward and backward, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals in a circumferential direction from a front end of the base cylinder 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted. A plurality (three) of front blades 839b and a plurality of front blades 839b projecting from the rear end of the base cylinder portion 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be alternated. 3) A rear blade 839c and a connected portion that projects cylindrically forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a and that has irregularities that can be connected to the connecting portion 387c of the driven gear 837 at the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  The front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the dispensing blade 839 are provided three each at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c is rotated relative to the front blade 839b so as to be staggered. It extends outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc depressed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  Also, the three front blades 839b and the rear blade 839c are formed such that the outer diameter D1 of the outer periphery of the base cylinder portion 839a about the axis thereof is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. The diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder 839a up to the part closest to the axis of the base cylinder 839a in the arcuate region (sphere housing 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 72). That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most concave portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is four times.

  Therefore, it is possible to hold approximately 3/10 (between 1/4 to 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball by the arc portion (ball accommodation portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. Thereby, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be promptly accommodated between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c) (the ball accommodating portion 839e).

  In the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, with the dispensing device 830 assembled, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out respectively. Further, the discharge blade 839 is disposed at a position below the center of the entire height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832 in the discharge passages 831d and 832d, and is bent in a crank shape. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the rotation center of the payout blade 839 is located immediately below a portion that extends vertically downward from near the center of the entire height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. Then, in the portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 61). In the present embodiment, the distance S is set to 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most concave portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  Accordingly, the payout device 830 can pass through the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 comes into contact with the outer periphery of the front blades 839b and 839c. Therefore, it is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839, can pass through the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d, 832d, and can pass through the payout outlets 831b, 832b. Released downward.

  Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to be about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer diameter of the game ball is set to 1 by the ball accommodating portion 839e. Since a depth of / 7 to ４ is accommodated, the time required to accommodate the game ball can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 is made as small as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated quickly, the game balls can be stored in the ball storage portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the related art, and the time required for paying out game balls can be shortened.

  The ball-moving movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape up and down and back and forth, and has a body portion 843a whose lower portion is bent to form a letter shape when viewed from the front, and a tubular shape that extends back and forth at the upper end of the body portion 843a. A shaft cylinder portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer side surface of the main body portion 843a which is bent, and a main body portion 843c. And a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 71) formed of a through hole penetrating back and forth at a lower portion bent in a V-shape.

  When the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball-moving movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower part of the main body 843a extends obliquely to the lower left in front view, and the shaft cylinder portion 843b at the upper end dispenses the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is rotatable at a position extending obliquely to the lower right in front view from the payout entrances 831a and 832a and at a position outside the wall on the right side in front view slightly higher than the portion bent downward. Mounted on

  The dispensing device 830 of the present embodiment has a state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward in a normal state, and the lower part of the ball-pulling lever 844 is brought into contact with the projecting portion 843c of the ball-pulling movable piece 843 from the right in front view. In contact. Thus, the rotation of the ball-moving movable piece 843 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front is restricted (see FIG. 71A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a of the ball-moving movable piece 843 that is bent in a rectangular shape, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is obliquely lower left in front view. Extending to The lower end of the main body 843a is located near a portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball-out passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, the ball removing movable pieces 843 (the main body portion 843a) close the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a partial wall of the payout passages 831d and 832d. are doing.

  The ball-moving movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball-moving movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the shaft cylinder portion 843b. Although a force for rotating the anti-clockwise rotation in a front view is exerted by this, the rotation in the counterclockwise direction is regulated by the ball release lever 844, so that the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball pulling lever 844 separates from the protrusion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise in front view. Restrictions on movement are lifted. Accordingly, the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the shaft cylinder portion 843b. Note that the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the right side surface of the lower part of the main body 843a contacts the left surfaces of the members forming the right side surfaces of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 60 (b)). As a result, the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removing passages 831e and 832e to be discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball-moving movable piece 843 is provided with the weight mounting portion 843d, a weight made of a metal screw is screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d to mount the ball-moving lever 844 upward. Then, when the regulation of the counterclockwise rotation in the front view is released, the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 projects into the ball removing passages 381e and 832e due to the own weight of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be easily rotated in the direction (counterclockwise in front view).

  In a normal state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball-pulling passages 831e and 832e, the game balls entering from the payout ports 831a and 832a are transferred to the main body 843a of the ball-pulling movable piece 843. Since the contact is made with the game ball, the ball-moving movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact. Therefore, dust, dust, and the like that are caught or intruded between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball-moving movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate due to biting, dust, or the like.

  In addition, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d formed as a through-hole, the weight can be moved even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The weight-moving piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without coming off from the (weight attachment portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-moving movable piece 843 only by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. Can be reduced.

  If the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removing movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843, or the rotating shaft rusts, and the ball removing movable piece 843 rusts. The movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game balls entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the movable ball removing piece 843, the ball removing passage 831e is formed by the movable ball removing piece 843. , 832e are closed, and when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 843. The ball removing movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removing lever 844 is operated to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, the ball removing movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball can be reliably removed. In addition, workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to a position below the payout device 830 in the payout unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851 with an open rear side, and is mounted on the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and has a front open side. It has a box-shaped upper full cover 852 and a dispensing device pressing member 853 rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 830 upward.

  In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving opening 850a that is open upward to allow a game ball to pass therethrough at a position on the left side from the left and right center in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the left and right center in the front view on the upper surface. Is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper ball storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which game balls flow, a normal discharge port 850d opening downward at a lower portion of the upper ball storage passage 850c immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a, and an upper ball storage passage A full tank discharge port 850e that opens downward at a position other than the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d, and a full tank discharge port 850e. And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  In addition, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball emptying path 850g that guides game balls entering from the upper ball emptying entrance 850b downward, and an upper part that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball emptying path 850g. And a ball ejection outlet 850h. In the upper full tank path unit 850, a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball ejection outlet 850h are sequentially opened from the left side in a front view and downward. The upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 on the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

  In this upper full tank path unit 850, in an assembled state with the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlet 831b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball removing inlet 850b has It is located immediately below the ball ejection outlet 831c of the dispensing device 830. In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are connected to the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit 860. 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865, each of which is opened directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 80).

  In the upper full ball path unit 850, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlet 831b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper discharge ball reception opening 850a is opened directly below the upper discharge ball reception 850a. From the normal discharge port 850d.

  When the inside of the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and the inside of the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is in a closed state. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition piece 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c get over the partition piece 850f and become full. It will be discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 202 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860.

  In this manner, the upper full tank path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 201 in accordance with the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 202.

[4-6d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached below the upper full tank path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game balls released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward, and guides the game balls from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 through the normal guide path 861. And a full tank guide path 862 that guides the game balls released from the full tank discharge port 850 e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward and guides them from the front end to the full tank receiver 530 of the door frame 3, A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 by connecting the guideway open / close door 863 to the normal guideway 861. And a closing spring 864 that urges the front end opening in a direction to close the opening.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the upper ball emptying outlet 850h of the upper full tank path unit 850 to the front, and from the center right end in the front-rear direction on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. And a lower ball-free guideway 865 for discharging air to the sphere.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860, the normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower ball empty guideway 865 are arranged in order from the left to the right in front view. The normal guideway 861, the full tank guideway 862, and the lower ball empty guideway 865 have their rear ends opened upward. The normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right, and extend forward to near the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lower. Further, the full tank taxiway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal taxiway 861. The normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball empty guide path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided into upper and lower parts, as shown in the figure.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867, and is rotated clockwise in front view by a closing spring 864. Being energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860, a full tank guide path 862 opening to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view is one game with respect to the normal guide path 861. It is arranged at a position lower by the height of the sphere. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and on the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 includes a disc-shaped base 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely to the upper left from the base 863a and that can close the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending in a flat plate shape to the right from the base portion 863a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862, and an extension portion 863d extending in a plate shape diagonally to the lower left from the base portion 863a. And an operating projection 863e that projects forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extension 863d and that can abut on the door opening / closing abutment 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 does not require the openings to be closed, but means that the game balls cannot pass through. The operating projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base 863a when viewed from the front, and is inclined so that the front end face projects forward as approaching the end side in the counterclockwise direction. are doing.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is moved from the front end of the lower cover 867 from below the front end opening of the full guideway 862. By contacting the boss 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the lower ball-filled ball path unit 860 according to the present embodiment has a front end formed with a through-ball passage 526, a ball-filled ball socket 530, and a door opening / closing port in the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 537 (see FIG. 79). When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guideway opening / closing door 863 does not abut on the operation protrusion 863 e. As a result, it is rotated clockwise in a front view, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 78). (A)). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal taxiway 861 and the full-filled taxiway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal taxiway 861 and the full-filled taxiway The game ball does not spill from the road 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863, and the door frame 3 is activated. Due to the inclination of the front end face of the projection 863e, a force acts on the guideway opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction in front view against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that have closed the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal taxiway 861 And, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 78 (b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 and the second door plate 863c is located above the front end opening of the full guideway 862. .

  In the state where the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4 and the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank are full. At the front side of the front end opening of the taxiway 862, the penetrating sphere passage 526 of the foul cover unit 520 and the full tank receiving port 528 of the door frame 3 are located. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 526 and the full tank receiving port 528 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different from each other in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are rotated by rotating the taxiway opening / closing door 863. Since the doors are opened and closed, the operating range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 can be reduced in size. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be more effectively utilized.

  The payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is configured such that the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 201. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal taxiway 861 is full of game balls, the game balls are normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. When it remains above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it flows to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, The payout of the game balls to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 520 is automatically switched. Thereafter, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830, and the lower plate 202 in addition to the upper plate 201 becomes full of the game balls and cannot supply the game balls to the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 520 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 533 of. When the movable piece 534 rotates and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535 when the game balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls. Is notified, and the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is released.

  The stop of the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 in response to the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is performed, for example, until the movable balls 534 are detected in the storage passage 533 of the foul cover unit 520. In this state, the number that can fill the storage path 533 on the upstream side, the full guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, and the upper sphere storage path 850 c of the upper full tank path unit 850. When the game balls are paid out, the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 may be stopped. Thereby, since more game balls can be stored than the conventional pachinko machine, in the game state where many game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are dispensed by paying out the game balls. It is possible to reduce the necessity of worrying about being full of game balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on the jackpot game and entertain.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a bass speaker mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side in front view of the rear side of the board unit base 910, and a power supply board is housed therein, and an interface control mounted on the back side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which a board is accommodated, and a payout control board in which a payout control board 951 that is attached across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls is accommodated. And a box 950.

  The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
Next, the overall structure of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 82 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 83 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 87 is a front view in which a front component and a front unit in the game board are cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is provided with a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and whose outer shape is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a is formed. A plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to a lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, which is driven by driving game balls into the gaming area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 142) for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the game panel 1100, a main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front panel mounted on the game panel 1100. And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is mounted on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 has a transparent plate-like panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery that is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 includes a plurality of general prize ports 2001 which are always open to accept game balls hit into the game area 5a and a plurality of general prize ports 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to receive a ball, a gate 2003 mounted at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of a game ball, and a game ball passing through the gate 2003 A second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be accepted in accordance with a normal lottery result to be drawn by the player, and a first special lottery result or a second start performed by accepting a game ball in the first starting port 2002 A first special winning opening 2005 and a second special winning opening 2006 in which game balls can be received in any one of them according to a second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the mouth 2004; Eteiru. The second special winning opening 2006 is composed of two special winning openings, a second upper special winning opening 2006a and a second lower special winning opening 2006b arranged in one flow path through which the game ball circulates (FIG. 87).

  In addition, a count indicator 2007 is arranged in the lower center of the second big winning opening 2006 (see FIG. 87). The count display 2007 is displayed during a certain period (for example, a period from the start of one big hit game to the end thereof, a period during which the probability improvement control is being executed, a period when the time saving control is being executed, and the like). The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 pays out the prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 2006 by the second upper prize port sensor 2554 and the second lower prize port sensor 2557. It controls to display the total number. In the count display 2007 of the present example, a prize paid out based on the detection of a game ball entering the second large winning opening 2006 by the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 and the second lower winning opening sensor 2557. When updating the total number of balls, the ball is incremented by one, which is the minimum unit. Further, in this example, after the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2554 and the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557, the count display 2007 is displayed with a certain period of delay. Start updating (delay). In addition, the interval when counting up the display of the count display 2007 is longer than the shortest interval of 0.6 seconds at which the ball can be hit by the ball launching device 680, and one game ball is detected. The interval is such that “15” corresponding to the number of prize balls that can be obtained based on this (15 in this case) is added. As described above, in the count display 2007 of the present example, the update of the display is started with a delay from the detection of the incoming ball, and the update interval is relatively long. Therefore, during the execution of the big hit game, the count display 2007 is displayed. Updates are less likely to be interrupted.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the technique area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning port 2005. The lower side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the mouth unit 2100 in front view and has three general winning openings 2001, and is mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in front view. A frame shape attached to the upper side unit 2300 and substantially at the center in the game area 5a and having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006. A center role 2500.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. The back unit 3000 is disposed at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably mounting the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A mechanism 3020, a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end of the back box 3010 when viewed from the front and discharging the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center role 2500, Attached near the front end of the lower right corner in front view inside the back box 3010, the second big winning opening 2006 and the second Lower right ball passage unit 3035 for discharging accepted gaming balls out port 2543C, and a.

  The back unit 3000 also includes an upper relay board 3040 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010, an upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and a rotatable mounting on the rear surface of the back box 3010. Box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, effect drive board 3043 accommodated in effect drive board box 3042, panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010, and panel relay board 3044 And a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side of the panel.

  The back unit 3000 further includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end in the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back unit below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. A rear lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a back box A rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view within the 3010, and a back upper center attached from the center in the left and right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable staging unit 3400 and movable staging unit 3100 under the back below opening 3010a in back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower left end to the left in the left-right direction in the front view and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view and passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in the front view to the upper right diagonal, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed substantially inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  The front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000 and having an upper part curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail And an impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and that a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow preventing member which is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only in the open position where it is turned around and opened between the outer rail 1001 and returned to the closed position side. 1007.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel plate 1110 having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. The panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate back and forth to mount the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel board 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting back unit 3000 and a plurality of positioning holes formed on the rear surface.

  When the game panel 1100 is mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel board 1110 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding section 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and the front open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. When the board holder 1200 is assembled on the game board 5, the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 can be covered from below. Thereby, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out opening 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged part 1201 (see FIG. 85).

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86 and FIG. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the improper act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator made up of one LED for displaying a game state, and two LEDs based on a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball to the gate unit 2003. , A normal symbol display for displaying these two LEDs in a lighting manner according to a normal lottery result after the normal symbol is variably displayed by flashing control, and a fluctuation display of the normal symbol relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. Among them, a normal holding indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings, which is the number of changing displays for which the start condition of the changing display has not been satisfied, and accepting a game ball to the first starting port 2002 (starting prize). After the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed by blinking the eight LEDs based on the result of the first special lottery selected by (occurrence). And the first special symbol display for displaying the LED in a lighting mode according to the result of the first special lottery, and the variation display of the first special symbol related to the reception of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. A first special reserve number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the reserve number, which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition is not satisfied, and the reception of game balls to the second start port 2004 (the occurrence of a start prize). The second special symbol is displayed by varying the second special symbol by blinking control of the eight LEDs based on the selected second special lottery result, and then displaying these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the second special lottery result. A second display for displaying a symbol display and the number of variable displays, which are the number of variable displays for which the start condition of the variable display has not yet been satisfied among the variable displays of the second special symbol relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004; Two L D and the number of repetitions of the opening and closing pattern of the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. And a round indicator comprising two LEDs for displaying (number of rounds).

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. The peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 142) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image (see FIG. 142). reference).

[5-7. Main liquid crystal display]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

  As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side in front view, and right fixing pieces protruding outward from the right side in front view. 1602. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from obliquely rearward of the box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is moved downward. By sliding to, it is attached to the back box 3010.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83 and FIGS. 85 to 87. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. The front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end passes through the opening 1112. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 according to the present embodiment is configured such that a plurality of general prize holes 2001 which can receive game balls hit into the game area 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general prize ports 2001 are in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open so as to receive a game ball at a different position, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing through the section 2003, and a lottery performed by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A first special winning opening 2005 and a second special winning opening 2006 that allow game balls to be accepted in either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  Of the plurality (four in this case) of general winning openings 2001, three are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged near the upper right in front view in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is located right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is disposed in the game area 5a at the upper right in front view and substantially immediately below the stop unit 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate portion 2003 as viewed from the front. Among the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning opening 2001 arranged near the upper right in front view in the game area 5a is arranged immediately above the second starting opening 2004. The first special winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second special winning opening 2006 is located above the first special winning opening 2005 on the right side of the first starting opening 2002 in a front view.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the second big winning opening 2006a and the second lower big winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which the game ball circulates, as shown in FIG. It consists of. In the second special winning opening 2006, a second upper special winning opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right in front view in the game area 5a, and a second lower special winning opening 2006b is viewed in front of the second upper special winning opening 2006a. It is located below on the left.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the technique area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning port 2005. The lower side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the mouth unit 2100 in front view and has three general winning openings 2001, and is mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in front view. A frame shape attached to the upper side unit 2300 and substantially at the center in the game area 5a and having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006. A center role 2500.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 (a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit as viewed from the back. The starting port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1111 near the lower end in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning port 2005.

  The starting port unit 2100 has a rectangular unit base 2101 attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 and having a first winning port 2005 penetrating back and forth in a rectangular shape extending left and right, and a first base unit 2101 in the unit base 2101. A ball receiving portion 2102 protruding forward from an upper portion of a substantially central portion in the left-right direction above the large winning opening 2005 and forming a first starting opening 2002, and a first starting opening attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101. A ball guiding unit 2103 for guiding a game ball received in 2002 downward, a first starting port sensor 2104 attached to the ball guiding unit 2103 and detecting a game ball received in the first starting port 2002; A first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big winning opening 2005.

  The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first big winning opening 2005 from the rear, and has a front end which is substantially the same size as the first big winning opening 2005 and is opened forward. Box-shaped unit case 2111, and a first oblong door having a horizontally long rectangular shape and a flat plate shape whose lower side is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the first winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 for driving the opening and closing of the first winning port door member 2112, and a first winning port 2005 mounted in the unit case 2111 and received in the first winning port 2005. First winning opening sensor 2114 for detecting a game ball that has fallen, and a first A starting port unit relay board 2115 for relaying the connection between the moving port sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, and the first winning port sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310; A starting port unit decorative board (not shown) for illuminating and decorating the winning port 2005.

  The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 has a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time, and is open upward. The first special winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 has a size capable of receiving a plurality of (for example, 4 to 6) game balls at a time and is opened forward.

  The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 formed by a ball receiving portion 2102 that is open upward, and a game ball received by the first starting port 2002 is unit-based by a ball guiding portion 2103. After being guided downward on the rear side of 2101 and detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, it can be discharged downward through the first attacker unit 2110. In the present embodiment, two first starting port sensors 2104 are provided. In the main control board 1310, when the two first starting port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first starting port sensor 2104 is provided. In 2002, it is determined that a game ball has been accepted. This makes it possible to detect an improper act caused by improper insertion of a tool into the first starting port 2002.

  In the starting port unit 2100, the first attacker unit 2110 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, so that the first winning port door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened in the unit base 2101. It is inserted from the back into the mouth 2005 to close the first big winning opening 2005. The first big win opening door member 2112 is mounted upright with the first big win opening 2005 closed, and the left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111. By rotating so as to move downward, the first special winning opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

  The first special winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (the state in which the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized), and closes the first special winning opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the game state, the first winning port door member 2112 is rotated so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly above the lower side. It will be located. That is, the first large winning opening door member 2112 is inclined so as to increase from the lower side of the first large winning opening 2005 toward the front.

  In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first special winning opening 2005 and comes into contact with the first special winning opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game ball is changed from below by the inclination of the first special winning opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear, is accepted by the first big winning opening 2005, and enters the unit case 2111. Then, the game balls received in the first special winning opening 2005 are discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2114.

[5-8b. Below the side unit]
Next, the lower side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 (a) is a perspective view of the lower side unit and the upper side of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 89 (b) is a perspective view of the lower side unit and the upper side of the side unit as viewed from the rear. The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001.

  The lower side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2201 extending in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The rear is open, and three ball receiving portions 2202 each forming a general winning opening 2001 and communicate with the rear end of the ball receiving portion 2202 and protrude rearward from the rear surface of the unit base 2201. A gutter 2203 for guiding the game ball received in the winning opening 2001 backward.

  The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to become higher toward the left as viewed from the front. The three ball receiving portions 2202 protrude from the front surface of the unit base 2201 while being separated from each other left and right. The ball receiving portion 2202 forming the general winning opening 2001 has a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time, and is open upward.

  With the lower side unit 2200 attached to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the leftmost general winning opening 2001 in front view is located slightly to the right of the right end of the upper side unit 2300. The lower side unit 2200 can guide the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1112 by the gutter 2203. Then, the game ball guided to the rear of the panel board 1112 is a general winning opening sensor 3015 (see FIG. 125) mounted in the lower left lower ball guiding unit 3505 of the lower rear front movable effect unit 3500 of the rear unit 3000. And is discharged downward.

[5-8c. On the side unit]
Next, the upper side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, slightly downward from the center in the up-down direction at the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view in the game area 5a.

  The upper side unit 2300 includes a flat plate-shaped unit base 2301 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a shelf 2302 protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2301 and extending left and right so that the right end side in front view becomes lower. And The shelf 2302 extends from the left end to the right end of the unit base 2301.

  The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front of the panel board 1110, and the left end of the shelf 2302 is close to the inner rail 1002. (The center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a).

[5-8d. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 90 is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the right flow path in the center role. Further, FIG. 93 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the second attacker unit in the center role, and FIG. 93 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 93 (a).

  The center role item 2500 is disposed above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit lower portion 2200 in the game area 5a, substantially at the center in a front view, and slightly upward, and on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The center role item 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and it is possible to visually recognize, from the front, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the frame and the effect units provided in the back unit 3000. it can. The center role item 2500 has one general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006.

  The center role 2500 is a flat frame-shaped flange portion 2511 that contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the periphery of the opening portion 1112 that penetrates the front and back at the center of the panel plate 1112, and forward from the flange portion 2511. A frame-like shape having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 that protrudes and prevents game balls from entering the frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 that protrudes rearward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the opening 1112. A center base 2510 is provided. The front peripheral wall portion 2512 is formed over substantially the entire periphery of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. Further, the front peripheral wall portion 2512 is highest at a position slightly leftward from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side.

  In addition, the center role product 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is opened at the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 at a substantially central outer peripheral surface in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, so that the game ball can enter. A warp passage 2521 that guides the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 to the lower end of the left side in front view within the front peripheral wall portion 2512, and a game ball that has flowed through the warp passage 2521 can be discharged. The warp outlet 2522 (see FIG. 87) that is open at the center and the game ball released from the warp outlet 2522 is moved to the center in the left-right direction along the lower side behind the flange portion 2511 and within the frame of the center base 2510. A guiding path 2523 for guiding and a game ball guided by the guiding path 2523 can be supplied from the left end in front view. And a stage 2530 extending left and right along the lower side within the frame of the center portion of the center base 2510 in the left and right direction, and rolling the supplied game ball in the left and right direction and then discharging the ball into the game area 5a. Have.

  The stage 2530 is curved so that the left and right ends thereof are high in front view and the left and right sides of a portion corresponding to the center in the left and right direction of the game area 5a are the lowest, and the space between the lowest portions is slightly higher. Is out. That is, the stage 2530 is formed in a W-shape with a gentle inclination. The stage 2530 is formed at the apex of a slightly elevated portion corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and has a fan-shaped central guiding portion 2531 which is lowered forward and slightly spreads right and left, and a central guiding portion 2531. And a fan-shaped side guide portion 2532 which is formed at each of the two lowest portions on the left and right sides of the right side and lowers forward and spreads left and right.

  When the game board 5 is assembled, the stage 2530 enters the warp entrance 2520 in the game area 5a, and the game ball supplied to the stage 2530 via the warp passage 2521, the warp exit 2522, and the guide path 2523 is It is discharged forward from either the center guide portion 2531 or the side guide portion 2532 of the stage 2530 and returned again into the game area 5a (returned). In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the stage 2530 has the first starting port 2002 located immediately below the central guiding section 2531. When the game ball is released from the central guiding section 2531 into the game area 5a. , With a very high probability.

  As shown in FIG. 92, the center role product 2500 has a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extending substantially vertically downward from the right end in the front view of the upper side of the center base 2510 to near the center in the vertical direction. In the state where the game board 5 is assembled from the lower end of the vertical wall portion 2512a and the upper right vertical wall portion 2512a, the front peripheral wall is slightly lowered to the vicinity of the inner periphery of the game area 5a (near the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000). A right upper horizontal wall portion 2512b in which a part of the portion 2512 extends rightward, and a right hanging wall portion in which a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends downward from the right end of the upper right horizontal wall to approximately the same height as the stage 2530. 2512c, and a lower right lateral wall portion 2512d in which a part of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 extends to the left so as to be slightly lower from the lower end of the right hanging wall portion 2512c toward the center in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a.

  In addition, the center role item 2500 is formed on the outer peripheral side of the upper right vertical wall portion 2512a and the upper right horizontal wall portion 2512b in cooperation with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the upper right circulation space 2541 through which game balls can flow, A right flow passage 2542 through which the game ball can flow downward on the right side in front view of the right hanging wall portion 2512c communicating with the circulation space 2541, and a game ball formed below the lower right horizontal wall portion 2512d communicating with the right flow passage 2542. And a lower right circulation space 2543 that can be circulated and can communicate with the game area 5a. The upper right circulation space 2541, the right flow passage 2542, and the lower right circulation space 2543 form a right hitting game area 2540 in the game area 5a.

  The upper right circulation space 2541 is a space having a predetermined size whose dimensions in the up-down direction and the left-right direction are sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and allows the game ball to flow down a free path. The right flow passage 2542 is bent so that the lower end portion extending vertically downward is bent so as to extend diagonally to the lower left in front view, and has a width in the left-right direction slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. The game balls can be made to flow down in a row in a vertical direction.

  The lower right circulation space 2543 extends leftward from immediately below a portion communicating with the lower end of the right flow passage 2542 so that the left end side in front view is lower, and then opens a left attacker passage 2543a, A discharge passage 2543b communicating with the right end of the two-attacker passage 2543a in a front view and extending downward, and a discharge passage 2543b at the lower end of the discharge passage 2543b, which is open rearward through the flange portion 2511 so that game balls can pass therethrough. And a two-out port 2543c. The second attacker passage 2543a of the lower right circulation space 2543 has a vertical dimension that is approximately twice the outer diameter of the game ball, and the discharge passage 2543b has a left and right dimension that is outside the game ball. The passage is slightly wider than the diameter. When the lower right circulation space 2543 is assembled to the game board 5, the left end (downstream end) of the second attacker passage 2543 a is located at the left of the starting port unit 2100 when viewed from the front, and is connected to the first starting port 2002 and the first large port. It is open to the left at a height between the winning opening 2005 and game balls are discharged into the game area 5a from the left end of the second attacker passage 2543a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b is sent to the rear of the flange portion 2511 (game panel 1100) through the second out port 2543c opened at the lower end of the discharge passage 2543b, and returned to the game area 5a. It is discharged from the game board 5 without being played.

  The upper right circulation space 2541 is entirely open at the front, and has a flange extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the upper right vertical wall portion 2512a and the upper right horizontal wall portion 2512b at a substantially lower half in the vertical direction at the rear. It is closed by the part 2511. The right flow passage 2542 is closed by a flat transparent right front decorative plate 2544 extending rightward in front view from the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the right hanging wall portion 2512c at the front, and the right hanging wall at the rear. It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the portion 2512c. The lower right circulation space 2543 is closed by a flat transparent lower right front decorative plate 2545 extending downward from the front end position of the outer peripheral surface of the lower right lateral wall portion 2512d at the front, and the lower right lateral wall at the rear. It is closed by a flange portion 2511 extending from the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the portion 2512d.

  The center role 2500 has a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 protruding into the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right flow space 2543 and extending in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls. In the right flow passage 2542, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 alternately protrude at predetermined intervals from the opposing surfaces of the right front decorative plate 2544 and the flange portion 2511 in the game ball distribution direction. In the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 in the right flow passage 2542, the interval between the deceleration ribs 2546 on the right front decorative plate 2544 side and the flange portion 2511 side is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the interval between the protruding end of the deceleration rib 2546 protruding from the right front decorative plate 2544 and the protruding end of the deceleration rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, in the vertically extending right flow passage 2542, the game ball always flows down in a zigzag manner, and a sufficient damping force can be applied to acceleration due to gravity.

  On the other hand, in the lower right circulation space 2543, the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 alternately protrude at predetermined intervals from the opposing surfaces of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511 in the game ball distribution direction. . The plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 in the lower right circulation space 2543 have an interval between the deceleration ribs 2546 on the lower right decorative plate 2545 side and the flange portion 2511 side that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. I have. Further, the interval between the protruding end of the deceleration rib 2546 protruding from the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the protruding end of the deceleration rib 2546 protruding from the flange portion 2511 is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. Thus, even in the lower right circulation space 2543, the game balls always flow down in a zigzag manner, and the circulation speed of the game balls is attenuated, so that the circulation speed of the game balls is prevented from becoming too fast.

  In the present embodiment, the upper right circulation space 2541 is provided with one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, and a second starting opening 2004. The lower right circulation space 2543 is provided with a second big winning opening 2006. Provided.

  More specifically, the gate portion 2003 is provided so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 extending rightward in front view from the upper rear end of the upper right vertical wall portion 2512a, and one game ball is provided. It is formed so that it can pass only in the vertical direction. A gate sensor 2547 for detecting the passage of a game ball is attached to the gate section 2003. The gate portion 2003 is disposed slightly to the left as viewed from the front with respect to immediately below the stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled.

  The general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center role item 2500 project forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 below the gate portion 2003, closing a substantially lower half behind the upper right circulation space 2541. It is provided in. More specifically, the center role 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and has a general winning opening 2001 formed at the upper end in a container shape with the upper part and the rear part opened, and directly below the general winning part 2001. A ball receiving member 2548 formed so that the second starting port 2004 is opened to the left on the left side in a front view, and around a shaft whose lower end extends back and forth by the ball receiving member 2548 and the flange portion 2511. A second starting port door member 2549 that is rotatably mounted and closes the second starting port 2004 so as to be openable and closable, and is opened and closed to drive the second starting port door member 2549 that is mounted on the rear surface of the flange portion 2511. A starting port solenoid 2550 (see FIG. 142), a second starting port sensor 2551 for detecting a game ball received by the second starting port 2004, and It is equipped with a.

  The general winning opening 2001 of the center role 2500 is opened in a size that can receive only one game ball upward just below the gate portion 2003 on the right in front view. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided backward from the flange portion 2511 and then discharged from the center role 2500 to the right in a front view.

  The second start port 2004 is opened right below the general winning opening 2001 to the left as viewed from the front, and is opened to the left when the second start door member 2549 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front. As a result, game balls can be accepted. The second starter door member 2549 has a base end circle that defines a lower portion and two sides extending from one point outside the base end circle so as to be in contact with the base end circle. Are formed in a so-called “flow-drop shape”, and are rotatably mounted at the center of the base end circle.

  In the second starting port 2004, in a normal state, the starting port solenoid 2550 is de-energized, and the second starting port door member 2549 is in an upright state in which the distal end is located almost directly above the base circle. The second starting port door member 2549 is closed so that game balls cannot be received. Then, when the starting port solenoid 2550 is energized in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball through the gate unit 2003, the tip side of the second starting port door member 2549 moves to the left in front view. Then, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates, and stops rotating with the tip side slightly higher. As a result, the second starting port 2004 is in an open state, and a state in which game balls can be accepted is obtained. In a state where the second starting port door member 2549 is rotated and opened, a tip of the second starting port door member 2549 is substantially in line with a vertical line passing through the center of the gate portion 2003.

  The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is guided by the second starting port sensor 2551 after being guided to the rear of the flange portion 2511 and discharged downward.

  The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged on the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a in the lower right circulation space 2543 so as to open upward. More specifically, a second upper winning opening 2006a constituting the second winning opening 2006 is opened upward at the right end in front view in the second attacker passage 2543a, and the second upper winning opening is also provided. The second lower special winning opening 2006b constituting 2006 is open upward in the front left and below the second upper special winning opening 2006a in the second attacker passage 2543a. The second upper winning prize opening 2006a and the second lower winning prize opening 2006b are formed so that the left and right widths are within the range of three to four times the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The center accessory 2500 is supported by a center base 2510 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction so as to open and close the second upper winning opening 2006a that opens upward, and has a front end on the front surface of the flange portion 2511. The second upper special winning opening door member 2552 which protrudes forward and closes the second upper winning opening 2006a and is inclined so that the left end side in front view becomes lower, and is attached to the rear surface of the center base 2510. 142, a second upper attacking solenoid 2553 for opening and closing the second upper winning opening door member 2552, and a second upper winning opening sensor 2554 for detecting a game ball received in the second upper winning opening 2006a (FIG. 142). ), And the center base 2510 moves forward and backward so that the second lower winning opening 2006b opening upward can be opened and closed. The second plate is supported so as to be slidable in the front direction and has a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 to close the second lower winning opening 2006b, and is inclined so that the left end side in front view becomes lower. The lower large winning opening door member 2555, the second lower attacker solenoid 2556 attached to the rear surface of the center base 2510 for driving the second lower winning opening door member 2555 to open and close, and the second lower winning opening 2006b are received. And a second lower winning opening sensor 2557 (refer to FIG. 142) for detecting the game ball.

  The center role 2500 extends in the left-right direction across the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b, and extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511. A flat plate-like plate portion 2558 that is inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower and forms a part of the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a, and extends forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 and has a second lower size. A flat discharge plate portion 2559 extending in the left-right direction from the left end of the winning opening 2006b in front view to the left end of the second attacker passage 2543a so that the left end side is lower, and forming a part of the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a. And The cross-plate portion 2558 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is in a range of two to three times the outer diameter of the game ball. The left and right lengths of the discharge plate portion 2559 are formed within a range of 3 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

  In the second attacker passage 2543a, a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 extend up and down. On each side of the lower right decorative plate 2545 and the flange portion 2511, rows are arranged in the left and right direction at intervals slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. It is established. In the second attacker passage 2543a, as shown in FIG. 93, the first reduction rib 2546a, the second reduction rib 2546b, the third reduction rib 2546c, the fourth reduction rib 2546d, Ten reduction ribs 2546 of a fifth reduction rib 2546e, a sixth reduction rib 2546f, a seventh reduction rib 2546g, an eighth reduction rib 2546h, a ninth reduction rib 2546i, and a tenth reduction rib 2546j are provided. Odd-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 are provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2511, and even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 are provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545.

  Further, the positional relationship between the first deceleration rib 2546a to the tenth deceleration rib 2546j and the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b will be described in detail. The first deceleration rib 2546a is arranged slightly to the right of the left end in front view of the second upper winning opening 2006a. The second deceleration rib 2546b is arranged near the right end of the passing plate portion 2558 on the left side of the left end of the second upper winning award 2006a in a front view. The third deceleration rib 2546c is disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the cross plate portion 2558. The fourth deceleration rib 2546d is arranged on the right side of the right end of the second lower big winning opening 2006b in a front view and near the left end of the passing plate portion 2558. The fifth deceleration rib 2546e is disposed on the left side of the right end of the second lower special winning opening 2006 in a front view. The sixth deceleration rib 2546f is arranged at the center in the left-right direction of the second lower special winning opening 2006b, rightward in front view. The seventh deceleration rib 2546g is disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the second lower special winning opening 2006b and is located to the left in front view. The eighth deceleration rib 2546h is located closer to the right than the left end in front view of the second lower special winning opening 2006b. The ninth deceleration rib 2546i is arranged from the left end in the front view of the second lower special winning opening 2006b to the vicinity of the right end of the discharge plate portion 2559. The tenth deceleration rib 2546j is disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the discharge plate portion 2559.

  Of the first to tenth deceleration ribs 2546a to 2546j, on the front surface of the flange portion 2511, odd-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 from the first to ninth deceleration ribs 2546a to 2546i are provided. The deceleration rib 2546 extends over the entire height from the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a to the ceiling (lower right lateral wall portion 2512d). Further, among the first reduction rib 2546a to the tenth reduction rib 2546j, an even-number reduction rib 2546 from the second reduction rib 2546b to the tenth reduction rib 2546j is provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545. The even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 extend from a portion above the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a to near the ceiling (see FIG. 93 (a)).

  Among the even-numbered deceleration ribs 2546 provided on the rear surface of the lower right decorative plate 2545, the second deceleration rib 2546b and the second deceleration rib 2546b closest to the left end in front view of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b, respectively. As shown in FIG. 93A, the eighth deceleration rib 2546h has a lower end formed on the bottom surface of the second attacker passage 2543a (the upper surface of the second upper winning opening door member 2552 and the second lower winning opening door member 2555). From the lower surface of the other deceleration rib 2546. More specifically, the lower ends of the second deceleration rib 2546b and the eighth deceleration rib 2546h are the same distance from the left ends of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b in front view as substantially the outer diameter of the game ball, respectively. Are formed so as to be separated from each other.

  Thereby, when the second upper winning opening 2006a or the second lower winning opening 2006b shifts from the open state in which game balls can be received to the closed state in which it cannot receive game balls, the second upper winning opening that slides forward. The front end of the door member 2552 or the second lower winning opening door 2555, the left end of the second upper winning opening 2006a in front view or the left end of the second lower winning opening 2006b in front view, and the second deceleration rib 2546b The occurrence of clogging (ball biting) in which a game ball is sandwiched between the lower end or the lower end of the eighth deceleration rib 2546h can be prevented.

  In a state in which the second upper winning opening door member 2552 and the second lower winning opening door member 2555 project forward to close the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b, A state where the second upper winning opening door member 2552 and the second lower winning opening door member 2555 are placed on the upper surfaces of the left end and the right end of the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b. Therefore, the gap between the upper surface of the second upper winning opening door member 2552 or the second lower winning opening door member 2555 and the lower end of the second reduction rib 2546b or the eighth reduction rib 2546h is the outer diameter of the game ball. The game balls that are narrower than the above and are circulating (rolling) on the upper surfaces of the second upper winning opening door member 2552 and the second lower winning opening door member 2555 are the second reduction rib 2546b and the eighth reduction rib 2546h. , And a sufficient damping effect is maintained.

  When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the center part 2500 is located on the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 on the right side in the front view from substantially the center in the left-right direction and the inner peripheral surface of the game area 5a (the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000). ), A space having a width that allows only one game ball to flow is formed. Accordingly, when the game ball is driven along the outer rail 1001 so as to be driven rightward in front view (right-handed) from the center in the horizontal direction at the upper part of the center role object 2500, the center in the game area 5a is hit. A game ball can be distributed in the right hitting game area 2540 on the right side of the accessory 2500 in a front view.

  Further, in a state where the nails are assembled to the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in the left and right of the center role item 2500 in the game area 5a and in the upper right circulation space 2541 of the right hitting game area 2540. ing. Therefore, the game ball hit into the game area 5a circulates downward through various routes by contacting the plurality of obstacle nails.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from the back. FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of a back box and the like in a game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of a back box and the like as viewed from behind.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100. Further, a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. The back unit 3000 is disposed at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably mounting the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A mechanism 3020, a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end of the back box 3010 when viewed from the front and discharging the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center role 2500, Attached near the front end of the lower right corner in front view inside the back box 3010, the second big winning opening 2006 and the second Lower right ball passage unit 3035 for discharging accepted gaming balls out port 2543C, and a.

  One of the plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 is attached to the right ball passage unit 3030. The right ball passage unit 3030 guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the center role item 2500 to the bottom in the back box 3010, and then, along the bottom, in the left-right center. After being guided to the vicinity, it is guided to the front end of the back box 3010, dropped from the front end of the back box 3010 onto the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, and discharged. The lower right ball passage unit 3035 guides the game ball received in the second special winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center role 2500 to the left in front view along the bottom in the back box 3010, It is discharged from the vicinity of the center of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction onto the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and discharged.

  The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 above the opening 3010a on the left side in rear view, and is behind the effect driving board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200. An upper relay board 3040 for relaying connection to the upper left decorative board 3253, an upper relay board cover 3041 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and a rear face of the back box 3010 A box-shaped effect drive substrate box 3042 rotatably mounted around an axis extending left and right along the lower side of the opening 3010a, and a box-shaped effect drive substrate box 3042 accommodated in the effect drive substrate box 3042 An effect drive board 3043 that drives each drive motor, decorative board, and the like based on the control command, and a rear view right A panel relay board 3044 which is attached at a corner and relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and each of the winning opening sensors and each solenoid, and a rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the panel relay board 3044. And a panel relay board cover 3045 attached thereto.

  The back unit 3000 further includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end in the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back unit below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. A rear lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a back box A rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view within the 3010, and a back upper center attached from the center in the left and right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable staging unit 3400 and movable staging unit 3100 under the back below opening 3010a in back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98 and the like. The back box 3010 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b that projects rearward with an interval from the periphery of the opening 3010a. And two fixing grooves 3010c recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is inserted; A notch portion 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side in rear view, and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

  The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface in a rear view so as to be slidable up and down.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

  Although a detailed description of the back box 3010 is omitted, bosses and mounting holes for mounting the movable effect units and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Back left middle decoration unit]
Next, the back left center decoration unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. The back left middle decoration unit 3050 is mounted near the front end of the back box 3010 on the left side when viewed from the front and upward from the center in the vertical direction. The back left middle decoration unit 3050 includes a light-transmitting unit base 3051 attached to the back box 3010 and a decoration attached to the front of the unit base 3051 and three-dimensionally imitating a mahjong “middle tile”. A back left middle decorative body 3052 having translucency, a back left middle decorative board 3053 mounted between the back left middle decorative body 3052 and the unit base 3051 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; It has.

  The back left middle decoration unit 3050 can make the back left middle decoration body 3052 emit light by appropriately lighting the LED of the back left middle decoration board 3053.

[5-9c. Movable production unit behind the back]
Next, the back-to-back movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 (a) is a perspective view of the rear effect unit behind the rear of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 (b) is a perspective view of the rear effect unit behind the rear unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 100 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-to-bottom movable effect unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the rotational drive unit of the movable effect unit after the lower back, viewed from the front together with the first decorative body and the second decorative body after the lower back, and FIG. 102 illustrates the rotary drive unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back with the 1st decoration body after back disassembly and the 2nd decoration body after back. FIG. 103 is an explanatory view showing the drive system of the rear-facing rear movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the lower back rear movable effect unit in the normal state, and FIG. 104 (b) rotates the back lower first decorative body and the lower back second decorative body together from the normal state. FIG. 7B is a front view of a state in which the second decorative surface of the second decorative body is turned to the front, and FIG. FIG. 6 is a front view of a state in which is moved to the left moving end in front view. FIG. 105 (d) shows the state of FIG. 104 (c), in which the lower back lower first decorative body and the lower back lower second decorative body are rotated together to change the first decorative surface of the lower back lower first decorative body. It is a front view in the state turned to the front, (e) rotates the back lower first decorative body from the state of (d) and opens the lower back lower first decorative body and the lower back lower decorative body. It is a front view in the state where the 2nd decoration surface of the 1st decoration body after back and back and the 2nd decoration surface of the 2nd decoration body after back bottom turned to the front.

  The rear lower rear movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall below the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010. The lower back lower movable effecting unit 3100 includes a lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and a lower back lower side which are coaxially and rotatably supported on one vertical side extending vertically along an axis extending vertically. A rear second decorative body 3120, a rotational drive unit 3130 to which the lower back lower first decorative body and the lower lower back second decorative body are attached so as to be hinged rotatable and capable of rotating each separately; and a rotary drive unit 3130 The slide unit 3150 is slidably mounted in the back and forth direction and is mounted in the back box 3010, and the lower back fixed decorative body 3160 is mounted on the front surface of the slide unit 3150.

  The lower back first decorative body 3110 includes a first decorative surface 3111 and a second decorative surface 3112, which are arranged to face each other, have different decorations formed thereon, and have translucency, and a first decorative surface. The first decorative body 3113 has a thin rectangular parallelepiped shape and supports the 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 so as to face each other. A sub liquid crystal display device 3114 facing outward from one decorative surface 3111, and a sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 extending outward from a side in contact with the second decorative surface 3112 of the four vertically extending sides of the rectangular parallelepiped first decorative body 3113. And two first hinge portions 3115 that can be supported so as to rotate about an axis extending vertically and a first decorative body between the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the second decorative surface 3112 Body 3113 Attached first decorative substrate after under the back of a plurality of LED are mounted on both sides has (not shown) in which provided with a.

  The first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back is formed in a frame shape, and the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 faces forward from within the frame. The second decorative surface 3112 of the first decorative body 3110 after the back is formed with a decoration in which the left half of the character of "holy" is given. The sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can display a predetermined effect image (effect animation) by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510.

  The two first hinge portions 3115 are vertically separated from each other and mounted coaxially. The first hinge portions 3115 are rotatably supported by the second hinge portions 3124 of the second back decoration 3120. The first decorative substrate 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately illuminating the LEDs on both surfaces after the back.

  The lower back second decorative body 3120 has a first decorative surface 3121 and a second decorative surface 3122 which are arranged to face each other, have different decorations formed thereon, and have translucency, and a first decorative surface. The thin rectangular parallelepiped second decorative body 3123 supporting the 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 so as to face each other, and four vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped second decorative body 3123. The two first hinge portions 3115 of the first decorative body 3110 that protrude outward from the side of the two sides that are in contact with the second decorative surface 3122 so as to rotate around the axis extending vertically. Three second hinge portions 3124 that can be supported and are vertically separated from each other, and a decorative body that projects cylindrically downward from the lower end of the lowermost second hinge portion 3124 of the three second hinge portions 3124 A support shaft 3125, The second decorative body-side operating gear 3126 attached to the outer periphery of the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125, the bearing member 3127 attached to the lower end lower surface of the decorative body support shaft 3125, and the outer peripheral surface of the decorative body support shaft 3125 The second detection piece 3128 extending in the direction, and between the first decoration surface 3121 and the second decoration surface 3112 are mounted in the second decoration body 3123, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on both surfaces. And a second decorative substrate (not shown) after the back.

  The first decorative surface 3121 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back is formed with a decoration in which characters of "Tenun" in vertical writing are given. The second decorative surface 3122 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back is formed with a decoration in which the right half of the character “holy” is given. The second decorative body 3123 of the second back decoration 3120 is formed to be substantially the same size as the first decorative body 3113 of the first back decoration 3110. In other words, the outer dimensions of the first decorative surface 3111 and the second decorative surface 3112 of the first lower decorative body 3110 and the first decorative surface 3121 and the second decorative surface 3122 of the second lower decorative body 3120 are different. They are formed in substantially the same size.

  The three second hinges 3124 of the second back decoration 3120 are vertically separated from each other and mounted coaxially, and the first back decoration 3200 is located between the second hinges 3124. The first hinge portions 3115 of the 3110 are positioned and hinged to each other. Thus, the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back lower back second decorative body 3120 are in a closed state in which the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3121 face each other due to the hinge rotation, and the first decorative surface of each other. It is possible to rotate (hinge rotation) between an open state in which the 3111 and 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are substantially on the same plane. Then, in a state where the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are opened, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are left and right with the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 interposed therebetween. , And the decorations are unified, and the word "Holy" appears. Although not shown in detail in the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124, the first decorative surface 3111, The decoration corresponding to the decoration provided on the 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 is provided. When the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back and the second decorative body 3120 after the lower back are opened, the second decorative body 3120 is closed. The one hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 are less noticeable.

  The decorative body support shaft 3125 has an upper end that allows the rotation transmitting member 3132 of the rotation drive unit 3130 to rotate the hinge independently of the rear lower first decorative body 3110 independently of the rear lower second decorative body 3120 at the upper end. Inserted. In the decorative body support shaft 3125, the rotation transmission member 3132 at the upper end and the bearing member 3127 at the lower end are supported by the upper bearing 3131c and the lower bearing 3131d of the rotation drive unit base 3131 of the rotation drive unit 3130. The decorative body support shaft 3125 is formed to have a length (height) of 75% to 95% with respect to the height of the first decorative surfaces 3111 and 3121 and the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122. More specifically, the length is 80% to 90%. Accordingly, even if the lower back-side first decorative body 3110 or the like having the heavy weight by providing the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 is eccentric on one side extending vertically and the hinge can be rotated, the lower back-side first decoration body 3110 can be rotated. The decorative body 3110 and the like (the decorative body support shaft 3125) can be made hard to fall.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the second decorative body-side operating gear 3126 has a stopper 3126a protruding beyond the gear teeth at one place on the outer periphery, and cannot be rotated once. The back second back decoration board of the back bottom second decoration body 3120 can emit and decorate the first decoration surface 3121 and the second decoration surface 3122 by appropriately illuminating the LEDs on both sides.

  The rotary drive unit 3130 of the rearward-movable effect unit 3100 has a box shape with an open front and rotatably supports the decorative body support shaft 3125 and is attached to the slide unit 3150 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. 3131, a cylindrical sleeve portion 3132 a rotatably supported by the rotation drive unit base 3131 and rotatably attached to the outer periphery of the upper end portion of the decorative body support shaft 3125, projecting upward from the upper end of the sleeve portion 3132 a, and One of a connecting portion 3132b attached to a lower portion of the rear first decorative body 3110, one of a first decorative body-side operating gear 3132c and a first decorative body-side operating gear 3132c formed over a half circumference at a lower end portion outer periphery of the sleeve portion 3132a. It has the first detecting piece 3132d extending outward from the end. Includes a rotation transmitting member 3132 are, the.

  In addition, the rotation drive unit 3130 includes a first drive gear 3133 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first decorative body-side operation gear 3132c of the rotation transmission member 3132, and a back-to-back first drive motor that rotationally drives the first drive gear 3133. 3134, a first drive motor bracket 3135 to which the first lower back drive motor 3134 is attached and which is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131, and a second decoration body side operation gear 3126 of the second lower back decoration 3120 are meshed. The second drive gear 3136 in the form of a spur gear, the second rear drive motor 3137 for rotating the second drive gear 3136, and the second drive motor 3137 for lower back are mounted and in the rotation drive unit base 3131. A second drive motor bracket 3138 to be attached.

  Further, the rotation drive unit 3130 is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and is capable of detecting the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132, and a lower side of the first rotation detection sensor 3139. And a second rotation detection sensor 3140 that is attached to the second drive motor bracket 3138 and is capable of detecting the second detection piece 3128 of the second decorative body 3120 behind the back.

  The rotary drive unit 3130 is mounted in the rotary drive unit base 3131, and includes a sub liquid crystal display device 3114, a lower back first decorative board, a lower back second decorative board, a lower back first drive motor 3134, The second rear drive motor 3137, the first rotation detection sensor 3139, the second rotation detection sensor 3140, and the rotation drive unit relay board 3141 that relays the connection between the back rear relay board 3158 of the slide unit 3150 and the second rotation detection sensor 3139. And more.

  The rotary drive unit 3130 includes a flat unit cover 3142 that closes the front surface of the rotary drive unit base 3131, a rack gear 3143a that is attached to the lower surface of the rotary drive unit base 3131 and extends left and right, and a rack gear. And a rack member 3143 having a flat detection piece 3143b formed at the right end of the front view 3143a when viewed from the front.

  The rotary drive unit base 3131 of the rotary drive unit 3130 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and includes a decorative body support shaft 3125, a main portion 3131a in which the lower back first drive motor 3134, the lower back second drive motor 3137, and the like are accommodated. A sub-portion 3131b, which is substantially cubic and approximately half the height of the main portion 3131a, is disposed on the left side of the main portion 3131a in a front view, and accommodates the rotary drive unit relay board 3141. The main portion 3131a and the sub-portion 3131b of the rotary drive unit base 3131 communicate with each other with their bottom surfaces aligned.

  In addition, the rotary drive unit base 3131 includes a U-shaped upper bearing 3131c and a lower bearing 3131d that are open at the front end and are cut rearward on the top plate and the bottom plate of the main portion 3131a. . The upper bearing portion 3131c penetrates up and down, and the sleeve portion 3132a of the rotation transmitting member 3132 is rotatably inserted. On the other hand, the lower bearing portion 3131d is depressed downward from above and does not penetrate vertically, and the bearing member 3127 of the second decorative body 3120 after the back is inserted. The open front ends of the upper bearing portion 3131c and the lower bearing portion 3131d are closed by the unit cover 3142.

  The first rear drive motor 3134 is attached to the inside of the rotary drive unit base 3131 via the first drive motor bracket 3135 at a position on the right side of the decorative body support shaft 3125 when viewed from the front. The second rear drive motor 3137 is attached to the inside of the rotary drive unit base 3131 at a position on the left side of the decorative body support shaft 3125 in front view via the second drive motor bracket 3138.

  The lower back first drive motor 3134 drives the first drive gear 3133 to rotate, so that the connection portion 3132b rotates together with the first decorative body-side operation gear 3132c of the rotation transmission member 3132 meshed with the first drive gear 3133. , The first decorative body 3110 can be rotated after the back. On the other hand, the second rear drive motor 3137 drives the second drive gear 3136 to rotate, so that the second decoration body-side operation gear 3126 at the lower end of the decoration body support shaft 3125 meshed with the second drive gear 3136 causes The back second lower decorative body 3120 can be rotated together with the decorative body support shaft 3125.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the slide unit 3150 of the rearward-movable effecting unit 3100 is mounted in a back box 3010 and has a box-shaped unit base 3151 whose front and upper sides are open, and is mounted on an upper portion of the unit base 3151. And a slide guide 3152 extending left and right with the rotary drive unit base 3131 of the rotary drive unit 3130 attached to the front surface, and a slide guide 3152 mounted rotatably around an axis extending forward and rearward at the approximate center in the horizontal direction within the unit base 3151. And a transmission gear member having a pinion gear 3153a meshing with a rack gear 3143a of a rack member 3143 of the rack rotation drive unit 3130, and a spur gear-shaped driven gear 3153b that rotates integrally with the pinion gear 3153a and has a larger diameter than the pinion gear 3153a. 3153 A drive gear 3154 in the form of a spur gear meshing with a driven gear 3153b of a transmission gear member 3153; A slide detection sensor 3156 attached to the inside of the unit 3151 for detecting the detection piece 3143 b of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130, and a substantially lower half of an open front part of the unit base 3151 is closed to close the unit base 3151. It includes a horizontally long flat plate-shaped slide cover 3157 attached to the front end, and a lower back rear relay board 3158 mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3151 and relaying the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the rotary drive unit relay board 3141. ing.

  The slide guide 3152 of the slide unit 3150 supports the rotary drive unit 3130 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The rear lower back third drive motor 3155 rotationally drives the drive gear 3154 to rotate the pinion gear 3153a via the driven gear 3153b of the transmission gear member 3153 meshed with the drive gear 3154 to rotate the pinion gear 3153a. The rotation drive unit 3130 can be slid in the left and right directions by the rack gear 3143a of the rack member 3143 in the rotation drive unit 3130 meshing with the.

  Subsequently, the operation of the rear bottom movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 103 and FIG. 104 (a) and the like, in the normal state, the rotation drive unit 3130 is positioned at the right end in front view with respect to the left and right sliding directions in the normal state, as shown in FIGS. ing. Further, in a normal state, the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 are closed with the second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122 facing each other, The first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 (the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) faces forward. In this normal state, the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are located on the right side in front view with respect to the hinge rotation axis (decorative body support shaft 3125) extending vertically. are doing. Further, in a normal state, the side opposite to the decorative body support shaft 3125 that is rotatably supported by the hinges of the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 is the decorative body. The whole is rotating so as to be located forward of the center of the support shaft 3125. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in a normal state, the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are rotated about 20 degrees clockwise in plan view.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 103, the detection piece 3143b of the rack member 3143 in the rotary drive unit 3130 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3156 of the slide unit 3150. In the normal state, the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmission member 3132 in the rotation drive unit 3130 that rotates integrally with the first decorative body 3110 after the back is in a state where the detection by the first rotation detection sensor 3139 is not detected. Has become. Further, in the normal state, the second rotation detecting sensor 3140 detects the second detection piece 3128 of the decorative body support shaft 3125 in the second rear decorative body 3120.

  In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 81 and the like, in a state where it is assembled to the game board 5, the back lower back first decorative body 3110 facing the front (front) of the lower back movable decorative body unit 3100 is formed. The first decorative surface 3111 (sub-liquid crystal display device 3114) is located in front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and to the right of the front view, at the lower right corner in the front view within the frame of the center role 2500, and , The display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 can be visually recognized. In this normal state, as described above, the right-hand sides of the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 are located forward of the center of the hinge rotation, and the sub-liquid crystal display device The display screen 3114 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100 so as to face a vertical line passing through the center of the game area 5a.

  In this normal state, the second rear drive motor 3137 of the rotary drive unit 3130 causes the second rear drive gear 3136, the second decorative body-side operation gear 3126, and the decorative body support shaft 3125 to drive the second rear lower back. When the second decorative body 3120 is rotated in the clockwise direction (160 degrees) in a plan view after the lower back so that the second decorative surface 3122 facing the rear of the decorative body 3120 faces the front, the lower side is closed. The back lower back first decoration body 3110 located in front of the rear second decoration body 3120 is pressed by the back lower back second decoration body 3120 and rotates together, and the lower back side provided with the decoration of "Tenun" The second decorative surface 3122 of the rear second decorative body 3120 is in a state of facing the front (see FIG. 104 (b)). In addition, the first decorative surface 3111 (the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the lower back-side first decorative body 3110 that faces the front in the normal state is in the rearward facing state and is invisible to the player side. In addition, from this state, neither the back lower back first decorative body 3110 nor the back lower back second decorative body 3120 can be further rotated clockwise in plan view.

  In the state of FIG. 104 (b), the first detection piece 3132d of the rotation transmitting member 3132 that rotates integrally with the first decorative body 3110 after the back is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 3139, and The second detection piece 3128 of the decorative body support shaft 3125 that rotates integrally with the second decorative body 3120 is in a non-detection state with respect to the detection of the second rotation detection sensor 3140.

  On the other hand, when the drive gear 3154 is rotationally driven clockwise in front view by the third drive motor 3155 after the back of the slide unit 3150, the driven gear 3153 b of the transmission gear member 3153, the pinion gear 3153 a, and the rack gear of the rack member 3143. Via the 3143a, the rotary drive unit 3130 can be slid together with the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 to the left end in front view. In a state where the rotary drive unit 3130 is slid to the left end position in a front view in a state where the rotary drive unit 3130 is assembled to the game board 5, an axis (a center line of the decoration support shaft 3125) extending up and down of the hinge rotation is It substantially coincides with the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

  FIG. 104 (c) shows a state where it is slid to the left end position in front view while keeping the state of FIG. 104 (b). FIG. 105 (d) shows the state of FIG. 104 (a) being moved to the left end position in front view, and driving the first rear drive motor 3134 to drive the first drive gear 3133 and the rotation transmitting member. The lower back lower first decorative body 3110 is rotated by a predetermined angle (20 degrees) in a counterclockwise direction in plan view via the first decorative body side operation gear 3132c and the connecting portion 3132b of the lower rear lower decorative body 3132, and The first decorative body 3110 of the lower back is driven by the first lower back drive motor 3134 from the state where the first decorative surface 3111 (the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the 3110 is directed straight forward or from the state of FIG. 104 (c). Is rotated 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, so that the second lower decorative body 3120 is rotated together with the first lower decorative body 3110 so that the second lower decorative body 3110 is rotated. One decorative surface 3111 ( A state with its blanking liquid crystal display device 3114) in front shows.

  Subsequently, in the state of FIG. 104 (c), by driving the second back drive motor 3137, the second back decoration body 3120 is rotated 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in plan view, or FIG. In the state of (d), when the back lower back first decorative body 3110 is rotated 180 degrees in the clockwise direction in plan view by driving the back lower back first drive motor 3134, as shown in FIG. 105 (e). From the state where the second decorative surface 3112 of the first back decoration 3110 and the second decoration surface 3122 of the second back decoration 3120 face each other and are folded, the hinge is rotated and the bottom decoration is completed. The first decorative body 3110 and the second decorative body 3120 after the back are opened, and the respective second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 face the front side by side.

  In the state of FIG. 105 (e), the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 310 are overlapped with each other and closed compared to when the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 310 are closed. By arranging the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the rear lower back second decorative body 3120 side by side, the surface of the decoration formed by the rear lower back first decorative body 3110 and the rear lower back second decorative body 3120 is formed. The size can be doubled, and can be noticed in the game area 5a to strongly attract the interest of the player, and the appearance of the large decoration can surprise the player. In the state of FIG. 105 (e), the decorations of the second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 are integrated, and the character of “Holy” is written. The decoration becomes visible. In addition, the 1st hinge part 3115 and the 2nd hinge part 3124 of the 1st decoration body 3110 after back back and the 2nd decoration body 3120 under back correspond to the 1st decoration surface 3111, 3121 and the 2nd decoration surface 3112, 3122. The decoration corresponding to the decoration that has been performed is provided, and when the first back body 3110 and the back second back body 3120 are opened, the first hinge portion 3115 and the second hinge portion 3124 are provided. Can be made inconspicuous, and the character of “holy” can be visually recognized by the player in a favorable state.

  As shown in the figure, the integral decoration formed by the second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 has a “sacred” mark on the “holy”. A cutout decoration 3170 such as “I” is formed. The cut-out decoration 3170 is obtained by cutting out a part of one character or picture and decorating the cut-out decoration 3170. On the cut-out decoration 3170, a back upper left first decorative body 3210 of a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 described later. When the cutout decoration 3260 in which the decoration of the fixed decoration member 3211 of the above and the decoration of the second decoration member 3222 of the back upper left second decoration body 3220 are arranged on the left and right is located, the decoration of the entire character of “sparrow” is completed. (See FIG. 134).

  As described above, according to the lower back movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 are closed from each other in a state where the surfaces overlap each other and are closed. When the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are arranged side by side and opened, the surface of the decoration by the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 is enlarged (extended) in the front view game area 5a. ) And at the same time, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122, which are closed and cannot be seen from the player side, are opened so that they can be seen from the player side. More specifically, the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 are closed, and the first decoration surface 3111 (the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) of the first back decoration 3110 is directed forward. In this state (see FIG. 105 (d)), when the back lower back first decorative body 3110 is rotated to line up with the rear lower back second decorative body 3120 on the left side in front view, the back lower back first decorative body is initially provided. The second decorative surface 3112 and 3122 of the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 such that the decorative area of only the first decorative surface 3111 of 3110 extends leftward. The decoration area is doubled, and the second decoration surfaces 3112 and 3122, which have not been seen before, become visible from the player side (see FIG. 105 (e)). Alternatively, in a state in which the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are closed and the first decorative surface 3121 of the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 is directed forward (FIG. 104 (c)). Reference), when the back lower back second decorative body 3120 is rotated and arranged on the right side of the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 in a front view, initially, only the first decorative surface 3121 of the back lower back second decorative body 3120 is used. The second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 are doubled so that the decoration area is doubled such that the existing decoration area extends rightward. At the same time, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122, which have not been seen, become visible from the player side (see FIG. 105 (e)). In this way, by opening the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 from the closed state, the decoration range of the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 is provided. Can be enlarged and the decoration can be changed, so that a strong impact can be given to the player, and the interest of the player can be given to the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120. It can be strongly attracted to enjoy the decoration spread by the first back decoration 3110 and the back bottom second decoration 3120, and to make the player think that there is something good. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, in a state where the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are overlapped with each other and closed, the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are joined together. In the case where the first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3110 are rotated around the vertically extending side of one of the hinges rotatably attached to the first lower decorative body 3110 and the second lower decorative body 3120, When the surface (rear surface) facing rearward in the state of (1) is rotated so as to face forward, the entire positions of the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are aligned with the central axis of hinge rotation. It will move to the position on the opposite side of the sandwich. More specifically, the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 are closed, and the first decoration surface 3111 (sub-liquid crystal display device 3114) of the first back decoration 3110 is directed forward. 104 (a) and FIG. 105 (d), when the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower decorative body 3120 are rotated together, the lower back lower first decorative body is rotated. 3110 and the entire back lower second decorative body 3120 move to the left as viewed from the front, and the first decorative surface 3121 of the rear lower back second decorative body 3120 faces forward (FIG. 104 (b) and FIG. (C)). On the other hand, in a state in which the back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are closed and the first decorative surface 3121 of the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 is directed forward (FIG. 104 (b)). And (c)), when the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower decorative body 3120 are rotated together, the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 are rotated. The whole moves to the right as viewed from the front, and the first decorative surface 3111 of the first decorative body 3110 after the lower back faces forward (see FIGS. 104 (a) and 105 (d)). Thereby, the decoration area by the back lower first decorative body 3110 or the lower back second decorative body 3120 in the front view game area 5a can be moved, and the decoration visible from the player side is changed. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back lower first decorative body 3110 and the back lower second decorative body 3120, and the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower decorative body 3120 can be attracted. The movement and decoration of 3120 can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, in a state in which the back lower first decorative body 3110 and the back lower second decorative body 3120 are overlapped with each other and closed, one of the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower decorative body 3120 is removed. When rotating and opening or rotating the back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 together, in any case, the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower lower back second decorative body 3110 Since the surface of the second decorative body 3120 visible from the player side starts rotating, at the beginning of the rotation, the back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 are opened, or It is difficult to determine whether or not to rotate together, and it is possible to excite the player depending on which operation is performed, thereby increasing the player's expectation. Further, for the decoration that can be visually recognized in the initial state, the player is required to open the back lower first decoration body 3110 and the back lower second decoration body 3120 and to rotate them together. Since the change of the decoration which can be visually recognized from the side is different, the player can enjoy the change of the decoration in various patterns, and it is possible to make the player hard to get bored by various effects.

  As described above, the back lower movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment rotates the hinges of the lower back first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120, so that different decorations are applied. The decorative surfaces 3111 and 3121 or the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 can be turned to the front, and the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 are slid in the left-right direction by the slide unit 3150. And various effects can be presented to the player.

  Further, in the rear lower back movable effect unit 3100, the hinge rotation is performed on one side (a position eccentric from the center of gravity) of two sides extending vertically above and below the quadrangular outer shape in the rear lower back second decorative body 3120. The upper end and the lower end of the decorative body support shaft 3125 extending coaxially downward with the axis can be rotated by the upper bearing 3131c and the lower bearing 3131d of the rotary drive unit base 3131 of the rotary drive unit 3130, respectively. It is supported so as to be rotatable at two locations as far apart as possible. Therefore, the decoration support shaft 3125 protrudes from a position eccentric with respect to the center of gravity of the first back decoration 3110 and the back bottom second decoration 3120, so that the decoration support shaft 3125 is located above the decoration support shaft 3125. Even if an eccentric load is applied to tilt the decorative body support shaft 3125 due to the weight of the attached lower back first decorative body 3110 and rear lower back second decorative body 3120, it is difficult to tilt the decorative body support shaft 3125. The first decorative body 3110 and the second decorative body 3120 can be rotated by supporting the decorative body support shaft 3125 straight. In other words, since the upper end and the lower end of the decoration support shaft 3125 extending downward are rotatably supported by the upper bearing 3131c and the lower bearing 3131d of the rotary drive unit base 3131, the decoration is provided. Since the support shaft 3125 is unlikely to tilt, the heavy back lower first decoration body 3110 and lower back second decoration body 3120, which are attached to each other so as to be hinge-rotatable, can be moved coaxially with the hinge rotation axis. It can be rotatably supported without any problem.

[5-9d. Back upper left movable production unit]
Next, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106A is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 106B is a perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper left movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper left movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 (a) is a front view showing the back upper left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 109 (b) shows the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body in the back upper left movable effect unit. It is the front view shown in the state moved to the position of the right end in front view, and (c) shows the state where the back upper left first decoration and the back upper left second decoration were developed from the state of (b). It is a front view.

  The back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is attached from the left end in front view to the vicinity of the center above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back upper left movable rendering unit 3200 is a top back left first decorative body 3210 having a square front view and a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and extends vertically above and below the back upper left first decorative body 3210. The upper left upper decorative body 3220 and the upper upper left second decorative body 3210, which are hingedly mounted on the right side and have different decorations on two opposite surfaces, are mounted above the back upper left first decorative body 3210. A rotation drive unit 3230 for hinge-driving the back upper left second decorative body 3220, and the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are slid in the left-right direction together with the rotary drive unit 3230. And a slide unit 3240 mounted in the back box 3010.

  The back upper left first decorative body 3210 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 has a predetermined decoration applied to the front surface and a translucent fixed flat decoration member 3211 and a front end of the fixed decoration member 3211 on the right side in front view. The first cylindrical hinge portion 3212, which is three coaxially mounted on the axis extending vertically and protruding outward from the side and coaxial with the axis extending vertically, and covers the entire rear surface of the fixed decorative member 3211. The first decorative body base 3213 is attached to the rear side of the fixed decorative member 3211 and protrudes upward from the fixed decorative member 3211, and is mounted between the first decorative body base 3213 and the fixed decorative member 3211. A first upper decorative board 3214 on the back, on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a first decorative body base 321 connected to the upper surface of the first decorative body base 3213 and having an L-shaped side view. A connecting portion 3215 extending from the left end to the right side of the right end, a rack gear 3216 formed at the upper end of the connecting portion 3215 and extending left and right, and a front portion near the left end of the connecting portion 3215 in a front view. And a flat detection piece 3217 extending therefrom.

  The fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is formed in a slightly elongated rectangular shape in front view. The fixed decorative member 3211 has a side extending in the left and right direction and a side extending in the left and right directions of the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 of the back lower movable effect unit 3100. The length of the vertically extending side which is the same length is shorter than the length of the vertically extending side of the first back decoration 3110 and the second back decoration 3120 below. The fixed decorative member 3211 is formed with a decoration in which the left half of the character “sparrow” is given. As shown in FIG. 109 (c), in the present embodiment, the lower part of the lowermost "one" part is interrupted for the character "sparrow".

  The three first hinge portions 3212 are provided at both upper and lower ends of the fixed decorative member 3211 and at positions upward from the center in the vertical direction. The three first hinge portions 3212 protrude rightward and forward from the right side of the fixed decorative member 3211 in front view. The rotation drive unit 3230 is attached to the first decorative body base 3213 on the front surface of a portion projecting above the fixed decorative member 3211. The slider 3243 of the slide unit 3240 is attached to the connection portion 3215 on the rear surface of a vertically extending portion in an L shape in a side view. The rack gear 3216 meshes with the pinion gear 3248 of the slide unit 3240.

  The back upper left first decorative body 3210 can cause the LED mounted on the back upper left first decorative substrate 3214 to emit light as appropriate, so that the fixed decorative member 3211 can emit light.

  The back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200 is a translucent first decorative member 3221 having a rectangular external shape and a predetermined decoration on the surface, and a back surface of the first decorative member 3221. And a translucent second decoration member 3222 having a decoration different from the first decoration member 3221 on a surface opposite to the surface of the first decoration member 3221, and left and right sides of the first decoration member 3221. Two second hinge portions 3223 projecting outward from the vertically extending side of one of the first hinge portions 3212 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and rotatably hinged to the first hinge portion 3212; A shaft portion 3224 extending upward from the upper second hinge portion 3223 of the second hinge portion 3223, a spur gear-shaped operating gear 3225 attached to an upper end of the shaft portion 3224, and a first decorative member 221 and the back on the left second decorative substrate having a plurality of LED are mounted on both sides is mounted between the second decorative member 3222 (not shown) is provided with a.

  The first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is formed with a decoration on the surface of which the letters "Dokun" are given. The second decorative member 3222 has a decoration in which the right half of the character “sparrow” is provided on the surface opposite to the surface of the first decorative member 3221. Since the second decorative member 3222 is located on the left side in the front view of the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210, it can be recognized as a character of "sparrow". In detail, the decoration by the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 is a cut-out decoration 3260 in which the lower part is cut off from the uppermost part of the lowermost “one” part for the character of “sparrow”. On the lower side, the decorations (cut-out decorations) of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 in the rear lower back movable rendering unit 3100 are located. By doing so, the character of "sparrow" is completed. Note that the cutout decoration 3260 on the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 side occupies most of the characters of "sparrow", and therefore can be recognized as the characters of "sparrow" even if the lower part is cut out.

  The two second hinge portions 3223 project rightward and rearward from the right side of the first decorative member 3221 with the surface of the first decorative member 3221 facing the front. The two second hinge portions 3223 are vertically separated from each other, and are provided at positions near the center from both the upper and lower ends of the first decorative member 3221. The shaft portion 3224 is rotatably inserted into the uppermost first hinge portion 3212 of the upper back left first decorative body 3210. The operation gear 3225 is attached so as to rotate integrally with the first decorative member 3211 via the shaft portion 3224 and the upper second hinge portion 3223. The operation gear 3225 meshes with the transmission gear 3233 of the rotation drive unit 3230.

  The back upper left second decorative body 3220 can cause the LED mounted on the back upper left first decorative board (not shown) to appropriately emit light, thereby allowing the first decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222 to emit light. .

  The rotary drive unit 3230 of the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200 has a space between the rotary drive base 3231 attached to the front surface of the first decorative body base 3213 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the rotary drive base 3231. A rotating drive cover 3232 formed and attached to the upper side of the rotating drive base 3231; an operating gear 3225 of the second upper decorative body 3220 which is rotatably attached between the rotating drive cover 3232 and the rotating drive base 3231; A transmission gear 3233 in mesh with a spur gear, a drive gear (not shown) meshing with the transmission gear 3233, and a back upper left first drive motor mounted on the upper surface of the rotary drive cover 3232 by rotating the drive gear 3235, and is mounted between the rotary drive base 3231 and the rotary drive cover 3232, and Rotation detecting sensor for detecting a (not illustrated) is provided with a.

  The rotary drive base 3231 of the rotary drive unit 3230 is attached to a position above the fixed decorative member 3211 in the first decorative body base 3213 of the upper back left first decorative body 3210. The drive gear (not shown) is provided with a detection piece that extends outward. By detecting the detection piece with a rotation detection sensor, the rotational position of the drive gear is detected, and the drive gear, the transmission gear 3233, And the rotational position of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 can be detected via the operating gear 3225.

  This rotation drive unit 3230 rotates the back upper left second decorative body 3220 via the drive gear, the transmission gear 3233, and the operation gear 3225 by rotating the back upper left first drive motor 3235. Can be.

  The slide unit 3240 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 is a horizontally long unit base 3241 mounted in the back box 3010, a horizontally long slide rail 3242 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3241, and is slidably mounted on the slide rail 3242. And a base cover 3244 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3241 such that a space is formed between the slider 3243 and the connection portion 3215 of the first upper decorative body 3210 on the front surface. A second upper back left drive motor 3245 mounted on the front surface of the base cover 3244 so that the rotation shaft projects through the base cover 3244 between the base cover 3244 and the unit base 3241; Attached to the rotating shaft of motor 3245 Unit base 3241 having a spur gear-shaped driving gear 3246, a first transmission gear 3247a having a small diameter meshing with the driving gear 3246, and a second transmission gear 3247b having a large diameter rotating integrally with the first transmission gear 3247a. A transmission gear member 3247 rotatably mounted between the cover 3244 and a second transmission gear 3247b of the transmission gear member 3247 and a rack gear 3216 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 A pinion gear 3248 rotatably mounted between the base 3241 and the base cover 3244, and a slide detection sensor 3249 mounted on the base cover 3244 and detecting the detection piece 3217 of the upper back left first decorative body 3210. Have.

  Also, the slide unit 3240 is attached to the front of the base cover 3244 at the front and left portion when viewed from the front, and the back upper left first decorative board 3214, the back upper left second decorative board, the back upper left first drive motor 3235, the rotation detection sensor, The upper back left relay board 3250 which relays the connection between the back upper left second drive motor 3245 and the slide detection sensor 3249 and the rendering drive board 3043, and the base cover 3244 covering the front surface of the back upper left relay board 3250 A board cover 3251 attached to the front face, a back upper left decorative base 3252 attached to the front face of the board cover 3251; A predetermined decoration is attached to the front of the upper left back decoration base 3252 so as to cover the front of the upper left back decoration board 3253. A back left upper ornamental body 3254 having formed the translucent, and a.

  When the drive gear 3246 is rotationally driven by the back upper left second drive motor 3245, the slide unit 3240 moves the back upper left first decorative body 3210 through the transmission gear member 3247, the pinion gear 3248, and the rack gear 3216. It can be slid in the left-right direction together with the left second decorative body 3220 and the rotary drive unit 3230. In addition, the back left upper decorative body 3254 can be light-emitting decorated by appropriately emitting the LED on the back left upper decorative substrate 3253.

  Subsequently, an operation of the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200 will be described. In the normal state, the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200 is configured such that the back upper left second decorative body 3220 covers the front surface of the upper back left first decorative body 3210 as shown in FIG. The left second decorative body 3220 is folded toward the back upper left first decorative body 3210 by the rotation drive unit 3230, and the first decorative member 3221 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 faces the front. It is in a state where it was. In a normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is located at the left end in front view by the slide unit 3240. In this normal state, the rotation drive unit 3230 detects a detection piece of a drive gear (not shown) for detecting the rotational position of the second upper decorative body 3220 by a rotation detection sensor (not shown). Further, the detection piece 3217 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3249 of the slide unit 3240.

  In a normal state, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are located behind the back left middle decorative unit 3050 when assembled on the game board 5, and the player side Is invisible (see FIG. 81).

  In a normal state, when the pinion gear 3248 is rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the drive gear 3246 and the transmission gear member 3247 by the second drive motor 3245 on the back of the slide unit 3240, the pinion gear When the rack gear 3216 meshing with the 3248 causes the upper back left first decorative body 3210 to slide rightward in front view together with the back upper left second decorative body 3220 and the rotation drive unit 3230, and reaches the right end. The slide movement stops (see FIG. 109 (b)). In this state, when assembled to the game board 5, the vertically rotatable hinges of the upper back left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are centered in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. And the first upper decorative body 3210 is visible from the player side through the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIG. 133).

  Then, in a state where the back upper left first decorative body 3210 is positioned at the right end in the front view by the slide unit 3240, the drive gear and the transmission gear 3233 are driven by the back upper left first drive motor 3235 of the rotary drive unit 3230. When the operating gear 3225 is rotated 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the second upper decorative body 3220 that has been folded and covers the front surface of the first upper decorative body 3210 is unfolded. Then, the hinge is rotated to a state in which it is lined up on the right side when viewed from the front of the upper back left first decorative body 3210 (see FIG. 109 (c)). Thereby, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are arranged side by side, so that the size is about twice as large as in a normal state, so that they stand out in the game area 5a. The player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appearance of the large decoration can surprise the player.

  In this state, the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220 face the front side by side, and the respective decorations are integrated. As a result, the decoration of the character "sparrow" becomes visible. The first hinge 3212 and the second hinge 3223 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 have the decoration applied to the fixed decorative member 3211 and the second decorative member 3222. Corresponding decorations are given, and when opening the back upper left second decorative body 3220 from the back upper left first decorative body 3210, the first hinge part 3212 and the second hinge part 3223 can be made inconspicuous. The character "sparrow" can be visually recognized by the player in a favorable state.

  In addition, the decoration of the character of “sparrow” which can be visually recognized as a unit is such that the lower side is interrupted from the position above the lowermost “one” part, and the upper left first decorative body 3210 and the upper back Becoming integral with the decoration of the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 of the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower decorative body 3120 of the lower back lower movable effect unit 3100 located below the left second decorative body 3220. Thus, the character of "sparrow" is completed (see FIG. 134).

  As described above, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 slides the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 in the left-right direction, and extends the back upper left second decorative body 3220 up and down. By rotating the hinge around the axis, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 can be folded so as to cover the front surface, or the back upper left first decorative body 3210 can be unfolded so as to line up on the right side in front view. It is possible to present various effects to the player.

[5-9e. Back left movable directing unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 110 (a) is a perspective view of the back left movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 110 (b) is a perspective view of the back left movable rendering unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 111 (a) is a front view showing the back left movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 111 (b) is a front view showing the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit in a protruding state.

  The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. The back left movable rendering unit 3300 has a back right fixed decorative body 3310 having a three-dimensional predetermined decoration on the front, and is supported slidably in the left and right direction behind the back right fixed decorative body 3310 and has a predetermined shape. A decorated frame-shaped back right movable decorative body 3320 and a back right movable decorative body 3320 are slid in the left-right direction to be mounted in the back box 3010, and a back left fixed decorative body 3310 is mounted on the front. And a rear left drive unit 3330.

  The back left fixed decorative body 3310 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a vertically elongated substantially rectangular shape in a front view. The back left fixed decorative body 3310 is provided with a three-dimensional decorative and translucent fixed side decorative member 3311, and is attached to the rear side of the fixed side decorative member 3311 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. And a back left fixed decorative substrate 3312. As shown in the drawing, the fixed-side decorative member 3311 is partially formed with a decoration of a “batsu” tile. This back left fixed decorative body 3310 can cause the fixed side decorative member 3311 to emit light by decorating the LED of the back left fixed decorative substrate 3312 appropriately.

  The back left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left movable effect rendering unit 3300 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the back left fixed decorative body 3310 when viewed from the front. The back left movable decorative body 3320 includes a frame-shaped movable decorative member 3321 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a translucent frame-shaped decorative frame 3322 attached to the rear surface of the movable decorative member 3321. And a frame-shaped movable base 3323 attached to the rear side of the decoration frame 3322; a back left movable decoration attached between the movable base 3323 and the decoration frame 3322 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. And a substrate 3324.

  The movable side decorative member 3321 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is provided with the same decoration as the first decorative surface 3111 of the back lower first decorative body 3110 in the lower back movable effect unit 3100. The movable base 3323 has a lower end protruding below the movable side decorative member 3321 and the decorative frame 3322, and the protruding portion is attached by the back left drive unit 3330 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Although not shown, the back left movable decorative substrate 3324 is formed in a U-shape so as to extend along the right side of the center of the frame-shaped decorative frame 3322 in the left-right direction in front view. By illuminating the LED on the back left movable decorative substrate 3324, the movable decorative member 3321 can be illuminated.

  The back left drive unit 3330 of the back left movable rendering unit 3300 is mounted on the unit base 3331 mounted in the back box 3010 and the lower front surface of the unit base 3331 so that the back left movable decorative body 3320 can slide in the left and right direction. The slide guide 3332 extending in the left-right direction is attached, the back left drive motor 3333 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331 so that the rotation axis extends forward, and the base end side of the rotation axis of the back left drive motor 3333 is A rod-shaped operation arm (not shown) attached and having a distal end connected to the back left movable decorative body 3320, and a slide detection sensor 3335 attached to the unit base 3331 for detecting the rotational position of the operation arm And a back left fixed decorative substrate 3312 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3331. Urahidari movable decorative substrate 3324, and a Urahidari relay board 3336 that relays the connection between the back left drive motor 3333, and the slide detection sensor 3335 and effect driving substrate 3043, the.

  The unit base 3331 of the back left drive unit 3330 has the back left fixed decorative body 3310 mounted on the left end side in front view, ahead of the back left movable decorative body 3320. The slide guide 3332 attaches the lower end of the movable base 3323 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The back left drive motor 3333 is attached to the upper right corner of the unit base 3331 in rear view. The operating arm (not shown) extends from the base end attached to the rotating shaft of the back left drive motor 3333 to the vicinity of the lower right end of the lower side of the frame-shaped back left movable decorative body 3320 in rear view. Although not shown in the drawings, the operating arm has a slit formed at the end thereof, which penetrates back and forth and extends in the longitudinal direction. A guide pin projecting rearward from the vicinity of the lower right corner in rear view of the movable base 3323 of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slidably inserted into the slit.

  Next, the operation of the rear left movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state, the rear left movable decorative body 3320 is located behind the rear left fixed decorative body 3310 in the normal state, as shown in FIG. It is in a state. That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located at the immersion position where it cannot be visually recognized. In this normal state, the operation arm (not shown) is detected by the slide detection sensor 3335. In a normal state, when assembled to the game board 5, a part of the right end in front view of the back left fixed decorative body arranged on the front side faces the frame of the center role 2500 and the back left side. The left side of the front surface of the fixed decorative body as viewed from the front can be visually recognized from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 on the left side of the center role 2500. This back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to a position where the back left movable decorative body 3320 is at the same height as the back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 of the rear lower movable effect unit 3100. ing.

  In this normal state, when the operation arm is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the back left drive motor 3333, the guide pin of the movable base 3323 slidably inserted into the slit at the tip of the operation arm is moved. Then, the operating arm presses rightward in front view, and the back left movable decorative body 3320 slides straight rightward in front view via the slide guide 3332. Then, when the right side portion of the frame-shaped back left fixed decorative body 3320 is left to the right from the front view rear side of the back left fixed decorative body 3310, the sliding movement to the right is stopped. Thus, the portion on the right side of the left side of the frame-shaped back left movable decorative body 3320 is located on the right side of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 and can be visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 111B). ). That is, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is located at an appearance position where it can be visually recognized from the player side.

  In a state where the back left movable decorative body 3320 slides to the right and is located at the appearance position, in a state where the back left movable decorative body 3320 is assembled to the game board 5, the back left movable decorative body 3320 passes through the frame of the center role object 2500 from the player side. While being visible, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 disposed rearward through the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 can be visually recognized. Therefore, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, when a predetermined effect image (effect animation) is displayed in the display area right behind the back left movable decorative body 3320, the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 is displayed to the player. It can be illusioned that a liquid crystal display device is mounted inside. Thereby, the player can be illusioned that there are two sub liquid crystal display devices 3114 on the left and right of the first decorative surface 3111 of the first back decorative body 3110 of the back lower movable effect unit 3100.

[5-9f. Movable production unit in the back]
Next, the rear upper middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 123. FIG. 112 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper middle movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 112 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 113 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle movable production unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle production unit for each main configuration. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 114 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper middle decorative body unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle decoration unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper middle decoration unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 117 (a) is an explanatory view showing the driving configuration of the back upper middle decoration unit from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. FIG. 118 (a) is a front view of the back upper middle decorative body unit in a normal state, and FIG. 118 (b) is a state in which a pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies of the back upper middle decorative body unit are half opened outward. (C) is a front view showing a pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies of the back upper middle decorative body unit fully opened outward.

  FIG. 119 (a) is a front perspective view of a rear upper middle drive unit of a rear upper middle movable effect unit, and FIG. 119 (b) is a rear upper middle drive unit of a rear upper middle movable effect unit viewed from behind. FIG. FIG. 120 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 120 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle drive unit disassembled for each main configuration. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. FIG. 121 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper middle rotation unit of the rear upper middle drive unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is an exploded rear upper middle rotation unit of the rear upper middle drive unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the drive system of the rear upper middle movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 123 (a) is a front view of the back upper middle movable effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front view showing the back upper middle decoration unit in the back upper middle movable effect unit. .

  The rear upper middle movable effecting unit 3400 is attached from the substantially center in the left-right direction to the right end above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIG. 113, the back upper middle movable effecting unit 3400 is attached to a pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 which are attached to be able to open and close, and a pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411. A back upper middle decoration body unit 3410 having a back upper middle decoration body 3412, a rotating connection member 3430 attached to the rear surface of the back upper middle decoration unit 3410, and a rotating connection member 3430. The upper back middle decoration unit 3410 is attached to the back box 3010 so as to be movable up and down and rotatable, and the upper back middle drive unit 3440 is mounted on the front of the back upper middle drive unit 3440. It comprises a unit 3480 and a middle upper back relay board 3490 attached to the rear surface of the middle middle back drive unit 3440.

  As shown in FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 of the back upper middle movable effecting unit 3400 is a pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and having translucency. 3411, a translucent middle second decorative body 3412 disposed behind the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 and having a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies A pair of translucent flat plate-shaped slide bases 3413 respectively attached to the rear surface of the body 3411 and a pair of light-transmissive flat plates mounted on the rear surface of the pair of slide bases 3413 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A back upper middle decorative board 3414, a back upper middle second decorative board 3415 attached to the rear surface of the back upper middle decorative body 3412 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face, and a back upper middle second decorative board Cover the back of 3415 On the rear side of the substrate cover 3416 so as to form a space in which the slide base 3413 is slidably accommodated between the substrate cover 3416 attached to the rear surface of the second upper decorative body 3412 and the substrate cover 3416. It has a flat plate-shaped slider cover 3417 attached and a decorative body unit base 3418 attached to the rear side of the slider cover 3417.

  In addition, the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is mounted on the rear surface of the motor base 3419 attached to the rear surface of the decorative body unit base 3418, and the rotating shaft projects from the front surface of the motor base 3419. A first upper back middle drive motor 3420 and a first spur gear-shaped drive gear mounted on the rotating shaft of the first back upper middle drive motor 3420 and disposed between the motor base 3419 and the decorative body unit base 3418 3421, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3422 meshed with the first drive gear 3421 and rotatably attached to the decorative body unit base 3418 so that the front end protrudes forward of the decorative body unit base. , Is meshed with the first transmission gear 3422, and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the decorative body unit base 3418. It includes a first pinion gear 3423, a.

  Further, a back upper middle decoration body unit 3410 is provided with a rack gear 3424a that meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 and extends left and right, and a mounting boss that passes through the slider cover 3417 and mounts one of the pair of slide bases 3413. A first slider 3424, which has a 3424 b and is slidably mounted in the left-right direction between the slider cover 3417 and the decorative body unit base 3418, and a rack gear 3424 a of the first slider 3424 sandwiches the first pinion gear 3423. Has a rack gear 3425a meshing with the first pinion gear 3423 on the opposite side and extending left and right, and a mounting boss 3425b that penetrates through the slider cover 3417 and mounts the remaining (the other) of the pair of slide bases 3413. , Slider cover 3417 and decorative body uni A second slider 3425 slidably attached to the base unit 3418 in the left-right direction, a slide detection sensor 3426 attached to the decorative body unit base 3418 from the rear side, and detecting a sliding position of the second slider 3425; , Is provided.

  A pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 of the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 has a shape in a front view, in which one end in the longitudinal direction of a rectangular extending left and right bulges outward in a semicircular arc, The opposite end is inwardly recessed in a semicircular arc, and the portion depressed in the semicircular arc is a concave portion 3411a. In addition, the outer periphery of the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 except for the end side where the concave portion 3411a concaved in a semi-circular shape is formed inward extends rearward in a plate shape. The pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 are attached in such a manner that the edges where the concave portions 3411a are formed face each other. Further, the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 is formed in a milky white color having a light transmitting property as a whole, and the front side of one back upper middle first decorative body 3411 has a head side of “dragon”. On the front surface of the remaining (other) back upper middle first decorative body 3411, the decoration on the tail side of the "dragon" is formed so as to have metallic luster.

  The back upper middle second decorative body 3412 is formed in a flat plate shape in a front view and slightly smaller than the size when a pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 are combined (closed). Have been. The back upper middle second decorative body 3412 is a circular center swelling part 3412a swelling forward which can be inserted into the recess 3411a of the back upper middle first decorative body 3411, and the right and left sides of the center decorative part 3412a. Two circular central horizontal decorative portions 3412b formed on both sides vertically separated from each other, and a circular central decorative portion 3412b formed on both the left and right outer sides of the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b and having the same size as the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b. It has an intermediate decorative portion 3412c and circular end decorative portions 3412d formed near the left and right ends on both left and right outer sides of the intermediate decorative portion 3412c and having a diameter larger than that of the intermediate decorative portion 3412c. The back upper middle second decorative body 3412 is entirely formed in a translucent milky white color, and has an outer periphery of a central decorative portion 3412a, a central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, a middle decorative portion 3412c, and an edge decorative portion 3412d on the front surface. In addition, a linear decoration having a metallic luster is formed. The back upper middle second decorative body 3412 is provided with a decoration that reminds a player of the "dot stick" of "Mahjong".

  Each of the pair of slide bases 3413 is formed in a shape substantially corresponding to the outer peripheral shape of the back upper middle first decorative body 3411, and is formed behind the outer periphery extending rearward of the back upper middle first decorative body 3411. Installed at the end. As a result, by assembling the back upper middle first decorative body 3411 and the slide base 3413, the back upper middle first decorative body 3411 forms a front surface between the slide base 3413 and the portion forming the front surface. A space in which the second decorative body 3412, the upper middle back decorative board 3415, and the board cover 3416 can be inserted is formed. Each of the pair of slide bases 3413 includes a slit 3413a that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right. In one of the slide bases 3413, the slit 3413a is formed on the side closer to the upper side in one slide base 3413, and the slit 3413a is formed on the side closer to the lower side in the other slide bases 3413. The pair of slide bases 3413 are each formed in a milky white color having a light-transmitting property.

  The pair of back upper middle first decorative substrates 3414 and back upper middle second decorative substrates 3415 are white substrates whose surfaces (entire surfaces) are white. This makes it easy to reflect and diffuse light and makes the substrate less noticeable. The back upper middle first decorative body 3414 is attached to the slide base 3413 that is located rearward away from the portion forming the front surface of the back upper middle first decorative body 3411. Since the irradiation range of light is widened before reaching the part forming the front surface of the first decorative body 3411, even if the number of LEDs is small, the entire first decorative body 3411 on the back can be uniformly illuminated. it can. On the other hand, the second middle decorative substrate 3415 is capable of illuminating and decorating the entire second middle decorative body 3412, as well as the central decorative portion 3412a and the central horizontal decorative portion of the second middle decorative body 3412. 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the end decorative portion 3412d can be independently illuminated.

  The board cover 3416 has a mounting boss 3416a that protrudes rearward from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the rear surface and is inserted into the slit 3413a of the slide base 3413. The rear end of the mounting boss 3416a of the board cover 3416 that passes through the slit 3413a of the slide base 3413 is mounted on the slider cover 3417. The mounting boss 3416a of the board cover 3416 relatively slides in the slit 3413a in the left-right direction via a rotatable bush 3427. This substrate cover 3416 is transparent.

  The slider cover 3417 penetrates back and forth and extends left and right, and a first slit 3417a through which the mounting boss 3424a of the first slider 3424 is slidably inserted. And a second slit 3417b into which the mounting boss 3425a of the second slider 3425 is slidably inserted. The first slit 3417a is formed near the lower side on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The second slit 3417b is formed near the upper side on the right side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  The first pinion gear 3423 is disposed slightly to the right from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 117). The first slider 3424 is arranged so that the rack gear 3424a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from below, and two mounting bosses 3424b arranged left and right from the left end in front view project forward. The two mounting bosses 3424b of the first slider 3424 have front ends protruding forward through the first slits 3417a of the slider cover 3417, and the first decoration in the upper back on which the decoration on the head side of the "dragon" is applied. It is attached to the rear surface of the slide base 3413 attached to the body 3411. The second slider 3425 is arranged so that the rack gear 3425a meshes with the first pinion gear 3423 from above, and two mounting bosses 3425b arranged side by side from the right end in front view project forward. Two attachment bosses 3425b of the second slider 3425 have front ends protruding forward through the second slits 3417b of the slider cover 3417, and are provided with a decoration on the tail side of the "dragon". It is attached to the rear surface of the slide base 3413 attached to 3411. The second slider 3425 includes a detection piece 3425c that protrudes upward from the upper portion near the right end in front view in a flat plate shape. The detection piece 3425c is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426.

  Subsequently, an operation of the back upper middle decoration body unit 3410 in the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 118 (a) and the like, the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 closes when the ends on the concave portion 3411a side of the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 abut against each other. I have. In this state, the central decorative portion 3412a of the second upper middle back body 3412 swells forward through the circular opening formed by the concave portion 3411a, and the other portions of the second middle decorative body 3412 above the back upper side extend from the front. I cannot see it.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 117A, the left end of the first slider 3424 in the front view and the right end of the second slider 2425 in the front view are in the left-right direction in the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410. It is located near the center. The detection piece 3425c of the second slider 3425 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3426. In the normal state (closed state), when the central decoration portion 3412a is illuminated by the back upper middle decoration substrate 3415, the decoration reminiscent of the "thousand-point stick" of "Mahjong" can be shown to the player. Also, in the normal state, when the entire back upper middle decorative body 3412 is illuminated by the back upper middle decorative board 3415, the back upper middle decorative body 3412 covering the front of the back upper middle decorative body 3412 is formed. The body 3411 can be entirely illuminated. Further, when the LED of the back upper middle first decorative body 3414 is made to emit light in a normal state, the light is formed on the rear side of the back upper middle second decorative body 3415 formed in white, the back upper middle first decorative body 3414. The light can be reflected and diffused on the front surface and the like, and the outer periphery and the like of the first decorative body 3411 on the back can be illuminated.

  When the first pinion gear 3423 is driven to rotate clockwise in a front view from the normal state via the first drive gear 3421 and the first transmission gear 3422 by the first drive motor 3420 in the rear upper position, With the rack gear 3424a of the first slider 3424 and the rack gear 3425a of the second slider 3425 meshing with the pinion gear 3423, the first slider 3424 slides to the left in front view and the second slider 3425 moves to the right in front view. Slide to move. Accordingly, the first decorative body 3411 on the back of which the decoration on the head side of the “dragon” attached via the attachment boss 3424b of the first slider 3424 is slid to the left as viewed from the front, and The first decorative body 3411 with the decoration on the tail side of the “dragon” attached via the attachment boss 3425b of the second slider 3425 slides to the right in front view, and a pair of the upper and lower middle The first decorative body 3411 slides in the direction away from each other and opens.

  When the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 are slid in the directions away from each other, the back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411a between the end sides on the concave portion 3411a side of the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411. A part of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 disposed behind 3411 faces forward. Then, in a state in which the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 faces forward from between the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411, the back upper middle first drive motor 3420 is formed. Is temporarily stopped. In this state (intermediate open state), as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the central decorative portion 3412a of the second upper decorative middle part 3412 and the four central decorative parts 3412a are located between the pair of first upper decorative middle parts 3411. The center horizontal decorative portion 3412b faces forward. In this state, when the central decorative portion 3412a and the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b are illuminated and decorated by the second upper decorative substrate 3415 in the back, the player can see the decoration reminiscent of the “5,000 sticks” of “Mahjong”. it can.

  From this state, when the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 is slid in the direction away from each other by the back upper middle first drive motor 3420 and the rotational drive is stopped in the most separated state, FIG. As shown in c), substantially the entire back upper middle second decorative body 3412 faces forward from between the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 (full open state). In this state, all of the central decorative portion 3412a, central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and end decorative portion 3412d of the back upper middle decorative body 3412 face the front, and the back upper middle decorative substrate 3412d. When the central decorative portion 3412a, the central horizontal decorative portion 3412b, the intermediate decorative portion 3412c, and the edge decorative portion 3412d are illuminated by 3415, the player can see a decoration reminiscent of the "mazen stick" of "Mahjong". it can. Also, in this state, the back upper middle first decorative body 3411 and the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 are entirely illuminated by the back upper middle first decorative substrate 3414 and the back upper middle decorative substrate 3415. be able to.

  Subsequently, the rotary connection member 3430 of the back upper middle movable effecting unit 3400 is attached to the center in the longitudinal direction on the rear surface of the decorative body unit base 3418 in the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410, and the back side of the back upper middle drive unit 3440. The middle rotation unit 3460 includes a connection base 3431 attached to the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467, and a cylindrical connection bush 3432 attached rotatably to the connection base 3431. The outer peripheral surface of the connection bush 3432 is inserted into the insertion hole 3461b of the rotation unit base 3461 of the middle upper rotation unit 3460.

  Next, the back upper middle drive unit 3440 of the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 120 and the like, the rear upper middle drive unit 3440 can rotate the rear upper middle decoration unit 3410 to be rotatable, and the rear upper middle rotary unit 3460 can rotate on the front side. And a base cover 3442 attached to the unit base 3441 so as to cover the front of the unit base 3441 in front of the back upper middle rotation unit 3460, and a base cover A rear upper middle second drive motor 3443 attached to the front surface of the 3442 and having a rotating shaft protruding rearward through the base cover 3442, and a flat shaft attached to the rotating shaft of the rear upper middle second drive motor 3443. A gear-shaped second drive gear 3444 and a large-diameter spur gear-shaped large-diameter transmission gear meshed with the second drive gear 3444. A second transmission gear 3445, which has a small-diameter spur gear-shaped small-diameter transmission gear 3445 b that rotates integrally with the large-diameter transmission gear 3445 a, and is rotatably attached to the base cover 3442; It has a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3446a that meshes with the small-diameter transmission gear 3445b of 3445, and a cylindrical drive pin 3446b that projects rearward from the rear surface of the gear portion 3446a, and is rotatably attached to the base cover 3442. And a driving pin 3446b of the lifting / lowering driving gear 3446. The second driving gear 3444, the second transmission gear 3445, and the lifting / lowering driving gear 3446. It is attached to the rear surface of the base cover 3442 so as to cover the rear side of the gear 3446, and Includes cover 3442 in cooperation with the second drive gear 3444, a second transmission gear 3445, and the elevation drive gear 3446 plate-like gear cover 3447 are rotatably mounted to, the.

  In addition, the back upper middle drive unit 3440 is attached to the unit base 3441 and detects a rotation position of the back upper middle rotation unit 3460, and the rotation detection sensor 3448, and the unit base 3441 and the back upper middle rotation unit 3460. An assist spring 3449 attached between and for urging the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 in a direction in which the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 rises, and a whole band penetrating back and forth and extending in the longitudinal direction. An assist arm 3450 having an assist slit 3450a and a base end rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3441; and a unit base 3441 which rotatably presses the assist arm 3450 from the front toward the unit base 3441. Arm retainer 3451 attached to the front of the That.

  As shown in FIG. 121 and the like, the rear upper middle rotation unit 3460 of the rear upper middle drive unit 3440 includes a bearing portion 3461a rotatably attached to the unit base 3441, a long hole that penetrates back and forth and extends in a predetermined direction. A drive slit 3461b into which a drive pin 3446b of a lifting drive gear 3446 is slidably inserted, an insertion hole 3461c into which a connection bush 3432 of a rotary connection member 3430 is inserted, and an assist slit of an assist arm 3450 which projects rearward. It has a cylindrical assist pin 3461d inserted into 3450a, and has a shallow box-shaped rotary unit base 3461 with an open rear and a rotary unit base 3461 that rotates to close the open rear side of the rotary unit base 3461. A rear cover 3462 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3461; It is equipped with a.

  Also, the rear upper middle rotating unit 3460 includes a rear upper middle third drive motor 3463 attached to the front surface of the rotating unit base 3461 so that the rotating shaft projects between the rear cover 3462 and the rotating unit base 3461, A third driving gear 3464 in the form of a spur gear mounted on the rotating shaft of the third driving motor 3463 in the upper back, and meshing with the third driving gear 3464 so as to be rotatable by the rotating unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462. An attached spur gear drive pinion gear 3465, and a rod-shaped transmission rack gear meshed with the drive pinion gear 3465 and slidably mounted in a predetermined direction between the rotary unit base 3461 and the rear cover 3462. 3466 meshes with the transmission rack gear 3466 to insert the rotation unit base 3461 A spur gear-shaped driven pinion gear 3467, which is rotatably mounted at a position coaxial with 3461 c by a rotation unit base 3461 and a rear cover 3462, and to which a rear end of a connection base 3431 of a rotary connection member 3430 is mounted on the front surface; It has.

  Further, the rear upper middle rotation unit 3460 detects the rotation position of the driven pinion gear 3467 and a rotation detection sensor 3468 attached to the rotation unit base 3461, and the assist pin 3461d of the rotation unit base 3461 is inserted inside. A flanged cylindrical bush 3469 which is slidably inserted into the assist slit 3450a of the assist arm 3450 and a bush 3469 attached to the rear end of the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461 are detached from the assist pin 3461d. And a retaining cap 3470 for preventing

  The unit base 3441 of the rear upper middle drive unit 3440 is formed in a shape in which the upper part of a vertically extending quadrangular left side when viewed from the front projects leftward, projects forward from the lower front surface, and rotates inside the rear upper part. A rotation support pin 3441a for rotatably mounting the unit 3460 is provided. The rotation support pin 3441a of the unit base 3441 is inserted into a bearing 3461a of the rotation unit base 3461 of the middle upper rotation unit 3460. A rotation detection sensor 3448 is attached to the unit base 3441 near the right end in front view at the upper end of the front surface, and an assist arm 3450 is attached near the left end in front view.

  The upper back second drive motor 3463 is attached near the upper end on the front surface of the base cover 3442. The vertical drive gear 3446 to which the rotational drive of the back upper second drive motor 3463 is transmitted via the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445 is located at a substantially central position in the vertical direction of the unit base 3441 and the base cover 3442. (See FIG. 122).

  The assist spring 3449 is a coil-shaped torsion spring, and is attached so as to surround the outer periphery of the rotation support pin 3441a in the unit base 3441. The assist arm 3450 can be rotated on the same surface without rattling by being pressed against the unit base 3441 by the arm retainer 3451.

  The rotation unit base 3461 of the rear upper middle rotation unit 3460 extends right and left, and a bearing 3461a into which the rotation support pin 3441a of the unit base 3441 is inserted is formed at the lower right corner in front view. The bearing portion 3461a is formed by a metal bearing. The drive slit 3461b of the rotating unit base 3461 is formed above the bearing 3461a, and extends vertically. The insertion hole 3461c of the rotating unit base 3461 is formed near the left end in front view. The rotating unit base 3461 extends longer than the transmission rack gear 3466 left and right along the lower side, and a slide groove 3461e that slidably accommodates the transmission rack gear 3466, and protrudes upward from the upper right end in front view to detect rotation. A detection piece 3461f detected by a sensor.

  The rear upper middle third drive motor 3463 is attached to the rotation unit base 3461 at substantially the center between the bearing portion 3461a and the insertion hole 3461c. In the driven pinion gear 3467, the gear teeth on the outer periphery that mesh with the transmission rack gear 3466 are formed only within a range of about ／ of the entire circumference, and do not make one rotation. The driven pinion gear 3467 includes a fan-shaped detection piece 3467a extending outward from a portion of the outer circumference where no gear teeth are formed. The detection piece 3467a is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468.

  Next, the back upper right decorative unit 3480 of the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described. The back upper right decorative unit 3480 is mounted on the front of the base cover 3442 at a position forward of the rear upper second drive motor 3443 in the rear upper middle drive unit 3440, and is mounted on the front of the decorative base 3481. A back upper right decorative board 3482 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, a translucent back upper decorative body 3483 which is disposed in front of the back upper right decorative board 3482 and is attached to the front of the decorative base 3481; , Is provided.

  The back upper right decoration unit 3480 can cause the back upper right decoration body 3483 to emit light by making the LED on the back upper right decoration substrate 3482 emit light. The back upper right decorative unit 3483 of the back upper right decorative unit 3480 is assembled with the game board 5 and, in a front view right hitting game area 2540 of the center role 2500, has a gate portion 2003 in a right hit distribution space 2541 and a general prize. It is located between the mouth 2001 and the inside of the upper right circulation space 2541 can be illuminated from behind through the transparent game panel 1100.

  The back middle relay board 3490 of the back top middle movable rendering unit 3400 includes a back top middle decoration board 3414, a back top middle second decoration board 3415, a back top middle first drive motor 3420, a slide detection sensor 3426, a back top. A middle second drive motor 3443, a rotation detection sensor 3448, a back upper middle third drive motor 3463, a rotation detection sensor 3468, a back upper right decorative board 3482, and an effect drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510; Are connected.

  Next, the operation of the rear upper middle movable effect unit 3400 will be described together with the operation of the rear upper middle drive unit 3440. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 123 (a), the upper back middle decorative body unit 3410 extends left and right so that the longitudinal direction is horizontal, and the upper side thereof is It is located slightly below the upper side of the unit base 3441 of the middle back drive unit 3440. In this normal state, the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411 are in contact with each other and are closed.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 122, the upper middle rotation unit 3460 is located at the upper rotation end, and the drive pin 3446b of the elevation drive gear 3446 is connected to the drive slit 3461b of the rotation unit base 3461. Is located at the lower end. In this state, due to the weight of the back upper middle decoration body unit 3410 and the like, a rotating moment acts on the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 so as to rotate the rotation support pin 3441a in the counterclockwise direction in front view. ing. Due to this rotational moment, the drive pin 3446b is pressed to the left through the drive slit 3461b. When the drive pin 3446b is pressed, the elevation drive gear 3446 attempts to rotate, but the drive pin 3446b passes through the rotation center of the elevation drive gear 3446 and is perpendicular to the direction in which the drive slit 3461b extends. Since it is located lower than that, the lifting drive gear 3446 attempts to rotate clockwise in front view. However, since the drive pin 3446b of the elevation drive gear 3446 is in contact with the lower end in the drive slit 3461b, the elevation drive gear 3446 can no longer rotate clockwise, and the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 Is maintained in the normal state, and the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 is locked in the raised state. Also, in this state, the lifting drive gear 3446 does not rotate despite the action of the rotational moment, so that a load is applied to the second upper drive motor 3443 via the second transmission gear 3445 and the second drive gear 3444. In other words, the back upper middle decoration body unit 3410 can be maintained at the rising end even when the back upper middle second drive motor 3443 is not energized.

  In a normal state, the transmission rack gear 3466 slidably supported by the slide groove 3461e of the rotation unit base 3461 is located at the moving end where the rotation support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a) has moved away, and The driven pinion gear 3467 meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 is at a rotational position near the turning end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Further, in a normal state, the center of the insertion hole 3461c (the driven pinion gear 3467) of the rotating unit base 3461 of the rear upper middle rotating unit 3460 is located above the center of the bearing hole 3461a (the rotation support pin 3441a). ing. Further, in a normal state, the assist arm 3450 extends horizontally, and the assist pin 3461d of the rotary unit base 3461 slidably inserted into the assist slit 3450a of the assist arm 3450 is connected to the base in the assist slit 3450a. It is located near the end on the end side.

  In a normal state, the detection piece 3461f of the rotation unit base 3461 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3448, and the detection piece 3467a of the driven pinion gear 3467 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3468. In a normal state, when assembled on the game board 5, the pair of horizontally extending and closed middle upper first decorative bodies 3411 form a main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the frame of the center role 2500 in front view. (See FIG. 81 and the like) above the display screen of the player.

  When the vertical drive gear 3446 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view from the normal state, the vertical drive gear 3446 is rotated by the second upper drive motor 3443 via the second drive gear 3444 and the second transmission gear 3445 from the back upper middle. The drive pin 3446b of the drive gear 3446 revolves in the counterclockwise direction so as to rise inside the drive slit 3461b. When the driving pin 3446b revolves in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the driving pin 3446b presses the inside of the driving slit 3461b to the left, and the upper middle rotation unit 3460 is rotated and supported via the driving slit 3461b. It rotates in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front centering on the pin 3441a.

  When the rear upper middle rotation unit 3460 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the insertion hole of the rotation unit base 3461 located above the rotation support pin 3441a (bearing portion 3461a) and to the left in front view. The 3461c (the driven pinion gear 3467) side moves downward. As a result, the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 attached to the driven pinion gear 3467 is lowered via the rotation connection member 3430 through the insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461. At this time, since the assist pin 3461d of the rotating unit base 3461 revolves in the counterclockwise direction in front view around the rotation support pin 3441a, the assist pin 3461d causes the assist arm 3450 in the counterclockwise direction in front view. While rotating, the assist pin 3461d slides in the assist slit 3450a toward the tip end side.

  Then, when the rear upper middle rotation unit 3460 rotates approximately 41 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state in front view, the rotation driving of the rear upper middle second drive motor 3443 stops, and the insertion hole 3461c of the rotation unit base 3461 is inserted. The driven pinion gear 3467 is located below the rotation support pin 3441a, and the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is located at the lower end (see FIG. 123 (b)). In this state, a part of the rotating unit base 3461 abuts on the unit base 3441, and the assist pin 3461d abuts on the distal end in the assist slit 3450a. The rotation is thus restricted.

  When the back upper middle rotation unit 3460 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front and the back upper middle decoration body unit 3410 is located at the lower end, the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is assembled with the game board 5 and The center of the body unit 3410 (the center decorative part 3412a of the second upper decorative body 3412) is located substantially at the center of the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIG. 137).

  With the back upper middle decorative body unit 3410 moved to the lower end, the back upper middle third drive motor 3463 drives the drive pinion gear 3465 to rotate in the clockwise direction in front view by way of the third drive gear 3464. Then, the transmission rack gear 3466 meshing with the drive pinion gear 3465 slides rightward in the front view in the slide groove 3461e. When this transmission rack gear 3466 slides rightward, the driven pinion gear 3467 meshing with the transmission rack gear 3466 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the rotational connection mounted on the front surface of the driven pinion gear 3467. Through the connection base 3431 of the member 3430, the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 also rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

  In the rear upper middle rotation unit 3460, the rear upper middle decoration unit 3410 can be rotated counterclockwise in front view until the transmission rack gear 3466 reaches the right end of the slide groove 3461e in front view. In the present embodiment, the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 can be rotated about 193 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state. Therefore, in a state where the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is located at the lower end, it can be rotated by 208 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in a front view with respect to a normal state extending horizontally (FIG. 123 ( b)). Then, in the state of FIG. 123 (b), the upper back upper first decoration body 3411 of the upper back upper decoration body unit 3410 is driven to slide the pair of back upper middle decoration bodies 3411 in directions away from each other. It is moved (see FIGS. 138 and 139).

  As described above, the back upper middle movable effecting unit 3400 includes the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 having the pair of back upper middle first decoration body 3411 and the back upper middle second decoration body 3412, and the back upper middle drive unit 3440. In addition to being able to be raised and lowered and rotated, the pair of upper first upper decorative bodies 3411 can be opened and closed with each other, so that various movable effects can be presented to the player. In addition, depending on the degree of opening of the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411, “Mahjong” expressed by the decoration of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 facing forward from between the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411. Since the score of the "point bar" can be changed, the player's expectation of the game can be enhanced by the score of the "point bar".

[5-9 g. Movable production unit in front of the back]
Next, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 124 (a) is a perspective view of the lower back front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 124 (b) is a perspective view of the rear lower front movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the underside front movable production unit excluding the underside front decoration unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 126 is an exploded view of the underside front movable production unit other than the underside front decoration unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the apparatus viewed from behind. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the underside front decoration unit of the underside front movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 128 is an exploded view of the underside front decoration unit of the underside front movable effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 129 is a front view schematically showing a decoration unit elevating mechanism in the lower back front movable effect unit. FIG. 130 (a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the state of the decoration unit lifting mechanism when the back lower front decoration unit is raised, and FIG. 130 (b) is an enlarged view of the portion of the unit lifting pin in FIG. (C) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the unit elevating pin and the elevating slit by further enlarging (b). FIG. 131 (a) is a front view showing the back lower front movable effect unit in a normal state, and (b) is a front view showing a state where the lower back front decorative body unit is raised from the state of (a). (C) is a front view showing a state in which the lower back front first decorative body of the lower back front decorative body unit is raised from the state of (b).

  The lower back front movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front of the lower back rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back lower front movable effect unit 3500 is a back lower front decorative body unit 3501 on which a predetermined decoration is applied, and an elevating unit attached to the front of the rear lower back movable effect unit 3100 by lifting and lowering the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 3502, a lower back left decoration unit 3503 attached to the front of the left end portion of the elevation unit 3502 in front view, and a lower back middle decoration unit 3504 attached to the left from the center in the front left / right direction of the front surface of the elevation unit 3502; A lower back left ball guiding unit 3505 attached downward from the front of the lower back middle decoration unit 3504 on the front surface of the lifting unit 3502, and a lower back front relay board 3506 mounted on the rear surface of the lifting unit 3502; It has.

  As shown in FIG. 127 and FIG. 128, the back lower front decoration body unit 3501 of the lower back front movable rendering unit 3500 is a back lower front first decoration in which different decorations are applied to both sides in a plate shape extending left and right. The body 3510 and the back lower front in which the first decorative body 3510 is attached to the upper side extending left and right so as to be rotatable with hinges and is mounted to the elevating unit 3502 so as to be able to move up and down and is decorated on the front. A second decorative body 3520.

  The lower back front decorative body unit 3510 of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is a shallow box-shaped transparent box whose front view is a rectangular shape extending long left and right, a predetermined decoration is formed on the front side, and the rear side is open. A first decoration member 3511 having a light-transmitting property, and a predetermined decoration is formed on the rear surface of the first decoration member 3511 and the rear surface has a predetermined decoration. A first back decoration member 3512, a back lower front first decoration substrate 3513 mounted between the first back decoration member 3512 and the first front decoration member 3511 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on both surfaces thereof, Two cylindrical first hinge portions 3514 projecting obliquely upward and rearward so as to be coaxial with an axis extending left and right from both left and right ends in the upper side of the back decoration member 3512 in front view; Positive of member 3512 A decorative body elevating pin 3515 protruding rightward from the right side surface in a columnar shape and slidably inserted into a slit 3533 a of a decorative body elevating arm 3533 of the lower back front second decorative body 3520 described below; And a flat detection piece 3516 projecting rearward from the right side of the back decoration member 3512 when viewed from the front.

  In the lower back front first decorative body 3510, of the two first hinge portions 3514, the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side in the front view is attached slightly to the left from the right end in the front view of the first back decorative member 3512. ing. Although not shown in detail, the first decorative member 3511 of the back lower front first decorative body 3511 is decorated with a plurality of "mahjong" "tiles" arranged side by side.

  The lower back lower second decorative body 3520 of the lower back lower decorative body unit 3501 is formed to be larger left and right and up and down than the lower back front first decorative body 3510, has a predetermined decoration formed on the front surface, and has a rear side. A second decorative member 3521 having an open shallow box-like shape and having a light-transmitting property; a second lower decorative board 3522 attached to the rear surface of the second decorative member 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; A flat board cover 3523 that covers the rear of the lower back front second decorative substrate 3522 and is attached to the rear side of the second decorative member 3521, and a front view of the upper side extending left and right of the second decorative member 3521. A first hinge portion 3514 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 that is rotatably hinged and protrudes obliquely upward and forward so as to be coaxial with an axis extending left and right from the vicinity of both left and right ends. Two cylindrical second hinge portions 3524, and a right end side from the left side is inserted into the second hinge portion 3524 on the right side in a front view of the two second hinge portions 3524, and the left end side is a back lower front first decorative body 3510. And a cylindrical hinge shaft 3525 inserted from the right side into the first hinge portion 3514 on the right side in front view, and a front view of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 attached to the rear surface of the left end of the second decorative member 3521 in front view. A hinge presser 3526 having a hinge shaft 3526a inserted from the left side into the first hinge portion 3514 on the left side.

  In addition, the lower back front second decorative body 3520 is mounted on the right side surface of the second decorative member 3521 in a front view and is a shallow box-shaped gear base 3527 that is opened on the right side. A lower back front first drive motor 3528 mounted on the left side surface of the gear base 3527 in a front view so as to protrude rightward, and a spur gear shape mounted on a rotation shaft of the back lower front first drive motor 3528. A first drive gear 3529, a transmission first gear 3530 meshed with the first drive gear 3529 and rotatably mounted on the gear base 3527, and a transmission first gear 3530 meshed with the first transmission gear 3530 and rotated on the gear base 3527; A transmission second gear 3531 rotatably attached to the transmission second gear 3531, a first elevating gear 3532 rotatably mounted on the gear base 3527 and meshing with the transmission second gear 3531; On the left side of the base 3527 when viewed from the front, it rotates integrally with the first elevating gear 3532, penetrates in the left-right direction, and extends on the axis passing through the center of rotation. Right side of a decorative body lifting / lowering arm 3533 having a slit 3533a slidably inserted thereinto, a first drive gear 3529, a transmission first gear 3530, a transmission second gear 3531, and a first lifting / lowering gear 3532 in a right front view. And a flat-plate gear cover 3534 attached to the gear base 3527, with the open right end side of the gear base 3527 closed to cover the gear base 3527.

  Furthermore, the lower back front second decorative body 3520 is attached to the left side surface of the second decorative member 3521 when viewed from the front, and can be a decorative body lift detection sensor 3535 that can detect the detection piece 3516 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510. A sensor cover 3536 attached to the left side surface of the second decorative member 3521 in front view so as to cover the decorative body elevating / lowering detection sensor 3535; A portion 3537 and a guide boss 3538 protruding rearward in a columnar shape from near the right end in rear view at the upper part of the rear surface of the substrate cover 3523.

  In the lower back front decorative body unit 3501, the first hinge pin 3515, the decorative body elevating pin 3515, the second hinge portion 3524, the hinge shafts 3525 and 3526a, the lower back front first drive motor 3528, the first drive gear 3529, the transmission first A decorative body elevating mechanism in which the gear 3530, the transmission second gear 3531, the first elevating gear 3532, and the decorative body elevating arm 3533 rotate the hinged part of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 with respect to an axis extending left and right to move up and down. 3501A.

  In addition, the lower back front second decorative body 3520 is formed at the lower part of the second decorative member 3521 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view, penetrates back and forth, and has a long hole-shaped elevating slit 3540 extending left and right. , Have. As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130 and the like, this elevating slit 3540 is formed such that both ends extending left and right are formed at the same height, and a portion of the upper side extending left and right is closer to the right from the left end in front view. Has a lock projection 3540a projecting downward. The lock protrusion 3540a is formed in an arc shape in which the left side in front view is in contact with a line extending horizontally from the upper end of the semicircular arc at the left end of the elevating slit 3540, and the right side in front view is formed in the elevating slit. It is formed in a linear shape that extends obliquely toward the left end of a portion that slightly extends leftward horizontally from the upper end of the semicircular arc at the right end of 3540. The lower side extending left and right of the elevating slit 3540 is formed in a shape following the upper side so as to form a substantially constant interval with the upper side.

  The elevating unit 3502 of the lower back front movable rendering unit 3500 is located between the flat base unit 3550 attached to the front surface of the rear lower back movable rendering unit 3100 and the unit base 3550, under the lower back front decorative body unit 3501. A base cover 3551 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3550 with a gap capable of accommodating a portion below the front first decorative body 3510, and a rotating shaft protruding between the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551. A lower back front second drive motor 3552 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550, a spur gear-shaped second drive gear 3553 attached to the rotation shaft of the lower back front second drive motor 3552, It is in mesh with the second drive gear 3553, and is rotated by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551. A second transmission gear 3554 attached to the second transmission gear 3554, an arc-shaped second elevating gear 3555a meshed with the second transmission gear 3554, and a substantially semicircular flat plate-shaped main body 3555b concentric with the arc of the second elevating gear 3555a. A shaft hole 3555c penetrating at the center of the main body 3555b and rotatably mounted by the unit base 3550 and the base cover 3551; and an arm 3555d extending from the main body 3555b in a direction away from the second lifting gear 3555a. And a column-shaped arm which is attached to the front end of the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555 from the front and is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3540 of the lower back decoration unit 3501. Unit lifting pin 3556a, front end of unit lifting pin 3556a A plate-shaped connecting piece 3556b extending toward the shaft hole 3555c along the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555, and a rear end protruding rearward from the tip of the connecting piece 3556b, and a rear end of the main body 3555b of the unit elevating arm 3555 And an arm reinforcing member 3556 having a mounting boss 3556c mounted on the front surface.

  The lower back front second drive motor 3552 is attached to the rear surface of the lower left corner of the unit base 3550 in front view. The second drive gear 3553 includes a flat detection piece 3553a extending outward. The unit elevating arm 3555 is attached so as to rotate around a position near the upper part of the unit base 3550 at a position closer to the left from the center in the left-right direction in front view. The unit elevating arm 3555 is formed such that the distance from the shaft hole 3555c to the tip of the arm portion 3555d is longer than the radius of the second elevating gear 3555a.

  In addition, the lifting unit 3502 is mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3550 and is capable of detecting the detection piece 3353a of the second drive gear 3553. A vertically extending slide base 3558; a vertically extending rod-shaped intermediate slider 3559 attached to the front side of the slide base 3558 so as to be vertically slidable; And a vertically extending mounting slider 3560 which is mounted on the slider mounting portion 3537 of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501.

  In this elevating unit 3502, the lower back front second driving motor 3552, second driving gear 3553, second transmission gear 3554, unit elevating arm 3555, arm reinforcing member 3556 (unit elevating pin 3556 a), slide base 3558, intermediate slider 3559. , And the attachment slider 3560 constitute a decoration unit lifting mechanism 3502A for raising and lowering the lower back front decoration unit 3501.

  Further, the elevating unit 3502 has a base end rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550, penetrates back and forth, extends toward the distal end, and has a guide boss 3538 of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 inserted therethrough. Arm 3561 having a guide slit 3561a, and a guide bush into which a guide boss 3538 of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is slidably inserted into the guide slit 3561a of the guide arm 3561 from the rear. 3562, a spring base 3563 attached to the rear end of the guide boss 3538 behind the guide bush 3562, and an arm retainer attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 so as to rotatably support the rear surface on the base end side of the guide arm 3561. 3564, arm presser 3564 and spring Over scan both ends and 3563 is provided with an assist spring 3565 which urges the respective attached and the direction in which the Ahemu presser 3564 and spring-based 3563 approach each other, the. The guide arm 3561 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3550 at the upper left position on the front side and closer to the right, and the tip side extends rightward.

  The back lower left decorative unit 3503 of the back lower front movable effecting unit 3500 is mounted on the upper left corner of the unit base 3550 in a front view, and has a three-dimensional decoration on the front surface imitating a “mahjong” “tile”. And a lower back left decorative board 3561 attached to the front of the unit base 3550 behind the back left lower decorative body 3560 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front. The lower back left decorative unit 3503 can make the lower left lower decorative body 3560 emit light by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower left lower decorative board 3561. The lower back left decorative unit 3503 is located behind the upper side unit 2300 when assembled to the game board 5, and can illuminate around the upper side unit 2300 in the game area 5a.

  The under-rear middle decoration unit 3504 of the under-rear front movable effecting unit 3500 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the base cover 3551 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the decoration of the character “Dokun” is formed. A lower back middle decoration body 3570 having a property, and a lower back middle decoration board 3571 mounted on the front surface of the base cover 3551 behind the back lower middle decoration body 3570 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The under-back under-decoration unit 3504 can cause the under-back under-decoration decorative body 3570 to emit light by appropriately emitting the LED of the under-back under-decoration decoration substrate 3571. The lower back middle decoration unit 3504 is located between the lower side unit 2200 and the center role 2500 in the front-view game area 5a when assembled to the game board 5.

  The lower left lower ball guiding unit 3505 of the lower rear front movable effecting unit 3500 can guide the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the lower side unit 2200 and discharge them downward. The rear lower left ball guiding unit 3505 is attached to the front surface of the base cover 3551 and has a transparent passage member 3580 having an open front surface, and a transparent flat plate member having the open front surface of the passage member 3580 closed. It includes a cover 3581 and a rear side decorative substrate 3582 mounted on the front surface of the base cover 3551 behind the passage member 3580 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. In the passage member 3580, a general winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 in the lower side unit 2200 is mounted. In addition, the rear lower left ball guiding unit 3505 is located behind the lower side unit 2200 in a state where the lower unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, and the LED of the side rear decorative substrate 3582 is appropriately illuminated, thereby lowering the lower side unit 2200. It can be luminous decoration.

  The lower back relay board 3506 of the lower back movable effect unit 3500 includes a lower back front first decorative board 3513, a lower back front second decorative board 3522, a lower back front first drive motor 3528, a decorative body elevating detection sensor 3535, The lower back front second drive motor 3552, the unit elevating detection sensor 3557, the lower left back decoration board 3561, the lower back middle decoration board 3571, and the side back decoration board 3582, and the rendering drive board 3043 connected to the peripheral control board 1510 Is relaying the connection.

  Next, the operation of the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 will be described. As shown in FIG. 131 (a) and the like, in the normal state, the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is located at the lower end, and the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is in the lower back front decorative body unit 3501. The lower back front first decorative body 3510 is hinged so as to descend and is located in front of the lower back front second decorative body 3520. In this state, the first front decorative member 3511 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 faces forward.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 129, the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555 of the elevating unit 3502 is located below the shaft hole 3555c, and is attached to the tip of the arm portion 3555d and The unit elevating pin 3556a of the arm reinforcing member 3556 inserted into the elevating slit 3540 of the lower front decoration unit 3501 is located near the right end of the elevating slit 3540 in front view. Further, the guide arm 3561 rotatably attached to the unit base 3550 is in a state of extending substantially horizontally with its tip directed rightward in front view, and is inserted into the guide slit 3561a of the guide arm 3561. The guide boss 3538 of the lower back front decoration unit 3501 is located at the left end in the front view in the guide slit 3561a. In this state, the detection piece 3553a of the second drive gear 3553 is detected by the unit elevation detection sensor 3557.

  In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, in a normal state, the decorative body elevating arm 3553 of the back lower front second decorative body 3520 of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 has a state in which the tip side extends downward from the rotation center. The decorative body elevating pin 3515 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 inserted into the slit 3533a of the decorative body elevating arm 3553 is located at the end near the center of rotation in the slit 3533a. I have. In this normal state, the detection piece 3516 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is detected by the decorative body up / down detection sensor 3535 of the back lower front second decorative body 3520.

  In this normal state, when assembled on the game board 5, it is located below the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in front view, behind the lower side of the center role 2500, and the lower back front decorative body unit The first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 in 3501 is located above the stage 2530.

  In a normal state, the unit raising / lowering arm 3555 is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the second drive motor 3552 below the back of the lifting unit 3502 via the second driving gear 3553 and the second transmission gear 3554. Then, the unit elevating pin 3556a at the tip of the arm portion 3555d revolves around the shaft hole 3555c in the ascending direction. When the unit elevating pin 3556a revolves and ascends, the unit elevating pin 3556a presses the inside of the elevating slit 3540 upward, so that the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is elevated. Since the lower end front decorative body unit 3501 is attached to the unit base 3550 via the slide base 3558, the intermediate slider 3559, and the attachment slider 3560, the right end portion in the front view rises straight without tilting.

  As the back-and-front lower decorative body unit 3501 moves up, the unit elevating pin 3556a inserted into the elevating slit 3540 slides (moves) inside the elevating slit 3540 to the left in front view. Then, when the unit elevating pin 3556a moves to the left in a front view from the lowermost part of the locking projection 3540a projecting downward in the elevating slit 3540, the driving of the back lower front second drive motor 3552 stops. Then, the rotation of the unit elevating arm 3555 (revolution of the unit elevating pin 3556a) is also stopped, and the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the drive unit 3502 (decorative body unit lifting mechanism 3502A) (first raising position). ) (See FIG. 131 (b)).

  In this state, since the tip of the arm portion 3555d of the unit elevating arm 3555 (unit elevating pin 3556a) is located at the upper right of the rotation center of the unit elevating arm 3555 (the shaft hole 3555c) in front view, Due to the weight of the front decoration unit 3501, a rotational moment acts on the tip of the arm portion 3555d to rotate the unit elevating arm 3555 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (c), on the left side of the lock projection 3540a on the upper side of the elevating slit 3540 where the unit elevating pin 3556a abuts, a part on the right side of the abutting part is Since the unit elevating pin 3556a has penetrated the inside of the boundary line L (indicated by a two-dot chain line in the drawing) of the turning range, in order for the lock projection 3540a to revolve downwardly, the penetrating part is required. The lock protrusion 3540a (the lower back front decorative body unit 3501) must be moved upward against the weight of the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 so that the outer side moves outside the boundary line L of the turning range. The rotational moment acting on the lifting pin 3556a is canceled, and the unit lifting arm 3555 does not rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. It is maintained (locked) in a state positioned.

  In a state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the elevating unit 3502, substantially the entire lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is in front of the center role 2500 in front view when assembled on the game board 5. As a result, the decoration of the first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 can be favorably viewed from the player side.

  Subsequently, in a state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is located at the rising end, the first lower drive front drive motor 3528 of the lower back front second decorative body 3520 drives the first drive gear 3529 and the transmission first gear 3530. When the decorative body elevating arm 3533 is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the right side via the transmission second gear 3531 and the first elevating gear 3532, the decorative object elevating arm 3533 causes the slit 3533a of the decorative body elevating arm 3533 to rotate into the slit 3533a. The first hinge part 3514 and the first hinge part 3514 are so arranged that the decorative body elevating pin 3515 of the inserted lower back front first decorative body 3510 is pressed forward and the lower side of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 moves forward and upward. The lower back front first decorative body 3510 is hinged about the second hinge 3524.

  Then, when the decorative body elevating arm 3533 rotates about 180 degrees clockwise in the right side view, the rotation of the lower back front first drive motor 3528 stops, and the lower back front first decorative body 3510 is moved to the lower back front second. The state is located above the decorative body 3520 (up position or open position). In this state, the first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 that initially faces forward is in a rearward facing state, and, instead, the rear lower back front second decorative body 3520 is facing rearward. The second back decoration member 3512 facing the second decoration member 3521 faces forward with the front surface located substantially on the same plane as the second decoration member 3521 above the second decoration member 3521. As a result, the decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are united to form one large decoration (decoration of the character “Wait”) (FIG. 131 ( c)).

  In a state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is lifted and the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is rotated by a hinge to be lifted and opened, the center accessory 2500 is assembled in the gaming board 5 in a front view. A state in which substantially the lower half of the inside of the frame (the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed by the lower back front first decorative body 3510 and the lower back front second decorative body 3520 (see FIG. 141).

  In this way, the under-below back movable effecting unit 3500 maintains the under-before back decorative body unit 3501 stopped at the position of the rising end even when the under-below back second drive motor 3552 is not energized. Therefore, the load acting on the lower back front second drive motor 3552 can be reduced. In addition, since the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is locked in the middle of the unit elevating pin 3556a revolving in the ascending direction, the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is locked when the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is locked at the rising end position. The player can enjoy the movement of the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 without making an unnatural movement such as lowering.

  In addition, in the lower back front decorative body unit 3501, the operation of raising the lower back front first decorative body 3510 is performed by rotating the hinge with respect to the axis extending to the left and right, so as to move up. Compared to the case where the first decoration body 3510 under the front lower back seen from the player side changes every moment, it can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. The first back decorative member 3512 of the back lower front first decorative body 3510 and the lower back front second decorative body 3520 which cannot be seen in a normal state by rotating the lower back front first decorative body 3510 by rotating the hinge. Can be shown, and the player can be surprised.

[5-10. Production on a game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 132 shows a state where the second decorative surface is turned to the front by rotating the first lower decorative body and the second lower decorative body together in the normal position in the movable effect unit after the lower unit. It is a front view of the game board shown. FIG. 133 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the first decorative body and the second decorative body after the back of the movable effect unit are closed and the first decorative surface of the first decorative body after the bottom is turned to the front. In the state, slide to the substantially left and right direction center in the game area, and slide the back upper left first decorative body and the back upper left second decorative body of the back upper left movable effect unit to the substantially left and right direction center in the game area. It is a front view of a game board shown in the state where it was moved. FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the lower back lower first decorative body is opened by rotating the hinge from behind the back lower movable effect unit from the state of FIG. 133 to the second lower back lower first decorative body and the lower back lower second decorative body. With the decoration surface facing the front, the back upper left second decorative body of the back upper left movable rendering unit is hinged and opened to open the back upper left first decorative body fixed decorative member and the back upper left second decorative body It is a front view of the game board which shows two decoration members in the state turned to the front. FIG. 135 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the first decorative body is rotated by hinge rotation from the state of FIG. 133 to the second lower decorative body after the back of the movable effect unit, and the second decorative body after the lower lower first decorative body and the second lower decorative body; It is a front view of the game board which shows the decoration surface facing the front.

  FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board in which the back left movable decorative body of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit is slid to the appearance position of the right end in front view. FIG. 137 is a front view counterclockwise in which the back upper middle decoration unit of the back upper middle movable effect unit in the back unit is moved to the position of the descending end, and the back upper middle decoration unit extends obliquely downward to the left in front view. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state rotated in the surrounding direction. FIG. 138 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies is separated from the state of FIG. 137 and is slid to a position of a half-open intermediate opening state. FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board in a state where the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies is further separated from the state of FIG. 138 and slid to a fully opened position. FIG. 140 is a front view of the game board in a state where the lower back front decorative body unit of the lower back front movable effect unit of the back unit is positioned at the rising end. FIG. 141 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back lower front first decorative body is hinge-rotated from the state of FIG. 140 to ascend above the back lower front second decorative body.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 81 and the like, the game board 5 of this embodiment displays the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center role 2500. , From the player side (front). In this normal state, the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120, which are hinged and rotatable behind the back unit 3000, can be hinged and the lower back second decorative body 3120 are closed. Only the first decorative surface 3111 of the 3110 is turned forward so that it can be visually recognized from the player side, and the display of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 of the first decorative surface 3111 is displayed on the right side of the lower right side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The screen is facing forward.

  In a normal state, the upper back left first decorative body 3210 and the upper back left second decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are rotated by the hinge rotation. In a folded state in which the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is located in front of the fixed decorative member 3211, it is located behind the rear left middle decorative unit 3050 which is the left end in front view with respect to the left and right sliding direction. The front side is invisible and invisible to the player by the back left middle decoration unit 3050.

  Further, in a normal state, the back left movable decorative body 3321 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit is located behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 which is the left end in front view with respect to the left and right sliding direction. A part of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 faces slightly forward through the frame of the center role 2500. Also, in the normal state, the back-upper middle decoration unit 3410 of the back-upper middle movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rising end above the upper side of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, A part of the front view center role 2500 is visible forward through the frame.

  In a normal state, in the back lower front decorative body unit 3501 of the back lower front movable unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the lower back front first decorative body 3510 is rotated in front of the lower back front second decorative body 3520 by hinge rotation. In a state in which the front and rear lower decorative body unit 3501 is folded so as to descend to the side, the lower end of the lower part of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in a front view lower direction so that the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 does not face forward from within the frame of the center role 2500. It is located in.

  The gaming board 5 is placed under the back of the back unit 3000 according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The movable rendering unit 3100, the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200, the back left movable rendering unit 3300, the back upper middle movable rendering unit 3400, and the back lower front movable rendering unit 3500 perform a predetermined rendering (movable rendering or luminous rendering). .

  Specifically, for example, as an effect using the rear-under-rear movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the rear-under-rear second decorative body 3120 is viewed in plan by the rear-under-rear second drive motor 3137 of the rotary drive unit 3130. By rotating in the clockwise direction, the second decorative surface 3122 facing backward is turned to the front (see FIG. 132). At this time, the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 that is closed and positioned in front of the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 is pressed by the back lower back second decorative body 3120 and rotates together. As a result, the back lower back second decorative body 3120 together with the back lower back first decorative body 3110 are located in front of the lower right corner of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in front view. This blocks a part of the displayed effect image, so that the back lower second decorative body 3120 can be made to stand out, and the “Tenun” Can be visually recognized by the player, and the expectation for the game can be increased by making the player think that there is something good.

  In addition, as an effect (movable effect) using the rear lower movable effect unit 3100 and the rear upper left movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the rear lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a third rear lower position of the slide unit 3150. With the drive motor 3155, the rotary drive unit 3130 is slid to the position of the left end in front view while the rear lower back first decorative body 3110 and the rear lower back second decorative body 3120 are closed. The first back decoration body 3110 is slightly rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the back bottom first drive motor 3134 so that the first decoration surface 3111 (the sub liquid crystal display device 3114) faces the front. At the same time, in the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200, the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are moved by the back upper left second decorative body 3220 by the back upper left second drive motor 3245 of the ride unit 3240. With the first decorative member 3221 facing the front while being closed with respect to the decorative body 3210, it is slid together with the back upper left second decorative body 3220 to the right end position in front view (see FIG. 133).

  In the state shown in FIG. 133, an axis extending vertically for hinge rotation of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 of the lower back lower movable effect unit 3100 and the back upper left The vertically extending axis for hinge-rotating the back upper left second decorative body 3220 with respect to the back upper left first decorative body 3210 of the movable effect unit 3200 is located coaxially with the left and right sides of the game area 5a. It almost coincides with the center in the direction. In this state, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a state in which the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the upper back left upper decorative body 3220 are obliquely arranged within the frame of the center role 2500 in front view. Is located in front of. Thereby, the player can be surprised by the movement of the first back decoration 3110 to the center side and the appearance of the back upper left second decoration 3220.

  Then, in a state in which the back lower back first decorative body 3110 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are moved to the center in the left-right direction (the state of FIG. 133), the rotary drive unit 3130 in the back lower back movable effect unit 3100. The lower back lower first decoration body 3110 folded by the lower back lower first drive motor 3134 is rotated clockwise in plan view so as to open forward from the lower back lower second decoration body 3120, The rear first decorative body 3110 is arranged on the left side of the rear second decorative body 3120, the second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are directed to the front, and the rear upper left of the rotary drive unit 3230 in the rear upper left movable effect unit 3200. The upper back left second decorative body 3220 folded by the first drive motor 3235 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view so as to open forward from the back upper left first decorative body 3210, A back on the left second decorative body fixing decorative member 3211 side by side 3220 on the right side of the first decorative body 3210 directs the second decorative member 3222 on the front (see Figure 134).

  In the state of FIG. 134, the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 arranged on the left and right of the back lower movable effect unit 3100 and the rear upper left movable effect unit 3200 are arranged on the left and right. The upper back left first decorative body 3210 and the back upper left second decorative body 3220 are in a state where they are vertically aligned at the center of the frame of the center role 2500 in a front view, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 It covers almost the front of the display screen. In addition, the second decorative surfaces 3111 and 3121 of the back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back second decorative body 3120 of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 facing the front, and the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 Due to the decoration applied to the fixed decorative member 3211 of the back upper left first decorative body 3210 and the second decorative member 3222 of the back upper left second decorative body 3220, the vertical character "Johnsei" is displayed by the player. It becomes visible from the side. As a result, a large decorative body appears in the frame of the center role 2500 (in front of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600), giving a great impact to the player and giving a chance to “big hit game” or the like. Can be strongly suggested, and the sense of expectation for the game can be increased.

  By the way, in the above description, the effect of simultaneously opening the lower back first decorative body 3110 of the back lower movable unit 3100 and the back upper left decorative body 3220 of the back upper left movable effect unit 3200 has been described. As shown at 135, only the first back decoration body 3110 of the back lower movable effect unit 3100 may be opened first. As a result, the lower back lower first decorative body 3110 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3120 of the back lower back movable effect unit 3100 are first opened by hinge rotation, and their second decorative surfaces 3112 and 3122 are turned to the front. Then, the character of "Holy" becomes visible first. At this time, since the cut-out decoration 3170 such as “one” is given above the character “holy”, the player is provided with a cut-out decoration 3170 as a set to complete the cut-out decoration 3170 above this character. It can be recognized that there is a (cutout decoration 3260), and the player is determined by whether or not a decoration that forms the pair (whether or not the back upper left second decorative body 3220 is hinged and opened). This makes it possible for the player to make a throbbing and throbbing, thereby increasing the player's expectation.

  As an effect using the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the back left movable decorative body 3320 is slid by the back left drive motor 3333 of the back left drive unit 3330 to the appearance position on the right side in front view. In this state, most of the frame-shaped back left movable decorative body 3320 located directly behind the back left fixed decorative body 3310 is located on the right side of the back left fixed decorative body 3310 in a front view within the frame of the center role 2500. And is visible from the player side (see FIG. 136). In this state, when a predetermined effect image is displayed in an area corresponding to the inside of the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320 on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 disposed at the rear, it is possible for the player to It is possible to give an illusion that the effect image is displayed in the frame of the back left movable decorative body 3320. As shown in the drawing, the back left movable decorative body 3320 has the same size and the same decoration as the back lower back first decorative body 3110 in the back lower movable effect unit 3100, so that the back left movable can be used. When the decorative body 3320 appears, the illusion that another liquid crystal display device appears on the left side so as to form a pair with the first decorative body 3110 (sub-liquid crystal display device 3114) behind the right rear side is movable, and the back left movable. The effect image displayed on each of the decorative body 3320 and the back lower first decorative body 3110 can be greatly enjoyed.

  Further, as an effect using the rear upper middle movable effect unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000, the rear upper middle rotation unit 3460 is moved in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the rear upper middle drive unit 3443 of the rear upper middle drive unit 3440. , The back upper middle decoration unit 3410 attached to the end thereof is positioned at the lower end, and the back upper middle decoration unit is driven by the back upper middle third drive motor 3463 of the back upper middle rotation unit 3460. 3410 is rotated to a pivot end in a counterclockwise direction. In this state, the center of the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 is positioned substantially at the center within the frame of the center role 2500 in front view, and the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 extends diagonally with its right end raised. 137 (FIG. 137). As a result, the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 located above the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 descends to the center position while rotating, and the movement causes the back upper middle decoration body to move. Attention can be paid to the unit 3410, and by moving the back upper middle decoration unit 3410 in a form reminiscent of the "thousand-point stick" of "Mahjong", it is thought that there is something good, and expectations for the game are raised. The feeling can be enhanced.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 137, the back upper middle decoration body unit 3410 is closed by the back upper middle first drive motor 3420 from the state where it is positioned at the lower end and extends obliquely. A pair of back upper middle decorations 3411 are slid in directions away from each other to bring them into an intermediate open state. In this state, as shown in FIG. 138, the center decorative portion 3412 a and the four center horizontal decorative portions 3412 b of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 are located between the pair of back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411. Since the player faces the front, he can remind the player of the "5,000-point stick" of "Mahjong", and it seems that the possibility of the "big hit game" has increased. The feeling can be further enhanced.

  When the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 is further slid from the state of FIG. 138 by the first upper back drive motor 3420 in the direction in which the pair of back upper middle decorative bodies 3411 are separated from each other, as shown in FIG. The middle decoration part 3412a, the center horizontal decoration part 3412b, the middle decoration part 3412c, and the end decoration part 3412d of the back upper middle second decorative body 3412 all face forward from between the back upper middle first decorative bodies 3411. The player will be able to remind the player of the "Mahjong" "ten thousand sticks" and be convinced that the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" Is possible, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  In addition, as an effect using the back lower front movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back lower front first decorative body 3510 is hinged to the front of the lower back front second decorative body 3520 and is folded. Then, the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is raised from the lower end position to the upper end position by the rear lower second drive motor 3552 of the lifting unit 3502. In a state where the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned at the rising end by the elevating unit 3502, substantially the entire back lower front decorative body unit 3501 is positioned within the frame of the center role 2500 in front view, and The decoration of the first front decorative member 3511 of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 can be viewed well from the user side (see FIG. 140). As a result, the lower back front first decorative body 3510 rises from below to cover the lower front part of the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, so that it is possible to make the player suggest that a chance has come, and the expectation for the game can be increased. Can be raised. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first front decorative member 3511 of the back lower front first decorative body 3511 has a decoration in which a plurality of “majong” “tiles” are arranged. Since the front decorative member 3511 is raised and becomes visible, it is possible to entertain and enjoy the illusion that the player has arranged his or her tiles.

  Then, with the lower back front decorative body unit 3501 raised to the position of the rising end by the lifting unit 3502, the lower back front first drive motor 3528 of the lower back front second decorative body 3520 (decorative body lifting mechanism 3501A). By rotating the hinge with respect to the axis extending left and right so that the lower back front first decorative body 3510 rises and positioning it above the back lower front second decorative body 3520, the lower back front which has not been seen before can be obtained. The upper part of the second decorative member 3521 of the second decorative body 3520 and the first back decorative member of the lower back front first decorative body 3510 are vertically arranged. In this state, when viewed from the front, substantially the lower half of the inside of the frame of the center role 2500 (the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600) is closed with the lower back front first decorative body 3510 and the lower back front second decorative body 3520. In this state, the decoration of the first back decoration member 3512 and the decoration of the second decoration member 3521 are united to form one large decoration (decoration of the character “Wait”) (FIG. 141). See). As a result, the first front decorative member 3511 on which a plurality of “Mahjong tiles” are decorated side by side is hinged about an axis extending left and right, and the character “Wayo” means “finish”. Can be convinced that the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected for the player is a "big hit", and the player is more interested in the occurrence of the "big hit game". Can be increased.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the gaming machine 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during a game based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 or an upper liquid crystal display based on a command from the peripheral control unit 1511. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the display of the effect image on the device 244 or the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 for controlling payout of game balls and the like, and a launch control unit 953 for controlling launch of game balls by rotating the handle lever 504.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor which is not shown in detail but is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. An MPU, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids The circuit includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 2104 for detecting a game ball received in the first starting port 2002, and a second starting port sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second starting port 2004. 2551, a general winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2547 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate section 2003, and detecting a gaming ball received in the first winning opening 2005 The first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second big winning opening 2006a as the second big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening sensor 2554 for detecting the game ball received in the second lower winning opening 2006b. Detection signals from the second lower winning a prize mouth sensor 2557, a magnetic detection sensor for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like are respectively controlled by the main control I / O. It is input via the port.

  The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the starting port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker solenoid 25553 and a drive signal to the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and a first special symbol display, a second special symbol display, and a first special symbol memory display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port. , A second special symbol storage display, a normal symbol display, a normal symbol storage display, a game status display, a round display, and the like, and a drive signal is output.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor. The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, Also, the detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2547 frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the first opening sensor 2104, the second opening sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (eg, "big hit" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball frequently enters. The detection of a game ball by the first special winning opening sensor 2114, the second special winning opening sensor 2554, and the second special winning opening sensor 2557 frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are also used for the first special winning opening sensor 2114, the second special winning opening sensor 2554, and the second special winning opening sensor 2557. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not frequently occur. Therefore, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3015.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The information is transmitted to the control unit 1511. The main control MPU receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511, as will be described in detail later.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board in a power supply board box 930, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. ). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
A payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls and the like is not shown in detail, but performs a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, a firing control by a firing solenoid 682, and a ball by a ball feed solenoid 551. A launch control unit 953 for performing feed control, an error LED display for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a ball release switch for discharging the game balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 to start a ball removal operation.

[6-2a. Dispensing control section]
A payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 951 is not shown in detail, but is a microcontroller that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM as well as a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to a game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via a payout control I / O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the CPU through the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, the ball exhaustion detection sensor 827, Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

  Detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to a payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via a payout control I / O port. You.

  Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port and indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls actually paid out is output to an external terminal board via a payout control I / O port. This external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following are the contents displayed and notified by the error LED display. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Is notified that the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it is "ball watching" (specifically, the blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blade 839 and the game ball engage with each other in the payout passages 381d and 382d of the payout device 830, and the payout blade 839 is difficult to rotate. Is displayed Indicates that "counter switch error" (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the number "5" is displayed. Indicates that the retry error has occurred (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, indicates “full”. (Specifically, the game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 are full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number “7” is displayed. When the number is "9" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (that is, the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit). It has informed the message indicating "stock" (specifically, that has reached yet the number sphere ball speed is predetermined for the game ball is not paid out).

  A ball lending request signal for a game ball from the ball lending button 332 and a return request signal for a prepaid card from the return button 333 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Is done. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of the lent game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit 334. This signal is displayed on the display unit. 334 is entered and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
Although not shown in detail, a firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 551 is a firing control input to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input. Circuit, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on the clock signal, and a firing reference pulse And a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 551 based on a firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 5a, and outputs the generated reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball feeding reference pulse, which is obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number, is generated and output to a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

  Regarding the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop for detecting whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. After the detection signal from the button is input to the firing control input circuit, it is input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal, and is input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  This firing solenoid drive circuit receives a firing reference pulse based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507 and inputs a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle lever 504. As a result, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball-feeding solenoid 551 in response to the input of the ball-feeding reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to drop. When one ball is received in the feeding unit 540 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to send the received game ball to the hitting ball firing device 680 side. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 682 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

  The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. With this capacitor, the dispensing control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the dispensing control board 951 in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 142, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on the control data from the peripheral control section 1511. , A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although not shown in detail, a peripheral control unit 1511 for performing effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. And a sound ROM storing sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on the various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided. A game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043, or the game board. The game board-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game device 5 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043, Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a vibration device 242 and a door lower right drive motor 272 provided on the frame 3, and various components of the door frame 3. A door-side drive light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation light-up signal to a color LED or the like provided on the board; Control data (display command) indicating a screen transmitted from the port to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal display control unit. In addition to transmitting the control signal to the sound source 1512, the control unit 1510 outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via an effect drive board 3043 mounted on the rear surface of the back box. . Further, detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and based on the operation signal, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 Monitors operation.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs music and music adapted to various effects from speakers 921 and the like provided on the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sound effects and the like flow. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume that protrudes backward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is stored. In the present embodiment, a plurality of speakers on the side of the door frame 3 and a low-range speaker 921 of the main body frame 4 are provided with acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or , 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU. A diagnosis is made as to whether or not the own system is running away by using the WDT together.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) bits per second (hereinafter, referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, the movable body driving command, and a plurality of commands different from the display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect driving board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

  The effect driving board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 or receives the game board side lighting / blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decoration board provided in the game board 5.

  The effect driving board 3043 transmits a driving signal based on the received driving command to the vibration device 242 and the door lower right driving motor 272 provided on the door frame 3, and the respective driving motors provided on the game board 5. Or output to

[6-4. Effect display control section]
Next, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but is not illustrated as a microprocessor. A display control MPU, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, a VDP (Video Display Processor) for controlling display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and a main liquid crystal display. An image ROM for storing various data of a screen displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM for transferring and copying various data stored in the image ROM And

  The display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display 1600, The drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is performed. If the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. The display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs an interrupt process when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511. And a plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) corresponding thereto. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in a time-series manner, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. Have been. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured such that when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM, the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order is arranged in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data is used to transfer screen data to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of schedule data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance. The order of transferring data is specified.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and extracts the sprite data from the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate. The drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. When the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 do not receive screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. I do. The VDP adopts a line buffer method. The “line buffer method” means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer, and the line buffer stores the data. In this method, the held drawing data for one line is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244.

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and This affects the speed of drawing on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data which is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in a compressed state in the image ROM.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display 1600 and the upper liquid crystal display 244. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper liquid crystal display device 244, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting a background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a position arranged on the screen and in a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite overlapping order”), and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device are set. 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

  In addition, the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular regions each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character. In the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of six sprite characters arranged in a horizontal 2 × vertical 3 or the like are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be represented using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 sequentially set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front. And a sub-scan which repeats a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction. The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 receive one line of drawing data output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and perform main scanning as the main liquid crystal display device 1600. When viewed from the front of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 or the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the output is sequentially performed from left to right to pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line immediately below as sub scanning, and similarly, drawing data for the next line is input. Then, one line is sequentially read from left to right as viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 as main scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. Output to each pixel.

[7. Game content]
Next, the game contents of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 81, FIG. 87, FIG. 92, FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the more the ball is rotated clockwise, the stronger it can be hit. That is, game balls can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and the game ball is inserted into the obstacle nail. By the contact, the flowing speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nails, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500 to the left in front view from the highest portion, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) , And flows down the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center role 2500, the game ball passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to a stage 2530 through a guide path 2523 from a warp outlet 2522 opened in the frame of 2500.

  The game ball supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and the center guiding portion 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or the side guiding portions 2532 at the left and right thereof. Is emitted backward from any of the above. When the game ball is released from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the game released from the central guiding portion 2531 because the central guiding portion 2531 is located immediately above the first starting port 2002. The ball is accepted in the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When game balls are received in the first opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guiding portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. There is a possibility that the game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the first big winning port 2005 in the open state, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2302 of the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening of the lower side unit 2200 There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the first starting port 2001 or the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. You.

  On the other hand, the game ball hit into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters on the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center role 2500 (struck). ), And enters the upper right circulation space 2541 of the right hitting game area 2540. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the upper right circulation space 2541, and a game ball abuts on the obstacle nail and circulates while changing its flowing direction in various ways. In the upper right circulation space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at an upper portion, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting port 2004 which is normally closed by a second starting port door member 2549 are provided at a lower portion.

  The game ball flowing down in the upper right circulation space 2541 enters the lower right circulation space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side. The game ball that has entered the lower right circulation space 2543 is a second upper winning opening that closes a second upper winning opening 2006a and a second lower winning opening 2006b arranged side by side as a second winning opening 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower winning opening door member 2555 pass through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and from the left end of the lower left emission plate portion 2559 in front view into the game area 5a. Released. The downstream end (discharge plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball is directed to the first big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and when the first big winning opening 2005 is in the open state. When the game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is received in the first winning port 2005 with a high probability.

  The game balls flowing through the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right flow space 2543 flow down while the increase in the flow speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, in the lower right circulation space 2543, the game ball may enter the discharge passage 2543b branched near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a. It is discharged out of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned inside.

  When a game ball hitting right and entering the upper right circulation space 2541 passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, the ordinary random number updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310 , One ordinary random number is acquired, and the acquired ordinary random number is compared with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table to perform an ordinary lottery. If the normal lottery result of this normal lottery becomes “normal hit” when the time-saving control described below is not executed, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates once in the counterclockwise direction in front view and the second The starting port 2004 is opened, and game balls can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time reduction control is executed, the lottery is performed to determine which of the “normal hit”, “second normal hit”, “second normal hit”, and “third normal hit” in the normal lottery. Then, if the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is any of “first normal hit”, “second normal hit”, or “third normal hit” when the time saving control is executed, the second start-up door member 2549 is activated. After turning in the counterclockwise direction to open the second starting port 2004 in a front view, a state in which game balls can be received in the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period is set, and then the front view is performed. A predetermined number of times of opening / closing control (5 in this example) in which the second starting port 2004 is closed by rotating in the counterclockwise direction to make it impossible to receive game balls in the second starting port 2004. Times). When the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is “first normal hit”, “0.3 seconds” is set as each of the five times in which the second starting port 2004 is in a state in which game balls can be accepted. , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "second normal hit" “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “1.1 seconds”, and “0.28 seconds” as five periods during which the second starting port 2004 is ready to accept game balls. , "0.3 seconds", and when the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "third ordinary hit", the second starting port 2004 is set to a state in which game balls can be received. The periods are “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “1.1 seconds”, and “second normal hit” and “third normal”. Ri "In advantageous to the player than the" first normal per "has become a (acceptance of game balls to the second start-up port 2004 is easy) Atari. When a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. You.

  In the present embodiment, in the variation display of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passing of the game ball through the gate section 2003, the ordinary symbol is displayed after the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started. A certain amount of time is set before the stop display (until the normal lottery result is suggested) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). In the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 is rotated to be in an open state after a lapse of the normal fluctuation time. During execution of the time-saving control described later, control for reducing the normal fluctuation time is executed as compared with the normal time (a state in which the time-saving control is not executed). In addition, the opening time in which the second starting port door member 2549 is rotated to open the second starting port 2004 may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, time reduction control is executed. When there is no time saving control, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

  In addition, during the period from when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 to when the normal symbol fluctuated and displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped (until the normal lottery result is suggested), a new game ball is added to the gate unit. After passing through 2003, since the normal symbol display cannot start a new variable display of the normal symbol, the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is continued until the previous variable display of the normal symbol is completed (the normal lottery result is displayed). (Until the suggestion ends). Specifically, the ordinary random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 is stored, and a state in which the variation display of the ordinary symbol can be started. Until the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is held until. Note that the number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is up to four, and for more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being retained. . This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the pachinko machine 1 is updated with a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. By obtaining one first special random number from one special random number and comparing the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit" , "Small hit", etc.), a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed. Then, based on the lottery result of the first special lottery, eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined variation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the first special lottery result is obtained. (Indicating the first special symbol after the variable display of the first special symbol and then displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the first special lottery result) to indicate the first special lottery result to the player. In addition, the first special lottery result, which is drawn by accepting a game ball in the first starting port 2002, includes “out”, “small hit”, “2R sure change big hit”, “8R certain change big hit”, “8R normal”. There is a "big hit" and a "10R probability variable big hit", and the acquired first special random number is compared with the big hit determination table to determine which of them is the normal random number. In this example, a probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as a probable change state)) in which the probability of winning a jackpot (winning probability) is improved more than the probability of winning a jackpot with a probability of about 1/395: in this example, about 1/44 Is executed (whether a big hit is won with a probability of) or not (whether or not a big change is a big hit), and a time-saving control (time-saving state) for shortening the fluctuating time shorter than usual when at least the first special lottery result is out of order is executed. Whether to do Time reduction big hit or not) and the period for executing the time-shortening control: the (time-reduction times special symbol (number of times of the change in the first special punching pattern and the second special symbol)), so that also is determined. Note that the winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

  Further, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in the predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310 is selected. The second special random number is obtained, and the obtained second special random number is compared with a predetermined big hit determination table to obtain an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "small hit", etc. ) Is generated. Then, based on the lottery result of the second special lottery, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined variation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the second special lottery result is obtained. (A stop symbol corresponding to the second special lottery result is displayed after variably displaying the second special symbol) to indicate to the player the second special lottery result. In addition, the second special lottery result, which is drawn when a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, includes “out”, “2R certain variable hit”, “2R normal large hit”, “4R certain variable hit”, “5R”. There are "variable big hit", "6R big variable", "7R big variable", "8R big big", "16R big big 1", "16R big big 2", "16R big big 3" By comparing the random number with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which one of them is larger than the normal hit (low probability state: in this example, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/395) after the jackpot game. Probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as probability change state): in this example, a jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) to improve the probability of winning a jackpot (winning probability) is executed or not (probability change). Jackpot? ) And whether or not to execute the time-saving control (time-saving state) for shortening the fluctuation time more than usual when at least the second special lottery result is out (whether or not a time-saving big hit) and a period for executing the time-saving control ( The number of times saved: a special symbol (the number of times the first special hit symbol and the second special symbol change) is also determined.

  When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After the elapse of the predetermined fluctuation time, the eight LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are displayed in a lighting mode according to the special lottery result, and thereafter the first big winning opening Either 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is in a state where game balls can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 while the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is in the open state, the payout device is provided by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. From 830, a predetermined number (in this example, 11 when a game ball is received in the first big winning opening 2005, or 15 when a game ball is received in the second big winning opening 2006) The ball is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first and second special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are capable of accepting game balls, the first and second special winning openings 2005 and 2006 allow game balls to be received. The ball can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  If the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit (2R probability variable big hit, 2R normal big hit)", the first big winning opening 2005 is played for a predetermined time (0.6 seconds in this example). Is repeated a plurality of times (twice in this example) for a predetermined period of time (2.0 seconds in this example) and then a closed state in which game balls cannot be received for a predetermined period of time (2.0 seconds in this example). That is, when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit (2R probability variable hit, 2R normal big hit)”, the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened for a short time to play the first big winning opening 2005 A ball is made difficult to receive, and an advantageous game state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball is generated.

  On the other hand, the special lottery results are "4R probable big hit", "5R probable big hit", "6R probable big hit", "7R probable big hit", "8R big hit (8R probable big hit, 8R normal big hit)", "10R probable big hit", In the case of “16R probability change big hit 1”, the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is set for a predetermined time (29 seconds in this example) or the predetermined number for the first special winning opening 2005. An open state in which (in this example, seven) game balls are accepted or a predetermined number (in this example, ten) of game balls are accepted in the second special winning opening 2006 is accepted. After that, the first special winning opening 2005 is closed for a predetermined period of time (2.0 seconds in this example) in which game balls cannot be received, or the second special winning opening 2006 is set for a predetermined time (in this example, 1.0 seconds) Closing pattern to unacceptable closed state (referred to as 1 round single opening pattern) is repeated a predetermined number of times (the predetermined number of rounds). For example, "4R probable big hit" is repeated 4 times (4 rounds), "5R probable big hit" is 5 times (5 rounds), and "16R probable big hit 1" is 16 times (16 rounds). Thus, an advantageous game state (in this case, a big hit) advantageous to the player is generated. That is, the special lottery results are "4R probable big hit", "5R probable big hit", "6R probable big hit", "7R probable big hit", "8R big hit (8R probable big hit, 8R normal big hit)", "10R probable big hit", In the case of "16R probability change big hit 1", the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are controlled to be opened for a long time, so that game balls can be received in the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. This makes it easier to generate a big hit in which a prize ball can be acquired, so that the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls in a short period of time.

  When the special lottery result is “16R probability change big hit 2”, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for a predetermined time (in this example, 0.6 seconds) to be able to accept the game ball, and then the predetermined time The control for closing the game ball in a non-acceptable closed state is repeated a plurality of times (six times in this example) over (in this example, 2.0 seconds), or is predetermined in the second special winning opening 2006. The opening / closing pattern executed until the number (10 in this example) of game balls is accepted is repeated 16 times (over 16 rounds). In the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “16R probable big hit 2”, first, the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close at a timing when one game ball can be received in the second big winning opening 2006. Thereafter, the process of controlling the opening and closing of the second special winning opening 2006 at the timing when two game balls can be received in the second special winning opening 2006 is repeated five times. That is, when the special lottery result is “16R probability change big hit 2”, the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time a plurality of times in one round, but the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled. A big hit that can accept a game ball and obtain a prize ball is generated. Therefore, when the special lottery result is “16R probability change big hit 2”, it becomes possible to receive 11 game balls in excess of 10 that can be accepted into the second big winning opening 2006 in one round, After opening the two major winning openings 2006 for a predetermined time (29 seconds in this example) or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls, the game balls can be received. The “16R probability change big hit 1” that repeats a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds) of opening and closing a pattern in which the second special winning opening 2006 is set to a closed state in which game balls cannot be accepted for a predetermined time (1.0 second in this example). It is also possible to obtain a large number of prize balls (by obtaining 15 prize balls per round, it is possible to obtain a maximum of 240 more prize balls than "16R probable big hit 1") it can). As described above, in this example, even when the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time, not only can a larger number of prize balls be obtained than the number of game balls hit, but a large amount of prize balls can be obtained in a short period of time. Can be obtained, so that even in the case of a big hit in which the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short period of time, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, as described above, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b of the second winning opening 2006 have left and right widths within a range of 3 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. As well as being formed, the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b are respectively controlled to be opened 2.0 seconds after being closed, so that the left and right directions in the upper part of the center role 2500 are formed. A game ball that has entered the second upper winning opening 2006a while the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b are closed by being driven to the right in front view from the center is the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b. Before both the upper winning prize opening 2006a and the second lower winning prize opening 2006b finish rolling, the second upper winning prize opening 2006a and the second lower winning prize opening 2006b can be controlled to the open state, whereby the second Winners' Prize 2006a and Second Lower It can be ball entrance to the second on special winning opening the special winning hole 2006a on all second entry the game balls onto 2006a and the second lower special winning opening inside 2006b in a closed state of the winning openings 2006b. Further, in this example, the period from when the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b are closed to when the second upper winning opening 2006b is opened is set to 2.0 seconds, so that the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second upper winning opening 2006b are set. The second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b can be changed from the closed state to the open state in a state where the game ball has entered each of the second lower winning opening 2006b. Thus, although the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time, it is possible to realize the entry of two game balls per round. The period from when the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b are closed to when they are opened is not limited to the above-mentioned 2.0 seconds, and at least 8 rounds of the jackpot game are performed. After the game is started (until the game ball accepted in the second winning opening 2006 in the 16th round is fired), the game ball is continuously driven into the second attacker passage 2543a by the ball firing device 680 intermittently. In such a case, the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b are closed from the closed state with the game ball entering each of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b. What is necessary is just to set it as the period which can be set to an open state.

  In the above-described example, when the special lottery result is “16R probable big hit 2”, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for a predetermined time (0.6 seconds in this example) to be able to receive a game ball. After that, for a predetermined period of time (2.0 seconds in this example), the control for closing the game balls in a non-acceptable closed state is repeatedly performed a plurality of times (six times in this example), or the control goes to the second special winning opening 2006. The opening / closing pattern is executed until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are accepted. However, the second opening / closing pattern is executed so that more than 10 game balls can be entered. The present invention is not limited to this as long as it controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening 2006, and may be performed by providing a plurality of intervals for short-time opening control, or by executing a combination of long-time opening control and short-time opening control. Is also feasible. For example, the second large winning opening 2006 is set to an open state in which game balls can be received for 0.6 seconds, and then a closed state in which game balls cannot be received for 2.0 seconds. The two-prize-winning control for enabling the two-prize-winning opening 2006 to be accepted and the opening of the second-prize-winning opening 2006 for accepting the game ball for 0.6 seconds, and then the game ball is opened for 1.0 second. A single winning control for allowing one game ball to be accepted to the second special winning opening 2006 as an unacceptable closed state is executed in combination in one round (for example, less than nine in the second special winning opening 2006). Is executed only once in a state in which only one game ball has entered, and in other cases, two pieces of winning control are executed), whereby a predetermined maximum number of 10 in one round is achieved. Second big prize mouth so that you can enter more than 11 game balls 006 may be controlled to open and close, or after the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds), or nine game balls are received in the second special winning opening 2006. After that, the second special winning opening 2006 is set to a closed state in which game balls cannot be received for 2.0 seconds, and then the second special winning opening 2006 is set to an open state capable of receiving game balls for 0.6 seconds. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) 16 times (over 16 rounds), 11 pieces exceeding the predetermined maximum number of 10 pieces in one round are obtained. The opening and closing of the second special winning opening 2006 may be controlled so that a game ball can enter.

  Also, the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b and the second lower special winning opening 2006b are closed within a period from the closing state to the opening state. A wing-on-rolling sensor capable of detecting a rolling game ball may be provided. In this case, the detection by the wing-on-rolling sensor and the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening are provided. An effect corresponding to the number of game balls that can enter the second big winning opening 2006 predicted from the timing of opening the 2006b may be executed.

  When the special lottery result is "16R probability change big hit 3", the second large winning opening 2006 is played for a predetermined time (29 seconds in this example) or a predetermined number (10 in this example). An opening / closing pattern in which the second special winning opening 2006 is closed for a predetermined period of time (1.0 second in this example) so that the game balls cannot be received after the game balls are set to the open state in which the game balls can be received until the ball is received. Is repeated seven times (seven rounds), and the second special winning opening 2006 is played for a predetermined time (29 seconds in this example) or until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are accepted. After the ball is placed in an open state in which the ball can be accepted (after executing eight rounds), the second special winning opening 2006 is set in a closed state in which the game ball cannot be accepted for a predetermined time (2.0 seconds in this example). , Then the second special winning opening 2006 at the prescribed time An opening / closing pattern of a closed state in which game balls cannot be accepted for a predetermined period of time (2.0 seconds in this example) after a game ball is opened for 0.6 seconds in this example and a game ball can be accepted for 0.6 seconds in this example. Repeat 8 times (over the remaining 8 rounds). In the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “16R probable big hit 3”, the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened and closed at a timing when two game balls can be received in the second big winning opening 2006. It has become. In other words, as in the case of the special lottery result of “16R probable big hit 1” in the first eight rounds of the 16 rounds, it is easy to obtain the prize ball by opening the second big winning opening 2006 for a long time. In addition to the control of opening and closing the second special winning opening 2006 only once in one of the remaining eight rounds, a game ball is received in the second special winning opening 2006 and a prize ball is received. A big hit that can be obtained.

  As described above, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit (2R certain variable big hit, 2R normal big hit)” ), It is practically difficult to allow game balls to enter the first grand prize entrance 2005, and prize balls cannot be expected to be obtained. On the other hand, special lottery results are "4R probable big hit", "5R probable big hit", "6R probable big hit", "7R probable big hit", "8R big hit (8R probable big hit, 8R normal big hit)", "10R probable big hit" ", The opening / closing pattern executed in the case of" 16R probability change big hit 1 "(the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time, or the first big winning opening 2005 is determined in advance. Either the number (in this example, 7) of game balls is accepted, or the predetermined number (in this example, 10) of game balls is accepted in the second special winning opening 2006. When the condition is satisfied, in the opening / closing pattern in which the game ball cannot be accepted and closed, it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006, and the prize ball is acquired. Is possible You have me.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the second special winning opening 2006 is composed of a second upper special winning opening 2006a and a second lower special winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second special winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of "big hit", almost all of the game balls flowing down in the second attacker passage 2543a by right-handing can be received in the second big winning opening 2006. For example, after the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b are opened and game balls can be accepted, the condition for disabling the reception (control of opening the second large winning opening 2006 for a long time) Or the predetermined number (in this example, 10) of game balls is accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006 (or closed) (closed state), and the game can be accepted next. Even if the game ball passes over the second upper winning opening 2006a until (becomes open) (during the interval), the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening again. 2006b so that game balls can be received by opening the second upper special winning opening 2006b during the closed state by allowing the second lower special winning opening 2006b. Has become.

  In addition, the special lottery results are "4R probable big hit", "5R probable big hit", "6R probable big hit", "7R probable big hit", "8R big hit (8R probable big hit, 8R normal big hit)", "10R probable big hit", In the case of “16R probability change big hit 1” and “16R probability change big hit 3 first 8 rounds”, the interval from the time when the second big winning opening 2006 is closed to the time when it is opened again is 1.0 second. The game balls flowing down in the second attacker passage 2543a by hitting are prevented from increasing in circulation speed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. A game ball may pass through the second upper winning opening 2006a or reach between the second lower winning opening 2006b or between the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b. Sex is low, so that the game ball flowing down the inside of second attacker passage 2543a by right-handed is received in substantially all the second on special winning opening 2006a.

  On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is “16R probable big hit 2” or “16R probable big hit 3 in the second half 8 rounds”, the interval from when the second big winning opening 2006 is closed to when it is opened again is 2.0. Since the second special winning opening 2006 is closed and before the second special winning opening 2006 is opened again, it passes over the second upper special winning opening 2006a and then on the second lower special winning opening 2006b or the second upper winning opening 2006b. There is a high possibility that the game ball will reach between the special winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b. That is, when the second special winning opening 2006 is again opened, almost all the game balls flowing down in the second attacker 2543a by right-handing are received in the second lower special winning opening 2006b. Note that, as described above, in the present example, the game ball is shot at an interval of 0.6 seconds when the handle lever 504 is rotated rightward with a large amount of rotation, so that the second large winning opening 2006 is closed and then opened again. Game balls that pass through the second upper winning opening 2006a during the second upper winning opening 2006b or between the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b. Is highly likely to reach the second upper special winning opening 2006a or the vicinity of the second upper special winning opening 2006a. For this reason, the second half of the above-mentioned "16R probability change big hit 2" and "16R probability change big hit 3" which executes short-time opening control in which the interval from the time when the second big winning opening 2006 is closed to the time when it is opened again is 2.0 seconds. In “8 rounds”, one game ball can enter each of the second upper special winning opening 2006a and the second lower special winning opening 2006b in one round.

  In the above example, in the case of the "big hit" in which the second big winning opening 2006 is used, the opening control of both the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b in one round is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when executing an opening / closing pattern in which at least the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long period of time, the second big winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006a are formed in one round. Only one of the winning openings 2006b may be controlled to be opened. In this case, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b are alternately opened and controlled in each round. Is also good. For example, the special lottery results are "4R probable big hit", "5R probable big hit", "6R probable big hit", "7R probable big hit", "8R big hit (8R probable big hit, 8R normal big hit)", "10R probable big hit", In the case of “16R probable big hit 1” and “16R probable big hit 3 first 8 rounds”, in the first round (1R), the second upper grand prize opening 2006a is opened and game balls can be received and cannot be received. The second round (2R) in which the second lower big winning opening 2006b is opened and the game ball can be accepted may be started while the closed state is satisfied by satisfying the condition. By opening and closing the second upper winning prize opening 2006a and the second lower winning prize opening 2006b alternately until a predetermined number of rounds are exhausted in this way, in the second attacker passage 2543a, the "big hit" during the "big hit" Since one of the winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b is always in a state in which the game ball can be received, when the player hits right in this state to distribute the game ball in the second attacker passage 2543a. That is, the game ball is always accepted in the second big winning opening 2006, so that the player can enjoy the game without losing the game ball.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for some of the above-described types of jackpots, whether to execute the above-mentioned time-saving control after the end of the jackpot game is made different depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. For example, when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal big hit in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big hit game in the non-time saving state (a state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal big hit in the time saving state (a state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. When the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big hit game in the non-time saving state (a state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit in the time saving state (a state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. In a low probability non-time saving state (a state in which both the probability improvement control and the time reduction control are not executed: also referred to as a normal state), the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game. If it is a 2R probability change big hit, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, in the state where the probability improvement control is being executed or the time saving control is being executed, that is, in a state other than the normal state, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game. If it is a big hit, the time saving control is executed after the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display executed by the first special symbol display when the game ball is received into the first starting port 2002 and the game ball is received into the second starting port 2004 are displayed. The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol which is fluctuated and displayed on the first special symbol display by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 is stopped and displayed (until the first special lottery result is suggested), and Until the second special symbol displayed fluctuated on the second special symbol display is stopped and displayed by the reception of the game ball into the second starting port 2004 (until the second special lottery result is suggested), the first start is performed. When a new game ball is received in the mouth 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display starts to newly display the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Since it is not possible to change the display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) until the change display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) ends (first special lottery Until the results and suggestions for the second special lottery result are completed. ) Is set to be pending. Specifically, the first special opening random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 by the first starting opening sensor 2104, and the second starting opening sensor 2551 And the second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted by the second starting port 2004 by the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol). The change display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of symbols can be started. Note that the number of retained first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is up to four each, and for more than four games, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations. The first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are digested with priority given to the second special random number. That is, regardless of the timing at which game balls are accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the variation display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special random number is stored. The variable display of the second special symbol is executed prior to the symbol.

  This special lottery result is indicated by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display 1600 (the sub liquid crystal display 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly turning on and off the eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) for a predetermined time. It blinks, and then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and the combination of the LEDs that are lit at the time of the stop indicates the special lottery result.

  On the other hand, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal (fluctuation pattern command, judgment result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is displayed by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative pattern rows composed of a plurality of (in this example, “1” to “9”) different patterns are arranged in a plurality of rows (for example, a left decorative pattern, a medium decorative pattern, and a right decorative pattern). In the displayed state, the decorative display of each decorative pattern row is started to be changed, and thereafter, it is sequentially stopped and displayed (in this example, left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → medium decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in this order). Finally, when all the decorative symbol columns are stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is suggested to the player side. Is to be done. In other words, a plurality of decorative symbol rows change according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) acquired at the time of the start winning prize occurrence. After being displayed, an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to indicate the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is displayed. In addition, the decorative design displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is better than the first special design variably displayed on the first special design display or the second special design variably displayed on the second special design display. In general, the player pays attention to the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 because the player can easily see it.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol row fluctuates and the determined image (The time until is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center role item 2500, the back left The middle decoration unit 3050, the back lower rear movable rendering unit 3100, the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200, the back left movable rendering unit 3300, the back upper middle movable rendering unit 3400, and the back lower front movable rendering unit 3500 are appropriately used. It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and the player can be entertained by various effects, thereby suppressing the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[8. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of a control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly, the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 143 (a) is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a control process performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment first stores the data in various registers and RAM as the process of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch is operated. Initialize the data that has been set. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. The RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed since the power was turned on. When the determination is made, the initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in the various registers and the RAM of the main control MPU.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process of storing information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU is executed. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. When the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to an initial state by executing an initialization process without executing a recovery process.

  Next, as a process of step S2, a random number which is a number updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment uses a special random number (first special symbol) to be subjected to a lottery process for a display mode when the above-mentioned special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped in variable display. Random numbers, second special random numbers), variable random numbers used in the lottery process for the variable time required for the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the variable display of the special symbols. Reach (variable display of decorative symbols executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600) (a state in which the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the same symbol and the middle decorative symbol has not been stopped and displayed, or a left, middle, and A state in which the right decorative symbol is synchronously displayed so as to be the same symbol in a fluctuating manner). A symbol random number (a first symbol random number, a second symbol random number) provided for a lottery process for determining a class, and a lottery process related to a hit at the moment of operation of the second starting port door member 2549 are provided. A random number counter for holding random numbers such as ordinary random numbers is provided.

  In this example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol use a common reach random number, that is, even if the first start port 2002 is started, the second start port 2004 is started. Even in this case, the reach random number is updated from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach random number is updated from a different counter. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second reach symbol corresponding to the reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number may be different from the first reach determination table. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different by providing a second reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) which are not involved in the random numbers among the random numbers are updated. After the processes in steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process in step S2 is basically repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

  FIG. 143 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (b), in this interrupt control, first, register save processing is performed as the processing of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, the gate sensor 2547, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, the Detection signals from various switches, such as a second-prize winning sensor 2557 and the above-described general winning sensor 3015, are input. Next, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, the random number (special random number, ordinary random number) relating to the display mode when the variable design of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol is stopped is updated from among the random numbers described above. Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this manner, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode when the special symbol variation display is stopped as the process of step S14. Execute Although the special symbol process process will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first special symbol process flag) indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is described. The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the two special symbol process flags).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes, as the process of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process related to a hit at the time of operation of the second start-up door member 2549. . In the normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the second starting port door member 2549 becomes higher within a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game except for some jackpots. (A so-called time-saving state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game, and the ordinary fluctuation time required for displaying the ordinary symbol is changed, and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is determined. , The opening time of the second starting port 2004 is extended and the number of times the second starting port 2004 is opened is increased to realize such a time-saving state.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next executes the special symbol process as the process of step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the above-described normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then outputs information such as hit information (16R probability variable hit, 10R probability variable hit, etc.) supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as a process of step S18. Perform processing.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper When the detection signals of the special winning opening sensor 2554, the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557, the general winning opening sensor 3015, and the like are in an ON state, the payout control is performed so that a prize ball corresponding to those signals is paid out to the player. The payout control command is output to the board 951. Thus, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit to the payout motor 834, and pays out a prize ball to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a storage process for checking an increase or decrease in the number of reservations as a process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the constantly operating actuator is performed (step S22), and the contents of the register are restored (step S23). When the interrupt is permitted (step S24), this control ends. Becomes

  According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process using a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be performed. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers provided for the various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 144, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first uses the first starting port sensor 2104 The first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the above random number counter on condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S31). A first opening opening passage process, such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area, is executed (step S32). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2551 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is replaced with the random number. A second starting port passage process such as acquiring from the counter and storing this in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit control for controlling the big hit game is performed. The process (Step S40) is executed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped indicates a mode that indicates “2R probable big hit”, “8R normal big hit”, and “8R probable big hit”. Based on this, the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled, and the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled based on the fact that the mode suggesting “10R probability change big hit” is obtained. Further, based on the fact that the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting “2R normal big hit”, the opening and closing of the first special winning opening 2005 is controlled and “4R The second big winning opening based on the fact that the mode suggesting the "probable big hit", "5R probable big hit", "6R probable big hit", "7R probable big hit", "8R probable big hit" and "16R probable big hit" 2006 is opened and closed. In addition, when the big hit game based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol indicating the “10R probability variable big hit” ends, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol The result of the lottery process for the display mode when the display is stopped indicates “4R probability variable hit”, “5R probability variable hit”, “6R probability variable hit”, “7R probability variable hit”, “8R probability variable hit”, “16R probability variable hit” When ending the big hit game based on the fact that it has become a mode, the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state has become a mode suggesting "8R probable big hit" When the big hit game based on the game is ended, the lottery process on the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped in a state other than the normal state When the big hit game is ended based on the result indicating that the result suggests "2R probable big hit", the time saving flag is set to execute the time saving control (control of the time saving state) until the next big hit is achieved. I do. On the other hand, when the big hit game based on the fact that the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state indicates “8R normal big hit” is ended, the big hit game is terminated. The special symbol (the first special symbol, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the second special symbol, and the second symbol) is set after the big hit game by setting "72" in the variation number counter for counting the number of variations of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). The time-saving control (control in the time-saving state) is executed until the number of changes of the two special symbols reaches 72 times. In addition, when the big hit game based on the fact that the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during the time reduction state indicates “2R normal big hit” is ended, the second special According to the lottery result, any one of “18”, “36”, “54”, and “72” is set in the variation counter and the time reduction flag is set, so that a special symbol (first special symbol, The time-saving control (time-saving state control) is executed until the number of changes of the two special symbols reaches 18, 36, 54, or 72 times, the number corresponding to the second special lottery result. In addition, a high probability flag is set when a big hit game based on a probability change big hit (2R probability change big hit, 4R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 7R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit, 10R probability change big hit, 16R probability change big hit) is ended. By doing so, the probability improvement control (control of the high probability state) is executed until the next big hit. The main control MPU controls the high-probability time-saving state if both the high-probability flag and the time-saving flag are set, and enters the high-probability non-time-saving state if only the high-probability flag is set without setting the time-saving flag. If the high-probability flag is not set and only the time-saving flag is set, the state is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state (a so-called time-saving state). If neither the high-probability flag nor the time-saving flag is set, the low-probability flag is set. Control is performed in a non-time saving state (a so-called normal state).

  On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being controlled is set (step S36). If it is set, a small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game is executed. The small hit control process is based on the fact that the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode suggesting "small hit". The first winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close.

  If neither the big hit executing flag nor the small hit executing flag is set, the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is “ On condition that it is "0" (step S37), a first special symbol process process including a lottery process relating to a display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the second special symbol is suspended. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the storage area is not “0” (step S37), the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is changed. A second special symbol process including a lottery process is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first starting port passage processing (step S32).

  Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 2104 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. 145. First, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs, as the process of step S41, the counter value of the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area. From the RAM of the main control MPU. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special first symbols is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, if it is determined that the number of reserves of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed in order to newly suspend the variable display start of the first special symbol. The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S44, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. To store.

  However, in the process of step S41, when it is determined that the reserved number of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the start of the change display of the first special symbol is not suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S42 to S44, the start of the change display of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

  Further, the main control MPU, based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S43, displays the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol as a big hit or a small hit. Whether or not to perform a reach effect as a game effect to be executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 when a big hit or a small hit does not occur, or a mode of the game effect to be executed After performing an effect pre-judgment process of judging pre-judgment information such as the type (type of the fluctuation pattern) before starting the fluctuation display according to the start winning (Step S45), the process ends.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting port passage processing (step S34).

  Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2551 is in the ON state and that the game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 146. First, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special second symbols is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S51, when it is determined that the reserved number of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly set the variable display start of the second special symbol to a suspended state. The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of the step S52, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S54, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. To be stored.

  However, in the process of step S51, when it is determined that the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is not suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the start of the change display of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-described effect pre-judgment processing (steps S45 and S55). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A) and the obtained random numbers, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, Whether or not a big hit or a small hit is obtained by comparing the random number with the variable random number. If a big hit is made, the type of the big hit is made. An effect is executed or a type of a game effect to be executed is specified (step S61).

  In the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when the first special random number is obtained in step S43 of the first starting port passage process, a high probability flag indicating that the control of the high probability state is being executed is set. If the high probability flag is not set, the high probability jackpot determination value and the first special random number are compared to determine whether or not a large hit is determined. By comparing with one special random number, it is specified whether or not a big hit is made. This high probability big hit determination value (3857-3946) is set in a high probability big hit determination table (see FIG. 152 (A)) described later and is the same random value as the big hit determination value compared with the first special random number. The low probability big hit determination value (3937-3946) is set to a low probability big hit determination table (see FIG. 152 (A)), which will be described later, and is a big hit determination value to be compared with the first special random number. They have the same random number value. Therefore, by comparing the first special random number with the pre-determination table in step S61, it is possible to accurately specify whether or not a big hit will occur, and to determine the content of the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the game effect. By specifying the type of the variation pattern indicating the period (variation time) in which the effect is executed, any one of “big hits 1 to 12” to be the big hit as the preliminary determination information, “outside” and “reach 1 to 4” not to the big hit is determined. Can be classified. In this example, as shown in FIG. 148 (B), the variation pattern, the normal reach variation pattern, the weak SP reach variation pattern, the non-specific strong variation pattern depends on the ratio of the big hit (also called the big hit expectation value or the big hit reliability). There are provided a plurality of types of variation patterns of an SP reach variation pattern and a specific strong SP reach variation pattern (exceptional jackpot variation pattern <normal reach variation pattern <weak SP reach variation pattern <strong SP reach variation pattern other than specific) <Specific strong SP reach variation pattern). Also, the ratio of the fluctuation pattern determined in the later-described fluctuation pattern setting processing (the first fluctuation pattern setting processing in step S82 and the second fluctuation pattern setting processing in the second special symbol processing processing) and executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Is inversely proportional to the big hit expected value (outlier variation pattern> normal reach variation pattern> weak SP reach variation pattern> strong SP reach variation pattern other than specific> specific strong SP reach variation pattern). That is, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the outlier variation pattern is executed relatively frequently, while the specific strong SP reach variation pattern is rarely executed.

  In the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first starting port passage process, the same random number is obtained regardless of whether the high probability flag is set. By comparing the small hit determination value set to the numerical value with the first special random number, it is also specified whether or not a small hit occurs. The small hit determination value (3800-3812) at the time of high probability or low probability is set in a large hit determination table (see FIG. 152 (A)) at the time of high probability or low probability, which will be described later, and is set as the first special random number. The random number is the same as the small hit determination value that is compared with. For this reason, by comparing the first special random number with the preliminary determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not a small hit is made, and the "big hit 9 to 12" including the small hit as the preliminary determination information is determined. Can be classified.

  In the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when the second special random number is acquired in step S53 of the second starting port passage process, a high probability flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is being executed is set. If it is set, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is determined by comparing the high probability jackpot determination value with the second special random number. If the high probability flag is not set, the low probability jackpot determination value is set. And the second special random number to determine whether or not a big hit occurs. This high probability big hit determination value (3857-3946) is set in a high probability big hit determination table (see FIG. 152 (A)) described later and is the same random value as the big hit determination value compared with the second special random number. The large-hit determination value (3937-3946) having a low probability is set in a large-hit determination table (see FIG. 152 (A)) for low-probability at a later-described time, and is used as a large-hit determination value to be compared with the second special random number. They have the same random number value. For this reason, by comparing the second special random number with the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not a big hit is to be made. It can be classified into any of "outside" and "reach 1-4".

  In this embodiment, the effect pre-judgment process executed based on the reception of the game ball in the first starting port 2002 is not executed in the time-saving state (time-saving time) in which the time-saving control is executed. I have. On the other hand, in the effect pre-judgment process executed based on the reception of the game ball in the second starting port 2004, the process is not executed in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction time) in which the time reduction control is not performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game is controlled to the non-time reduction state, only the effect pre-determination processing based on the reception of the game ball in the first starting port 2002 is executed, and the state is controlled to the time reduction state. In this case, only the effect pre-judgment process based on the game ball being accepted into the second starting port 2004 is executed.

  In the preliminary judgment table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when it is specified that a big hit is to be made by comparing the first special random number with the preliminary judgment table in step S61, a judgment value indicating which big hit is to be made. If the type of the big hit is specified by comparing the first special pattern random number and the second special random number and the prior determination table, it is determined which big hit is to be determined. The type of the big hit is specified by comparing the value with the second symbol random number. More specifically, a determination value indicating that a 2R certain-variable-variable hit is obtained by matching with the first special random number is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 152 (C)) described later and the first symbol random number is set. It is the same random number as the judgment value (0-16) indicating that it is a specific 1 big hit among the judgment values compared with, and when it matches with the first special random number, it is specified 6 8R certain variable big hit or non-specified The determination value indicating that an 8R normal jackpot of 2 is set in a symbol determination table (refer to FIG. 152 (C)) described later and specified 6 or non-specific 2 of the determination values to be compared with the first symbol random number The judgment value (17-154, 160-199) indicating a big hit is the same random number value, and the judgment value indicating a 10R certain-variable big hit of 7 when matching with the first special random number is described later. Symbol determination table (FIG. 152 ( ) Has been determined value indicating that a jackpot particular 7 of the judgment value is set to the reference) is compared with the first symbol random number (155-159) the same random number.

  Similarly, in the pre-judgment table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when it is specified in step S61 that the big special hit is determined by comparing the second special random number with the pre-judgment table, the judgment indicating which big hit is to be made If the type of the big hit is specified by comparing the value with the second symbol random number, and the big hit is specified by comparing the second special random number with the pre-judgment table, it indicates which one of the big hits is to be set. The type of the big hit is specified by comparing the judgment value with the second symbol random number. More specifically, the determination value indicating that a specific 1R 2R probability variable hit or a non-specific 1R 2R normal big hit by matching with the second special random number is a symbol determination table described later (see FIG. 152 (C)). And the same random number as the determination value (0-19, 160-199) indicating that it is a specific 1 or non-specific 1 jackpot among the determination values to be compared with the second symbol random number. A judgment value indicating that a match with the special random number results in a specific 2R 4R jackpot, a specific 3R jackpot, a specific 6R jackpot, a specific 7R jackpot, and a specific 6R jackpot. Is a determination value (20-55) indicating that a large hit of specific 2 to specific 6 among the determination values set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 152 (C)) described later and compared with the second symbol random number. And the same random value as The determination value indicating that a match with another random number results in a specific 8 (specific 8-1 to specific 8-3) 16R probability-change hit is set in a later-described symbol determination table (see FIG. 152 (C)). The random number is the same as the determination value (56-159) indicating that the specific 8 (specific 8-1 to specific 8-3) is a big hit among the determination values compared with the second symbol random number. In this example, three types of 16R probability variable jackpots, ie, specific 8-1, specific 8-2, and specific 8-3, each of which has a different opening / closing mode of the second special winning opening 2006, are provided as specific 16R probability variable jackpots. In the advance determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), the specific 8-1, the specific 8-2, and the specific 8-3 having different opening / closing modes of the second special winning opening 2006 are collectively specified as a specific 8 16R probability big hit. It is supposed to. Note that the pre-determination table may be set so that it can be specified whether it is the specified 8-1, the specified 8-2, or the specified 8-3. Thus, the effect can be executed based on a more detailed result (type of big hit).

  In the advance determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when it is specified that a big hit is to be made, a plurality of types of reach effects are determined by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. Which of the reach productions is executed to determine a jackpot is specified. Specifically, in the big hits of the specific 7 and the specific 8 (specific 8-1 to specific 8-3), the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed is determined as the determination value to be compared with the variable random number. Among the judgment values indicating the execution of the normal reach effect, the judgment value indicating the execution of the super reach effect having a low jackpot expectation (hereinafter also referred to as a weak SP reach) (5- 29) is the same random number as the judgment value indicating that a super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is to be executed among the judgment values to be compared with the variable random number, and a super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation (hereinafter, this Is also referred to as a strong SP reach), the determination value (30-216) indicating that a non-specific super reach effect (also referred to as a specific strong SP reach) is to be executed is a determination value of the determination value compared with the variable random number. The random number is the same as the judgment value indicating that a super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation other than a specific super-reach effect is to be executed, and a specific super-reach effect among the super-reach effects with a high jackpot expectation is executed. The judgment value (217-240) indicating that the super-reach effect is to be executed is the same random value as the judgment value (217-240) indicating that the super-reach effect is to be executed.

  Also, in the specific 2 to 6 or the non-specific 2 big hit, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed is the determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed among the judgment values compared with the variable random number. The judgment value (5-29) which is set to be the same random number value and indicates that the super reach effect having a low jackpot expectation is to be executed is a super reach effect having a low jackpot expectation value among the judgment values compared with the variable random number. Is determined to be the same as the judgment value indicating that the super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is to be executed, and the judgment value (30-216) indicating that a super-reach effect other than a specific super-reach effect is to be executed The same random number as the judgment value indicating that a super reach effect with a high jackpot expectation other than the specific super reach effect is executed among the judgment values to be compared, The judgment value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the super reach effects having a high degree of expectation indicates that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the judgment values compared with the variable random number. The random number is the same as the judgment value.

  Further, in the specific 1 or non-specific 1 jackpot, the determination value (0-89) indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed is the judgment value indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed among the judgment values compared with the variable random number. The judgment value (90-189), which has the same random number value and indicates that a super reach effect having a low jackpot expectation is executed, is a superreach effect having a low jackpot expectation among the judgment values compared with the variable random number. The judgment value (190-216), which is set to be the same as the judgment value indicating that the super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is to be executed except for a specific super-reach effect, is compared with the variable random number. The same random number as the judgment value indicating that a super reach effect having a high jackpot expectation other than the specific super reach effect among the judgment values is performed, The judgment value (217-240) indicating that a specific super-reach effect is to be executed among super-reach effects with a high degree of expectation of hit is that a specific super-reach effect is to be executed among judgment values that are compared with a variable random number. The random number is the same as the judgment value shown.

  For this reason, by comparing the first symbol random number or the second symbol random number with the prior determination table in step S61, and comparing the variable random number with the preliminary determination table, the type of the big hit is accurately specified, and the preliminary determination is performed. As information, "big hit 1" which is a big hit of specific 7 or 8 (specific 8-1 to specific 8-3) from normal reach, specific 7 or specific 8 (specific 8-1 to specific 8-) from weak SP reach "Big hit 2" as the big hit of 3), "Big hit 3" as the big hit of specific 7 or 8 (specific 8-1 to specific 8-3) from the strong SP reach other than the specific strong SP reach, the specific "Big hit 4" which is the big hit of specific 7 or 8 (specific 8-1 to specific 8-3) from the strong SP reach and "big hit 5" which includes the specific 2 to 6 or the non-specific 2 big hit from the normal reach , From weak SP reach "Big hit 6" including specific 2-6 or non-specific 2 jackpots, "Big hit 7" including specific 2-6 or non-specific 2 jackpots from strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach, specific "Big hit 8" that includes 2 to 6 specific or 2 non-specific jackpots from strong SP reach, "1 big hit 9" to be 1 specific or non-specific 1 jackpot from normal reach, 1 specific or non-special from weak SP reach "Big hit 10" to be a specific one big hit, "Big hit 11" to be a specific one or non-specific one big hit from a strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach, Specific one or non-specific from a certain strong SP reach It can be classified into any one of "big hit 12" which is one big hit.

  In the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), the reach is displayed when the outlier is specified and the high probability flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is being executed is set. By comparing the reach judgment value at the time of the probability change indicating that the reach is to be performed with the reach random number, it is specified whether or not to display the reach, and the high-probability flag is not set and the control in the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) is executed. If only the time-saving flag indicating that the reach is set is set, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is to be displayed is compared with the reach random number to determine whether or not to display the reach. If the probability flag and the time reduction flag are not set and it indicates that control in the normal state is being executed, the reach determination value in the normal state indicating that the reach is displayed is compared with the reach random number. Ri to determine whether or not to display the reach. The reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change is set to the same random value as the reach determination value set in the reach determination table at the time of probability change (see FIG. 152 (B)) described later and compared with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0-5) at the time is set to the same random determination value as a reach determination value to be set in a reach determination table (see FIG. 152 (B)) to be described later and to be compared with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0-6) at the time is the same random number value as the reach determination value set in the reach determination table at normal time (see FIG. 152B) described later and compared with the reach random number. . For this reason, by comparing the reach random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, if a big hit does not occur, it is accurately specified whether or not a reach effect is to be executed as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The information can be classified into any of "outside" in which reach is not displayed (reach effect is performed) as the determination information and "reach 1 to 4" in which reach is displayed (reach effect is performed).

  Note that the reach determination value (0-5) at the time reduction and the reach determination value (0-6) at the normal time include the same determination value (0) as the reach determination value (0) at the time of probable change. When the same reach determination value and the reach random number match, whether to display reach (execute reach effect) in any of the game states of probable change, reduced working hours, and normal time is classified. For this reason, by comparing the reach random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, it is determined whether the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will execute the reach effect as the game effect in the game state of probable change, time saving, or normal time. Can be identified.

  In the advance determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A), when a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on main liquid crystal display device 1600, a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and a variable random number are shown. The type of the game effect to be executed is specified by comparison. Specifically, the judgment value (0-163) indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed is set in a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later, and is a normal reach effect among the judgment values to be compared with the fluctuation random number. The determination value (164-222) indicating that a super reach effect having a low jackpot expectation is to be executed is set to the same random number value as the determination value indicating that the execution is performed. ) Is set to the same random number as the judgment value indicating that a super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is to be executed among the judgment values to be compared with the variable random number, and is specified among the super-reach effects with a high jackpot expectation value. The determination value (223-235) indicating that a non-super-reach effect other than the super-reach effect is executed is stored in a fluctuation pattern table at the time of the later-described reach (not shown). ) Is set to be the same random value as the judgment value indicating that a super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation other than the specific super-reach effect is executed among the judgment values compared with the variable random number. The judgment value (236-240) indicating that a specific super-reach effect is to be executed among the super-reach effects having a high degree of judgment is set in a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reaching, which will be described later, and is compared with a fluctuation random number. The random number value is the same as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed. For this reason, by comparing the variable random number and the prior determination table in step S61, the type of the game effect to be executed is accurately specified, and “reach 1” for executing the normal reach effect as the preliminary determination information is performed. "Reach 2" to perform a low super-reach production, "Reach 3" to perform a super-reach production with a high jackpot expectation (other than a specific super-reach production), and a super-reach production with a high jackpot expectation (a specific super-reach production) ) Can be classified into any of “reach 4”. Then, by comparing the reach random number with the advance determination table in step S61, the information can be classified into any of "reach 1" to "reach 4" as advance determination information.

  As described above, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 148 (A) and the obtained random numbers (special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number), symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), reach random numbers) (Variable random number), as a result, whether a big hit or a small hit is determined, a type of the big hit if the big hit is obtained, and a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 if the big hit or the small hit is not obtained As shown in FIG. 148 (B), as the pre-judgment information, “outside”, “big hit 1” to “big hit 12” are specified. , "Reach 1" to "Reach 4".

  Then, in the above-described effect pre-judgment processing (steps S45 and S55), the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made, if a big hit is made, if the big hit or small hit is not made) Whether or not a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or a type of the game effect to be executed, etc.) and a type of the obtained special random number (either the first special random number or the second special random number) And a pre-judgment command corresponding to the hold number (the value of the hold number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first opening passage process, the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the number of reserved special first symbols (The value of the first special reserved number counter) and the first special symbol pre-judgment command corresponding thereto (step S62). Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the starting port (first starting port 2002, second starting port) in which the start winning is generated. One of the mouths 2004), the number of holdings stored corresponding to the starting opening, and whether or not the display result of the change display of the special symbol based on the generated starting prize is a big hit or a small hit. If it is, the type of the big hit, if it does not become a big hit or a small hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the advance determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed, The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can be grasped before starting the variable display according to the start winning.

  When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, a first holding storage area for storing advance determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol, and a second storage area for storing advance determination information regarding the variable display of the second special symbol. And a pending storage area. Further, the first hold storage area and the second hold storage area each have 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of holds, and the peripheral control MPU stores the first determination information indicated by the received prior determination command in the first storage area. The data is stored sequentially from the (earliest) storage area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is received. Is stored, and a variation pattern command (the first variation pattern command that notifies the variation display start of the first special symbol and the second variation pattern command that notifies the variation display start of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol)) is stored. Upon receiving the second variation pattern command for notifying the start of the variation display, the first storage area (if the first variation pattern command has been received, the first storage in the first hold storage area) according to the received variation pattern command. If the area and the second variation pattern command have been received, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area of the second hold storage area is discarded, and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area (N = 2 to 4) is discarded. If the one variation pattern command has been received, it is stored in the N-th storage area of the first pending storage area, and if the second variation pattern command has been received, it is stored in the N-th storage area. The pre-determination information is moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) storage area (the pre-determination information stored in the reserved storage area is shifted). In addition, whether to start the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be specified by a fluctuation pattern command (whether it is the first fluctuation pattern command or the second fluctuation pattern command). ), And when it is specified to start the variation display of the first special symbol based on the reception of the first variation pattern command, the advance determination information stored in the first hold storage area is shifted. Then, when it is specified to start the variation display of the second special symbol based on the reception of the second variation pattern command, the advance determination information stored in the second holding storage area is shifted. As a result, the pre-determination information of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is stored so as to specify the order in which the suspension of the variable display start has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information. Become so.

  In this example, the random number is the same as the jackpot determination value in the pre-judgment table and the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table described later, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a value that includes only a part of the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table as the jackpot determination value of the pre-judgment table or a part of or all of the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table that differs from the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table A configuration may be made so as to include the random number value of the number, and the degree of the possibility of a big hit may be determined in the effect pre-determination processing.

  More specifically, a part of the jackpot determination value and a loss determination value different from the jackpot determination value (which may include the small hit determination value) can be distinguished as a high-probability random number group. The ratio of the jackpot determination value that can be determined as the jackpot determination value to the jackpot determination value is set higher than the ratio of the jackpot determination table in which the jackpot winning probability is determined, and random number acquisition means. Among the random numbers obtained by the means, the hit random number (first special random number, second special random number) is classified and determined as any of the above-mentioned outlier determination value and the above-mentioned big hit determination value. The value belonging to the above-mentioned high-probability random number group in which the hit random number provided for the same determination is mixed with the jackpot determination value and the loss determination value while maintaining the state of A pseudo-probability precedence determining unit that can perform a precedence determination on an expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to a jackpot winning by determining whether or not there is a prize, for each determination process that is held; Alternatively, the pseudo probability precedence determination means may determine the degree of expectation related to the jackpot winning in advance.

  The provision of the high-probability random number determination means in which the jackpot determination value and the outlier determination value are mixed as described above may result in a risk that confidential information regarding the result of the hit determination of the jackpot determination that is still on hold may be leaked. While maintaining the conventional effect structure excluding the above, the degree of expectation (pseudo winning probability) related to the hit of the jackpot according to the mixing ratio of the jackpot determination value and the loss determination value in the high-probability random number determining means is not The advance determination can be performed. For example, prior to the execution of the above jackpot determination (digestion of the determination process), a preceding determination that the hit random number provided for the jackpot determination belongs to the high-probability random number group (special hit determination value) was not made. When the judgment processing based on the random number value that is not the special hit judgment value determined in advance (the value belonging to the low-probability random number group paired with the high-probability random number group) is completed, the expectation related to the winning of the big hit when the judgment processing is completed. The degree (pseudo-winning probability) is determined to be lower than the jackpot expectation degree (winning probability) (pseudo-reduced winning probability).

  According to the preceding determination method for such a high-probability random number group, at the time when a specific determination process is suspended, the jackpot determination is maintained in an unexecuted state (suspended state). The expected degree (pseudo winning probability) can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display according to the hold exhaustion. Will be done.

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, Only the first special symbol processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. A first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which a process of determining a mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on a result of a lottery process on a display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. )
3. Lottery processing on the variation of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display based on the variable random number and the variation of the effect display performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting processing for performing such operations (step S82)
4. First special symbol change processing that waits until the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is stopped (step S83).
5. The first special symbol display mode is displayed on the first special symbol display so that the first special symbol variation control stopped mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped is displayed. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 143).

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 150, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes step S101. In the processing of (1), it is determined whether or not the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is in a suspended state based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter. As a result, when it is determined that the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is in a suspended state, the process is then stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as a process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stored. The random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the special symbol change display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with occurrence of a start winning prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the variable display start of the first special symbol has been suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the variable display start suspension is sequentially released from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

  After that, as a process of step S105, a big hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S106) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), the process ends.

  FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that if the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time reduction state, high probability non-time reduction state) (step S111), a high probability state shown in FIG. A big hit determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), a large hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 152 (A) is selected (step S113). The calculated big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  The big hit determination table shown in FIG. 152 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the gaming state is a low probability state (a normal state (low probability non-saving time state) and a time reduction state (low probability time saving state)). And a large hit determination table used when the gaming state is a high probability (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state). Then, in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability, similarly to the above-mentioned pre-determination table, the ten kinds of first special random numbers match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and the thirteen kinds of first special random numbers are small. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match a small hit determination value indicating that a win has been won and to match a loss determination value indicating that the 3924 first special random numbers indicate a loss. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, a small hit determination value is set in the low probability large hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It has not been won and won no small wins. In the big hit determination table at the time of low probability, similar to the above-mentioned pre-judgment table, the 10 kinds of second special random numbers match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and the 3937 kinds of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match a loss determination value indicating that

  Further, in the big hit determination table at the time of high probability, similarly to the above-mentioned prior determination table, 90 kinds of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability Match with the big hit determination value, match with the small hit determination value indicating that the 19 kinds of first special random numbers have won the small hit, and match the 3838 kinds of first special random numbers with the outlier determination value. One special random number is associated with each. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state), the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won is determined in the low-probability state (normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state). ) And time-saving state (low probability time-saving state)). In the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, the small hit determination value is set in the high-hit probability determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It has not been won and won no small wins. In the high probability jackpot determination table, 90 kinds of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the low probability big hit determination table are used in the same manner as the above-described prior determination table. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and match the 3857 kinds of second special random numbers with the outlier determination value indicating the outlier.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, and determines that the big hit is determined (step S115). ), A big hit flag indicating that the change has won the big hit is set, and the process is terminated (step S116), and the selected big hit determination table and the first special read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, if it is determined that the small hit has occurred (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the variation has won the small hit is set, and the process is terminated (step S118). As a result of comparing the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, When it is determined that that compares the reach random read Reach determination table and step S102 shown in FIG. 152 (B) (step S119).

  The reach determination table shown in FIG. 152 (B) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and is used when the game state is a probable change (a high-probability state (a high-probability non-reduction state, a high-probability reduction state)). Reach judgment table at the time, Reach judgment table used at the time of game time when the game state is the time reduction (low probability time reduction state), and used at the time of the game time at normal time (normal state: low probability non-time reduction state) And a normal-state reach determination table. Then, in the reach determination table at the time of the probability change, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 238 types of reach random numbers do not reach, as in the above-described advance determination table, The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that

  Also, in the reach determination table for the time reduction, similar to the above-mentioned advance determination table, reach determination indicating that six types of reach random numbers including the same reach random numbers set in the reach determination table for the probability change when the reach is reached is reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the reach determination value indicating that the reach number does not reach the 233 types of reach random numbers. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating that the vehicle reaches the reach during the time reduction (the low probability time reduction state) is higher than that during the probability change (the high probability state).

  Furthermore, in the reach determination table at the normal time, similarly to the above-mentioned pre-determination table, it is assumed that seven types of reach random numbers including the same reach random numbers as those set in the reach determination tables at the time of probable change and time reduction are reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value shown and to match the reach determination value indicating that 232 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal state (normal state), the reach determination value indicating the reach is set higher than in the probability change state (high-probability state) and the reduction in time (low-probability reduction state).

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119). Is set, and the process is terminated (step S120b).

  FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 153, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (steps S121 and S124).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 152 (C). (Step S122), the type of the big hit is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is determined (step S123).

  As shown in FIG. 152 (C), in the symbol determination table, similar to the above-mentioned prior determination table, each determination result (specific 1 2R probability variable hit, specific 2 4R probability variable hit, specific 3 5R probability variable hit, specific 4R 6R probable jackpot, 5R 7R probable jackpot, 6R 8R probable jackpot, 7R 10R probable jackpot, 1R non-specific 1R regular jackpot, 2R non-specific 2R regular jackpot and symbol random number (1st symbol) (A random number, a second symbol random number) are stored in association with each other. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of the present example, the type of the jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number, the type of the jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number, and the determination probability are set to be different.

In particular,
1. A game ball executes a 2R jackpot game in which a game ball is difficult to enter by controlling the opening of the first big winning opening 2005 for a short time, and executes a probability improvement control from the end of the 2R jackpot game to the next big hit. If the gaming state at the time of winning is a state other than the normal state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state), the specific 1R to execute the time-saving control until the next big hit is achieved Probable change jackpot 2. The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time to execute a 4R big hit game in which a game ball can enter, and after the 4R big hit game is completed, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed until the next big hit is achieved. 2. Perform both of the specific 2R probable jackpots. The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time to execute a 5R jackpot game in which game balls can enter, and after the 5R jackpot game is completed, the probability improvement control and the time reduction control are performed until the next big hit is achieved. 3. Performing both of the 3 5R probable jackpots The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time to execute a 6R big hit game in which a game ball can enter, and after the 6R big hit game is completed, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed until the next big hit is achieved. 4 specific 6R probable jackpot that performs both The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time to execute a 7R big hit game in which a game ball can enter, and after the 7R big hit game is completed, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed until the next big hit is achieved. 5. Perform both of the specific 5R probable jackpots. If the result is the first special lottery result, the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened for a long time to execute the 8R big hit game in which the game ball can enter, and after the 8R big hit game is finished, the next big hit is made. If the time-saving control is executed at the time of winning (high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state), the time-saving control is performed until the next big hit, and the second special lottery result For example, the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time to execute an 8R big hit game in which game balls can enter, and after the 8R big hit game is completed, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed until the next big hit is achieved. 6. A specific 6R probable jackpot that does both. By controlling the opening of the second big winning opening 2006 for a long time, a 10R jackpot game in which game balls can enter is executed, and after finishing the 10R jackpot game, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed until the next big hit is achieved. 7. Performing both of the 7 10R probable jackpots The second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time to execute a 16R big hit game in which game balls can enter, and after the 16R big hit game is completed, the probability improvement control and the time saving control are performed until the next big hit is achieved. Executing both the specific 8-1 16R probable jackpot 1
9. While the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time, a 16R big hit game in which a game ball can enter is executed, and after the 16R big hit game is completed, the probability improvement control and the time reduction control are performed until the next big hit is achieved. Executing both the specific 8-2 16R probable jackpot 2
10. After the opening and closing pattern in which the game ball can enter the ball is executed for eight rounds by controlling the opening of the second special winning opening 2006 for a long time, the game ball can enter while the second special winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time. A 16R jackpot game that executes both the probability improvement control and the time-saving control until the next big hit is executed after the 16R big hit game that executes the open / close pattern for eight rounds 3
11. A game ball executes a 2R jackpot game in which it is difficult to enter the ball by controlling the opening of the first big winning opening 2005 for a short time, and does not execute the probability improvement control until the next big hit is completed after the 2R jackpot game is completed. If the time saving control is executed at the time of winning (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state), the fluctuation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times after the end of the 2R jackpot game. (One of 18 times, 36 times, 54 times, 72 times) Non-specific 1R 2R normal big hit that executes time-saving control until executed The first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened for a long time to execute an 8R big hit game in which a game ball can enter, and the probability improvement control is not executed until the next big hit after finishing the 8R big hit game. If the time saving control is executed at the time of winning (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state), after the end of the 8R big hit game, the fluctuation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is displayed 72 times. Any one of the 12 types of jackpots, ie, non-specific 2R regular jackpots that execute the time-saving control until they are executed, is determined.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. In the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination values is set to be different from that in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the type of the big hit and the determination ratio are different. I have to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 152 (C), the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol includes a specific 1R 2R probability change hit, a specific 6 8R probability change hit, a specific 7R 10R change probability hit, While the distribution of the determination value is set for the specific 2R regular jackpot, the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol includes a specific 1R 2R variable jackpot, a specific 2R 4R variable jackpot, and a specific 2R specific jackpot. 3 5R probable big hit, 4 specific 6R probable big hit, 5 specific 7R probable big hit, 6 specific 8R probable big hit, 1 specific 8-1 16R probable big hit, 2 specific 8-2 16R probable big hit, 2 specific 8- The determination value distribution is set for 3 16R probability variable jackpots, 3 unspecified 2R normal jackpots.

  In this embodiment, regardless of whether the game is a big hit game in which opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled or a big hit game in which opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled, in the big hit game, the upper part of the center role 2500 is formed. A so-called right-handed game, in which a game ball is hit rightward in a front view rather than the center in the left-right direction, is performed. In the right hitting game area 2540 on the right side of the center role 2500, no obstacle nail is planted in front of the game panel 1100. Then, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened, when a game ball is hit on the right side of the center role 2500 aiming at the second big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened. The big winning opening 2006 is always won. Therefore, in the big hit game in which the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened and closed, the game ball hit into the right hitting game area 2540 is not wasted (is discharged to the outside from the out opening 1111 (2543c)). It is possible to digest a big hit game in a short time.

  On the other hand, since a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position between the right hitting game area 2540 and the first big winning opening 2005 on the front surface of the game panel 1100, the game ball is obstructed by the obstacle. By contacting the nail, the game ball is given various movements and flows down. Therefore, in the big hit game which controls opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005, even if a game ball is hit on the right side of the center role 2500 aiming at the first big winning opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2005 is formed. A game ball that does not necessarily win the first large winning opening 2005 is discharged to the outside from an out opening 1111 (2543c) provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled, the game ball is more efficient than in the first big winning opening 2005 in the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled. The player wins the second big winning opening 2006, and can finish the big hit game in a short time.

  In this example, in one round of the opening and closing control of the first special winning opening 2005, the condition for changing the first special winning opening 2005 from the open state to the closed state, and the condition for changing the opening and closing control of the second special winning opening 2006. The condition for changing the second special winning opening 2006 from the open state to the closed state in one round is different. As described above, the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are changed to the closed state when 29 seconds elapse after being controlled to the open state. When a predetermined number of game balls have been won in the first winning port 2005 or the second winning port 2006, the state is changed to the closed state. And in the big hit game which controls opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2005 is changed to a closed state based on the fact that seven game balls have won the first big winning opening 2005, In the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled, the second big winning opening 2006 is changed to a closed state based on the fact that ten game balls have won the second big winning opening 2006. In this way, in the big hit game in which the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened and closed, only a maximum of seven game balls can be made to win in the first big winning opening 2005. On the other hand, in the big hit game in which the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled, a maximum of 10 game balls are made to win in the second big winning opening 2006, and 10 big balls are won per round. Prize balls (150 in this example) for winning can be acquired, and more prize balls are acquired in the jackpot game in which the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to open and close as compared with the big hit game in which the first large winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened and closed. Can be expected.

  When the type of the big hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big hit is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when it is determined to be the specific 1R 2R jackpot, it is determined to be the first special symbol 2R jackpot symbol, and when it is determined to be the 6R 8R jackpot, the first special symbol 8R jackpot is determined. If it is determined to be a symbol, and if it is determined to be a specific 7R 10R probability big hit, it is determined to be a 10R probability variable big hit symbol of the first special symbol, and if it is determined to be a non-specific 2 8R normal big hit, it is 8R normal of the first special symbol. Determine the big hit symbol. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S124). If the small hit flag is set, the change of the first special symbol is stopped. Is determined as a small hit symbol (step S125), and if the small hit flag is not set, the first special symbol is determined to be a lost symbol as a mode at the time of stoppage of change (step S126).

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed, as a process of step S127, the lottery result (one of the type of the big hit, the small hit, the loss of the reach, and the loss is instructed (the stop symbol of the first special symbol) The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S128, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so as to proceed to the above-mentioned first variation pattern setting process (step S82), this process is ended. The peripheral control MPU controls the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped, determines from the received judgment result notification command a specific 7R 10R certain variable jackpot among the jackpots. If specified, the 10R probability variable hit symbol (combination in which all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are the first specific odd number symbol (for example, "7")) is determined, and the 16R probability variable hit 1 of the specified 8-1 is specified. In this case, the 16R probability variable jackpot is determined to be one symbol (a combination in which all of the decoration symbols on the left, middle, and right are first specific odd symbols (for example, “7”)), and the elapse of the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command At the time (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As described above, when the combination of all of the first specific odd symbols as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is changed to the specific 10R certain variable hit or the specific 8-bit. 1 16R probable big hit 1 game with the largest number of rounds in the big hit caused by each of the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, and the game to the second big winning opening 2006 It is possible to determine that the acquisition of the 10R jackpot game in which the winning of the ball is easy is confirmed. Further, the peripheral control MPU determines, as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, a specific symbol 8-2 of the 16R variable jackpot 2 and a 16R variable jackpot 2 symbol. (A combination in which all of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are second specific odd-numbered symbols (for example, “5”)) is determined, and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect). The display of the determined stop symbol is controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As described above, when the combination of all the second specific odd symbols as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops fluctuating, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is 2 for the specific 8-2 16R probability variation big hit. Thus, it can be determined that the expected value of the number of winning prize balls in the jackpot due to the second special lottery result is the highest (highly likely to obtain the most prize balls). .

  Also, when the peripheral control MPU specifies a specific 2R 4R probability variable jackpot among the jackpots from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped. Is determined to be a 4R probability variable big hit symbol (combination consisting of the same odd number symbol among the odd numbers of "1", "5", "9") Is determined to be a 5R probability variable big hit symbol (combination of the same odd number symbols among the odd number symbols of "1", "5" and "9". Common to the 4R probability variable big hit symbol) When the big hit is specified, the 6R probable big hit design (combination of the same odd design among the odd design of "1", "5" and "9". It is common to the 4R probable big hit design and the 5R probable big hit design) Decision In the case of specifying 5 7R probable jackpots among the jackpots, 7R probable jackpot symbols (combinations of the same odd symbols among the odd symbols of "1", "5" and "9". 4R probable jackpot symbols] , 5R probable jackpot symbol and 6R probable jackpot symbol) are determined, and if the specific 6R 8R probable jackpot is specified based on the second special lottery result, the 8R probable jackpot symbol ("1", A combination consisting of the same odd symbol among the odd symbols of "5" and "9", which is determined to be 4R probability variable jackpot symbol, 5R probability variable jackpot symbol, 6R probability variable jackpot symbol, and 7R probability variable jackpot symbol). When 3 of the 16R probable jackpot 3 of the specified 8-3 is specified, the 16R probable jackpot 3 symbols (combination of the same odd symbols among the odd symbols of "1", "5" and "9". Pattern 5R probable big hit design, 6R probable big hit design, 7R probable big hit design, and 8R probable big hit design) and determined when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game production). The stopped symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 1600. As described above, when the combination of the same odd symbols among the odd symbols of “1”, “5”, and “9” as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, the decoration symbols are stopped. From the design, one of the specified 2 4R probable big hits, the specified 3 5R probable big hits, the specified 4 6R probable big hits, the specified 5 7R probable big hits, the specified 6 8R probable big hits, or the specified 8-3 16R probable big hits 3 Although it is not possible to determine, it is possible to determine that the state is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game for controlling the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU determines the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 as a variation stop mode (stop symbol) based on the first special lottery result of the jackpot from the received determination result notification command. If the 8R likelihood big hit is specified, it is determined to be the 8R likelihood big hit symbol (combination consisting of the same even number symbol among the even number symbols of "2", "4", "6" and "8"), When the unspecified 2R regular jackpot is specified, a combination of the same even symbols among the even symbols of the 8R regular jackpot symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”, and “8”. When the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As described above, when the combination of the same even symbols among the even symbols of “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, It is not possible to discriminate between the specific 6R probable jackpot and the non-specific 2R regular jackpot from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and it is in a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game that controls opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005. It is not possible to determine whether to control.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU specifies, as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is stopped, the specified 2R certain variable jackpot among the jackpots from the received judgment result notification command. Is determined to be a 2R probable big hit symbol (combination of predetermined decorative symbols among loose symbols (separate eyes). Specifically, a combination including all decorative symbols of "3", "5" and "7") If a small hit is specified, a small hit symbol (combination of predetermined decorative symbols out of the missing symbols (separate eyes), which is common to the 2R-variable big hit symbol) is determined and specified from the variation pattern command. When the fluctuating time has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. As described above, when the combination of the decorative symbols “357” as the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 stops changing, it is determined whether the specific symbol is the 2R certain variable big hit or the small hit from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. Can not be determined, and even after the 2R jackpot game using the first big winning opening 2005 (2R big hit game where the game ball is difficult to enter by controlling the opening of the first big winning opening 2005 for a short time). Since the main liquid crystal display device 1600 executes a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the game is in the high probability state, it is not possible to determine whether or not to control the game in the high probability state after the end of the big hit game.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has stopped changing (stop symbol), and if the identified reach notification command specifies a loss of reach, the peripheral control MPU loses with reach. If a pattern (a combination of decorative patterns that are not the same, but the left and right decorative patterns are the same) is determined, and a loss is specified, a loose pattern without a reach (a combination of decorative patterns that are not the same. When the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 154, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag If it has been performed (step S141), the type of the jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the change pattern table (not shown) at the time of the jackpot according to the current game state are selected (step S141). If the small hit flag is set (step S143), a change pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit according to the current game state is selected (step S144), and the reach flag is set. If (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current game state is selected (step S145). In step S146), if none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag are set, that is, if it is a normal miss (a miss in which the reach effect is not executed), a variation pattern table at the time of the miss (shown in FIG. (No) is selected (step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148). The variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display is started (step S149). In addition, the variation pattern determined in this way includes the special effect (in this case, the first special symbol) after the start of the variation display of the content of the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol). (In this case, the first special symbol) includes information indicating a fluctuation time until the fluctuation display is stopped. By receiving the fluctuation pattern command set in step S149, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 starts the fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Variation of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the start of the display of the content of the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) The fluctuation time until the display is stopped is specified. In addition, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set in correspondence with the determined fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer when determining the fluctuation pattern (step S150). Thus, the effect control is performed on the first special symbol display (variable display of the first special symbol) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (variable display of the decorative symbol) for the variable time according to the determined variation pattern. Will be done.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is included in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table. It is stored in a form associated with each random number. Thus, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. Is obtained from the table, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of the present example, similarly to the above-described pre-determination table, the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number is determined. It is set to be determined. Specifically, 164 kinds of variable random numbers match the determination value (0-163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 kinds of variable random numbers are any of the super reach effects having a low jackpot expectation. Is determined, and the 18 kinds of variable random numbers match the determination values (223-240) indicating that any one of the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation is executed. As described above, the variable random numbers are associated with each other. Note that the super reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the jackpot game is increased.

  When the first special symbol change display is started, next, as a process of step S151, a change number counter of the change number counter for counting the number of changes of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) after the big hit game. It is determined whether the counter value is “0”. As described above, in this example, when the second special lottery result is a non-specific 1R 2R normal big hit and the time reduction control is executed at the time of winning, a special symbol (first Until the variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (one of 18, 36, 54, and 72 times), the first special lottery result is non-specific 2R of 8R In the case of a big hit and when the time reduction control is executed at the time of winning, the time reduction control is performed until the change display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is performed 72 times after the end of the 8R big hit game. I do. Therefore, when the non-specific 2R normal big hit is ended in the big hit control process, the number of times (one of 18, 36, 54, or 72 times) according to the result of the second special lottery is set in the fluctuation number counter. When the non-specified 2R normal jackpot is finished, "72" times are set in the fluctuation counter. In step S151, it is determined whether or not the change display of the number set in the change number counter has been executed after the big hit game. If the counter value is not "0", that is, if the change display of the number of times set in the change number counter is not executed after the big hit game, the change number counter is counted down (subtracted by 1) (step S152). Then, it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the variation counter is "0" (step S153). Then, as a result, if the counter value is “0”, that is, if the variation display of the number of times set in the variation number counter has been executed after the big hit game, an end flag indicating that fact is set (step S154). .

  If it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is “0”, that is, the fluctuation of the number of times already set in the fluctuation number counter after the big hit game caused by the non-specific 1 and the non-specific 2 If the display is being executed, or if it is determined in step S153 that the fluctuation counter is not “0”, that is, the fluctuation counter is still set after the jackpot game caused by non-specific 1 and non-specific 2. If the variable display of the number of times performed has not been performed, the process proceeds to the process of step S155 at that time. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), the process ends. In addition, when the time-saving control is performed until the next big hit is completed after the big hit game caused by the big hit of the specific 1 to 8-3 is set, “0” is set to the variation counter in the big hit control processing. On the other hand, by setting the time-saving flag, the time-saving control is continued until the next big hit.

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol change process (step S83). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol change process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 155, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes step S171. In the process (1), the variation timer for setting the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is decremented by one. Then, when the variable time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the lottery variable time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is ended.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84). When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 157, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes step S181. As the processing of the above, while performing the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display, the first special symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing derivation and display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes the fluctuation display of the number set in the fluctuation number counter when the end flag is set, that is, after the big hit game caused by the non-specific 1 and the non-specific 2. Sometimes (step S183), the end flag is reset (step S184), and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset (step S185). ). Thereby, after the fluctuation display of the number set in the fluctuation number counter is executed after the big hit game caused by the non-specific 1 and the non-specific 2, the control of the low probability non-saving time state (normal state) is performed. .

  When the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating to start the big hit game (step S187), and The standby time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game or the like) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset. (Step S189). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is an initial value (step S190), the process is terminated. Note that the jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is a type of jackpot (2R jackpot, 4R jackpot, 5R jackpot, 6R jackpot, 7R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 10R jackpot, 10R jackpot. , 16R probable jackpot, 2R ordinary jackpot, and 8R ordinary jackpot). In step S187, according to the type of jackpot (2R jackpot, 4R jackpot, 5R jackpot, 6R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 10R jackpot, 16R jackpot, 2R jackpot, 8R jackpot) Big hit start command (2R positive variable big start command, 4R positive big hit start command, 5R positive big hit start command, 6R positive big hit start command, 7R positive big hit start command, 8R positive big hit start command, 10R positive big hit start command, 16R positive big hit start command Start command, 2R normal big hit start command, 8R normal big hit start command) are set. Thereby, the effect of the big hit game according to the type of the big hit specified by the big hit start command is executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921, and the like.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (step S191), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a small hit start command indicating that a small hit game is started (step S192). The standby time until the start of the small hitting game (the time for displaying the start of the small hitting game) is set in the interval timer (step S193). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting game is being executed is set (step S194), and the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value, of the first special symbol process flag. At the time of updating (step S190), this processing ends. The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In step S195, by setting the small hit start command, the effect of the small hit game designated by the small hit start command is displayed on the main liquid crystal display. This is executed by the display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921, and the like.

[9. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 157, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every time 2 ms elapses, and executes a 2 ms regular process. In the 2 ms steady-state process, a process of counting up the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the 16 ms elapsed The flag T is set, and a process of resetting (clearing) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter to 0 is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the normal 2 ms process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms regular processing, processing for controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, lamps / LEDs, speakers 921, and the like is executed based on a command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 ms regular process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T has not been set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the 16 ms regular process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms regular processing, the peripheral control MPU executes the processing of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing in step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)) Based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by being set, the control processing related to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like is executed.

  In the sound control processing of step S603, control processing relating to the speaker 921 and the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, the game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is serialized for a lamp driving board. The game board-side drive data for transmitting to the effect drive board 3043 from the I / O port or outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is used for the game board decoration drive board. A door side for transmitting from the serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a vibration device 242 provided on the door frame 3 or a door lower right drive motor 272. A door side composed of drive data and door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Control data (display command) indicating a screen for transmitting dynamic light emission data from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side or displaying the screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper liquid crystal display device 244. Processing such as transmission from the control unit serial I / O port to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 and output of a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC are performed. In the random number updating process in step S606, a random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) (for example, a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 99) used in a lottery process related to a specific announcement effect described later) A process of updating a value of a random number counter or the like for generating a judgment random number is executed.

  Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms regular processing ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady-state process to the end of the 16 ms steady-state process, the 16 ms steady-state process is started immediately after the start of the 16 ms steady-state process (the command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady processing, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady processing, the 16 ms steady processing is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms regular process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing and the 16 ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the notice determination process executed in the command analysis process (step S601). As shown in FIG. 159, when the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 (step S301), the reservation corresponding to the number of reservations indicated by the received pre-determination command is performed. The preliminary determination information is stored in the storage area (Step S302). As described above, in the present embodiment, as a reserved storage area for storing the preliminary determination information indicated by the preliminary determination command, a first reserved storage area in which the preliminary determination information related to the variable display of the first special symbol is stored, A second reserved storage area in which pre-determination information relating to the special symbol change display is stored, and the first reserved storage area and the second reserved storage area each correspond to a reserved number. It has two storage areas. If the received pre-determination command indicates the pre-determination information relating to the variable display of the first special symbol, the peripheral control MPU stores the pre-determination in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations indicated by the pre-determination command in the first reservation storage area. The information is stored, and if the received pre-determination command indicates the pre-determination information regarding the variable display of the second special symbol, the pre-determination command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations indicated by the pre-determination command in the second reservation storage area. Stores judgment information.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a specific notice effect to be described later is being executed (step S303) and whether or not the number of reservations indicated by the received prior determination command is “4” (step S304). If the specific announcement effect is not being executed and the number of holds indicated by the pre-judgment command is “4”, the hold storage area storing the pre-judgment information indicated by the received pre-judgment command (variation display of the first special symbol) (1) to "3" in the first hold storage area if the information indicates the preliminary determination information relating to the display, and the second hold storage area if the information indicates the preliminary determination information relating to the variable display of the second special symbol. Is stored in the storage area corresponding to, and specifically, the jackpots 1 to 12 set as the jackpot 1 to the jackpot 12 set as the jackpot information in the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. Either pre-determined information-reach 4 it is determined whether or not stored (step S305).

  If the pre-determination information other than the outlier is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations “1” to “3” among the reservation storage areas storing the pre-determination information indicated by the pre-determination command received in step S305. (YES in step S305), the process ends without executing the processes of steps S306 to S309, that is, the lottery process of whether to execute the specific notice effect. In the present embodiment, a series of stories is a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) a plurality of times (three times in this example, but may be two times, or two times of variable display as a specific notice effect). The special liquid crystal display device 1600 may execute the specific notice effect that is executed separately and the specific notice effect that is executed by dividing the display three times. (A story completed in three episodes is displayed for each episode of the decoration symbol). To run). In addition, in each of the plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol for executing the specific notice effect, the decorative symbol is displayed at the end (for example, the upper left end) of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol. After displaying a part of a series of stories (one time of a series of stories to be executed divided into three times), a stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed. In this case, if a plurality of variable displays for executing the specific announcement effect include a large hit, a small hit, or a variable display serving as a reach, a big hit game or a small hit game is started in the middle of a series of stories. You can't run through a series of stories. In addition, if the player does not execute when a big hit or a small hit is made, but the game is executed when the game reaches a reach, the player is informed that the game will always be missed if the game reaches the reach during execution of the specific notice effect. Even if it is realized, even if the reach production is executed, there is no expectation for the big hit. For this reason, in the present example, when a start winning is generated, a predetermined number of times of the variable display, which does not accompany the reach, is set as the variable display in which the start condition of the variable display has not yet been satisfied other than the generated start winning. The lottery process of whether or not to execute the specific notice effect is performed only when the information is stored three times in this example).

  If the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations “1” to “3” among the storage areas storing the pre-determination information indicated by the pre-determination command received in step S305 does not store the pre-determination information other than the loss. (NO in step S305), an advance determination table corresponding to the advance determination information is selected (step S306), and advance determination in a numerical range (for example, 0 to 99) predetermined in the above-described random number update process (step S606). One notice judgment random number is acquired from the random number counter for updating the random number, and the acquired notice judgment random number is compared with the notice judgment table selected in step S306 (step S307).

  In the present embodiment, a preview determination table to be compared with the preview determination random number is provided for each of the above-described advance determination information (outside, big hit 1 to big hit 12, reach 1 to reach 4), and the hit (big hit, big hit, In the pre-judgment information of the same type of small hit (small hits 1 to 4 are the big hits (specified 7, 8) of the same type in this example, and big hits 5 to 8 are the big hits of the same type (specified 2 to 6, non-specified) 2), and the big hits 9 to 12 are the same kind of big hits (specific 1, non-specific 1, small hits), and the big hit expectation of the reach effect to be executed (the high hit expectation in this example is The determination value is set such that the ratio of executing the specific announcement effect increases in proportion to (specific strong SP reach ≧ other strong SP reach> weak SP reach> normal reach).

  In addition, in the advance judgment table selected when the pre-judgment information does not become a hit and indicates that a reach is made, the big hit expectation degree of the reach effect to be executed (in this example, the height of the big hit expectation is specified. The determination value is set so that the ratio of executing the specific notice effect is increased in proportion to (strong SP reach other than specific> strong SP reach> weak SP reach> normal reach). On the other hand, in the advance determination table selected when the advance determination information indicates that the information is out of order, the determination values are assigned so that a determination to not execute the specific advance effect is made regardless of the obtained advance determination random number.

  As described above, the fluctuation display after the specific notice effect is executed (in this example, when it is determined that the specific notice effect is to be executed, three times before the start of the fluctuation display based on the hold that caused the judgment) The specific announcement effect is executed over the fluctuation display, and the fluctuation display that causes the execution of the specific announcement effect for the fourth time is executed.) At least the reach effect is executed even if the small hit or the big hit does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the occurrence of the big hit when the specific notice effect is executed. In addition, even if the advance determination information is other than outliers, the ratio of executing the specific announcement effect is increased in proportion to the big hit expectation of the reach effect to be executed. In addition to giving attention to the types of reach effects, the expectation for the occurrence of a big hit in the variable display after the specific notice effect is executed can be increased.

  Further, when compared with each group of pre-judgment information compiled for each type of hit, the degree of advantage to the player (in this example, the degree of advantage to the player is 1 4> Specific 2-6, non-specific 2 big hits 5-8> Big 1, 9 non-special big hits, small hits big hits 9-12 in order The determination value is set so that the ratio of executing the specific notice effect is high. Then, the reach 1 to 4 summarized in the outreach reach has a lower degree of advantage to the player than the prior determination information to be a hit, so that the ratio of executing the specific notice effect is lower than that of the big hits 1 to 12. Is set to the judgment value. Thereby, when the specific notice effect is executed, a bigger hit that is more advantageous to the player, specifically, when the specific notice effect is performed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol, the expectation of the occurrence of the 10R probability change big hit is made. If the specific notice effect is executed for the second special symbol, the expectation for the occurrence of the 16R probability change jackpot can be increased.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-described series of stories is completed by executing the specific announcement effect over a plurality of predetermined (three in this example) variable display of the decorative pattern. It is to let. However, in the determination as to whether or not to execute the specific notice effect, the specific notice effect is executed over a variable display of less than a predetermined number of times (one or two times in this example) as the number of notices. (So-called gaseous notice) can also be determined. If you decide to execute this gaseous notice, the specific notice effect will end without the series of stories being completed, so you will have a big hit with the fluctuation display after the specific notice effect is executed Can not do. Therefore, the player plays the game while hoping that the specific notice effect is executed for a predetermined number of variable displays when the effect is executed. In addition, when the specific notice effect is executed, the specific notice effect may be restarted when the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started again after being temporarily stopped in the middle of a series of stories. This makes it possible to expect the specific notice effect to be resumed even when the gas notice is executed.

  If the effect control MPU determines that the specific notice effect is to be executed as a result of comparing the notice judgment random number with the selected notice judgment table (YES in step S308), the specific notice effect is being executed or the notice effect is being executed. Is set, the number of specific announcement effects determined is set in the announcement counter, and the process ends (step S309). The notice flag is referred to in the above-described step S303 for determining whether or not to execute the specific notice effect, and in a variable effect start process described later. If the notice flag is set in step S303, the effect control MPU performs the specific notice effect. It is determined that the process is being executed, and if the advance notice flag is set in the variable effect start process described later, the process data for executing the specific advance effect is selected from the process data corresponding to the variable pattern command received from the main control board 1310. Then, by controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the specific notice effect is executed. Also, if the number of executions of the specific notice effect is determined to be one, the notice counter is set to “1”, and if it is determined to be two, the notice counter is set to “2”, and the number is decided to three. If so, "3" is set to the notice counter. Thereby, the specific notice effect is executed over the variable display of the execution number of the specific notice effect set in the notice counter in step S309.

  FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S602).

  In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be done.

1. A variation pattern command that indicates the variation pattern of the special symbol analyzed in the command analysis processing (a first variation pattern command that indicates the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a second variation that indicates the variation pattern of the second special symbol) After performing processing for controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, and the like based on the pattern command), a variable effect start process for changing the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the variable effect process (step S711) )
2. The elapsed time from the start of the control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, and the like is measured, and processing for controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, and the like is performed according to the elapsed time, and the fluctuation is performed. Variation effect process during which the effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the variation end process in response to the elapse of the variation time corresponding to the pattern (step S712).
3. Performs a process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on receiving a symbol stop command instructing to stop the variable display of the special symbol, and if it is out of place, sets the above-mentioned effect process flag to a value according to the variable effect start process , And if it is a big hit, it is changed to a value according to the big hit effect processing, and if it is a small hit, it is changed to a value according to the small hit effect processing (step S713).
4. Based on receiving the big hit start command instructing the start of the big hit game, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 performs a process for executing the display control during the big hit game. Big hit production process which changes to the value according to the variable production start process (step S714)
5. Based on the reception of the small hitting start command for instructing the start of the small hitting game, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 performs a process for executing the display control during the small hitting game. Small hit production process that changes the production process flag to a value corresponding to the variable production start process (step S715)

  The main liquid crystal display is synchronized with the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed by the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) by the above processing. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the device 1600.

  FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect start processing (step S711). When the effect control process flag indicates that the variable effect start process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 161, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 firstly executes the variable pattern command (the first variable It is determined whether a pattern command or a second variation pattern command has been received (step S801). If a variation pattern command has been received, a stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the received determination result notification command (step S802).

  Specifically, if the peripheral control MPU has received the first variation pattern command, it is set in step S128 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and transmitted from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310. Based on the judgment result notification command, it is determined to be any of the above-described 2R probable big hit design, 8R probable big hit design, 10R probable big hit design, 8R normal big hit design, small hit design, and missing design, and receives the second fluctuation pattern command. If so, the above-mentioned 2R probability variable big hit symbol and 4R probability variation are set based on the determination result notification command transmitted from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 which is set in a second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown). Big hit design, 5R positive change big hit design, 6R positive change big hit design, 7R positive change big hit design, 8R positive change big hit design, 16R positive change Per symbol, 2R usually big hit symbol is determined to either the failure symbol.

  In addition, when the result of the fluctuation display of the received fluctuation pattern command (first fluctuation pattern command, second fluctuation pattern command) is out of order, the received fluctuation pattern command is reached (in this case, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern command). The decorative pattern and the same pattern are stopped and displayed, and the middle decorative pattern has not been stopped and displayed yet), indicating that the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are the same as the lost pattern, Only the middle decorative symbol is determined to be a combination of symbols different from the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol (reach lost symbol).

  When determining the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the advance flag which is set in the above-described advance determination process and indicates that the specific advance effect is being executed is set (step S803). If the advance notice flag is not set, process data corresponding to the received variation pattern command is selected (step S806), and display control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is started based on the selected process data (step S807).

  On the other hand, if the advance notice flag indicating that the specific advance effect is being executed is set in step S803, the number of times this execution is performed out of a plurality of (three in this example) variable displays in which the specific advance effect is executed Is selected from among a plurality of types of process data corresponding to the variation time indicated by the received variation pattern command (step S804), and the value of the advance counter is decremented by 1 (step S805). Display control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is started based on the process data (step S807). The above-mentioned notice counter is a counter indicating the remaining number of times of the variable display for executing the specific notice effect, and is set according to the determined number of executions of the specific notice effect when it is determined that the specific notice effect is to be executed. It has become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when starting the variable display in which at least the special lottery results (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) are not accompanied by the reach, in other words, at least the special lottery results ( If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) do not have a reach and the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the start condition of the variable display other than the variable display satisfying the start condition is satisfied. In accordance with the number of variable displays that have not been performed, that is, the number of suspensions, the suspension shortening control for shortening the fluctuation time of the variable display as compared with the normal display is executed. More specifically, in this example, as a deviation fluctuation pattern that is a deviation without a reach, a deviation fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time "13 seconds", a deviation fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time "8 seconds", and a deviation fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time "4 seconds" The main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 holds the first special symbol when the start condition of the variable display that results in the first lottery result without the reach is satisfied. If the number is "1" or "2", the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) determines that the variation pattern has a variation time of "13 seconds", and the number of reserved special symbols is "3". If it is, it is determined to be a variation variation pattern with a variation time of "8 seconds", and if the number of reserved special first symbols is "4", it is determined to be a variation variation pattern with a variation time of "4 seconds". In addition, the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 sets the number of reserves of the second special symbol to “1” or “1” when the start condition of the variable display in which the result of the second special lottery is not accompanied by the reach is satisfied. If it is "2", it is determined to be a deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "13 seconds" by a second fluctuation pattern setting process (not shown), and if the number of reserved second special symbols is "3", it is lost with a fluctuation time of "8 seconds" A change pattern is determined, and if the number of reservations of the second special symbol is “4”, it is determined to be a loss change pattern with a change time of “4 seconds”.

  Further, as described above, in each of the plurality of variable display of the decorative symbol for executing the specific notice effect, instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is reduced (the decorative symbol is reduced and the end portion of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (for example, the upper left end portion). ) May be displayed) After displaying a part of a series of stories (one time of a series of stories executed in three parts), a stop symbol of a decorative symbol is displayed. Therefore, when the period of the story to be displayed in one variation display of a plurality of variation displays of the decorative symbol for executing a series of stories as the specific announcement effect is fixed, the above-mentioned hold shortening control is executed and 1 The fluctuation time is shorter than the period of the story displayed in the single fluctuation display, so that the entire story cannot be displayed, or the period of the story displayed in one fluctuation display is shorter. Then, even if the above-mentioned hold shortening control is executed, the variation time is not shorter than the period of the story displayed in one variation display, so that the display of the story displayed in one variation display is completed and then decoration is performed. There is a problem that a useless period is generated until the stop symbol of the symbol is displayed and the player gets bored.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, for each of the plurality of display variations of the decorative symbol for executing a series of stories as the specific announcement effect, the display is displayed in a single variation display so as to correspond to the above-mentioned holding shortening control. It has a plurality of types of process data with different story periods. In other words, among a plurality of (three in this example) decorative design variable displays in which a series of stories as a specific notice effect is executed, the number of notices is displayed as the first variable display, and the change time is “8 seconds”. And the process data corresponding to "4 seconds", and the number of notices corresponds to the process data corresponding to the variable time "13 seconds" and "8 seconds" as the story displayed in the second variable display And the process data corresponding to the variable time "13 seconds" and the process data corresponding to the "8 seconds" as the story to be displayed in the third variable display. Data and process data corresponding to “4 seconds”. In step S804, process data corresponding to the fluctuation time indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command is selected from the process data corresponding to the number of notices. In the above-described example, when the first variable display of the plurality of variable displays of the specific notice effect is started, the number of reservations is always three or more, and the above-mentioned reservation shortening control is executed, so that "4 seconds" Alternatively, the case where only the process data corresponding to the fluctuation time of “8 seconds” is shown, but “4 seconds” and “8 seconds” are used as the first fluctuation display among the plurality of fluctuation displays of the specific notice effect. Not only the process data corresponding to one variation time, but also process data corresponding to a variation time of “13 seconds” may be provided. That is, if the specific notice effect can be executed even when the number of reservations is 3 or less in step S304 of the notice judgment processing, the first change display of the plurality of change displays of the specific notice effect is performed. In this case, when the number of holdings becomes two or less and the holding shortening control is not executed, the changing time of “13 seconds” may be determined. In this case, the changing time of “13 seconds” is used. May be selected to execute the first variation display among a plurality of variation displays of the specific notice effect, or the start condition of the variation display other than the variation display for which the start condition is satisfied. If the variation reduction control is executed only when the number of variable displays for which the condition has not been established is "4", the first variable display of the plurality of variable displays of the specific notice effect is started. No more than 3 on hold In some cases, the variation time is determined to be "13 seconds" without executing the shortening control. In this case, the process data corresponding to the variation time of "13 seconds" is selected and the specific notice effect is performed multiple times. The first variation display of the variation display may be executed.

  Although the same story is displayed in multiple types of process data corresponding to the same number of notices, the effect contents (video and explanation) can be simplified according to the period of the fluctuation time, The variation time and the production period are matched by making details. In addition, even if the process data corresponding to the same fluctuation time is selected by the continuous number of notices, even if the process data corresponding to the different fluctuation time is selected, the respective stories are connected smoothly. Process data is configured so as not to give a strange feeling to the user. Thereby, a series of stories can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU discards the preliminary determination information stored in the first storage area of the reserved storage area for storing the preliminary determination information in step S302 of the above-described preliminary determination processing in response to the received fluctuation pattern command. The pre-determination information stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) storage area to be stored in the hold storage area. The pre-determination information is shifted (step S808). That is, if the first variation pattern command has been received, the preliminary determination information stored in the first storage area of the first hold storage area is discarded and the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is discarded. The stored pre-determination information is moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area, and if the second variation pattern command has been received, the first storage area of the second hold storage area Is discarded, and the pre-determination information stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Let it.

  When the peripheral control MPU updates the above-described effect control process flag so that the process shifts to the process for variable effect production (step S712) (step S813), the process ends.

  FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect ending process (step S713). When the effect control process flag indicates that the variable effect ending process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 162, the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 performs the variable effect start process (step S711). (Step S851). The stop symbol determined in step S802 is fixedly displayed (in a state where all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are completely stopped and displayed).

  Next, if the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 has received a big hit start command notifying that a big hit game is started from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (step S852). When the above-described effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the big hit effect process (step S714) (step S853), the process ends.

  If a small hit start command notifying that a small hit game is started is received from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (step S854), the process shifts to the small hit effect processing (step S715). When the above-described effect control process flag has been updated (step S855), the process ends.

  When neither the big hit start command nor the small hit start command is received from the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310 (NO in step S854), if the above-mentioned notice flag is set (step S854). S856) Whether or not the advance notice counter is "0", that is, whether or not all of the plurality of (three in this example) variable displays for executing the specific advance effect have been executed (the remaining number of times of the specific advance effect is "0") Is determined (step S857), and if all of the plurality of (in this example, three) variable displays for executing the specific notice effect are executed, the notice flag is reset (step S858). When the above-described effect control process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the variable effect start process (step S711) (step S859), the process ends.

[10. Summary of specific notice production]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal display device corresponds to a plurality of (three in this example) variable display of a series of stories as a special notice effect in a special design (first special design, second special design). The process is divided into a plurality of (in this example, three times) variable display of the decorative symbol executed in 1600. However, the period for executing a series of stories as the specific notice effect is not constant, and may be changed (shortened) by the above-described hold shortening control. In this embodiment, even if the period for executing a series of stories as the specific announcement effect is changed (shortened) by the hold shortening control, these series of stories can be completed within the changed period. It has become. That is, the same story can be displayed at each of a plurality of variable times (4 seconds, 8 seconds, 13 seconds) so as to correspond to the above-mentioned hold shortening control in a series of stories executed as the specific announcement effect. The process data is configured in such a manner that the effect contents are simplified or made more detailed according to the period of the fluctuation time, thereby matching the fluctuation time with the production time.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 163, in the case where the number of notices is the third time (in this example, the last change display of the specific notice effect), if the number of reservations whose change time is 4 seconds is one or two, The explanation that “the experts attack on such A” is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 as characters, whereas if the number of holdings is 13 seconds with a fluctuation time of 13 seconds, “the talents will blossom” A description is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 as a character, and a more detailed description is given due to the long fluctuation time. Further, in addition to the description using such characters, when the number of holdings whose fluctuation time is 13 seconds is 4 compared to the case where the number of holdings whose fluctuation time is 4 seconds is 1 or 2, more An image is displayed. In this way, as the fluctuation time becomes longer, the effect contents become more detailed, so that the player can obtain more information. In addition, the explanation has been given that the effect content becomes more detailed as the fluctuation time is longer, but depending on the effect added due to the longer fluctuation time, the degree of expectation for the suspension that caused the execution of the specific notice effect was suggested. May be performed. For example, by preparing a plurality of (for example, white, blue, and red) character colors of “blooming talent” in FIG. 163, it is possible to see the specific announcement effect itself with expectation.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed prior to the first special symbol. Therefore, when a special announcement effect is executed based on the occurrence of a start winning prize in the first starting opening 2002, the change display of the second special symbol starts when a starting winning prize occurs in the second starting opening 2004. As a result, it is not possible to match the period of the story executed in one variation display and the variation time in the multiple variation display of the decorative pattern executed as the specific announcement production, or as the specific announcement production. As a variable display immediately after a series of stories has been displayed over a plurality of variable displays, the variable display that caused the execution of the specific announcement effect may not be able to be executed. For this reason, in this example, when the specific notice effect is being executed based on the fact that the start winning in the first starting port 2002 has occurred, before the variable display according to the execution number of the specific notice effect is executed. Also, when the start winning in the second starting port 2004 occurs, the specific notice effect is ended. More specifically, although not shown, when the advance notice flag is set in step S803 of the above-mentioned variable effect start processing, the advance notice flag is set due to a winning start in the first starting opening 2002. Is determined, and if the command is set due to a winning start in the first starting port 2002, the variation pattern command determined to be received in step S801 relates to the second special symbol ( If it is the second variation pattern command), the notice flag is reset and the process advances to step S806 to end the specific announcement effect before executing the variation display according to the determined number of executions. On the other hand, when the specific announcement effect based on the occurrence of the start winning prize to the second starting opening 2004 is executed in step S803, the specific announcement based on the occurrence of the starting winning prize to the first starting opening 2002 in step S803. Even when the effect is being executed, when the variation pattern command determined to be received in step S801 is a command relating to the first special symbol (first variation pattern command), the specific notice effect is continued. The process proceeds to step S804.

  As described above, the player is given a sense of incongruity by reliably matching the period of the story executed in one variation display and the variation time in the multiple variation display of the decorative symbol executed as the specific announcement effect. In addition to suppressing that, it is possible to execute the variable display that caused the execution of the specific notice effect as a variable display immediately after displaying a series of stories as a specific notice effect over a plurality of variable displays. I have. In the variable display based on the occurrence of the start winning prize in the second starting opening 2004, the specific announcement effect is performed only in the variable display based on the occurrence of the starting prize in the first opening 2002 without executing the specific announcement effect. May be executed. That is, if the advance determination command received in step S301 of the above-described advance determination process is based on the occurrence of a winning start in the second startup opening 2004, the process from step S302 to step S309, that is, the specific advance effect is executed. By ending the process without executing the lottery process of whether or not the specific announcement effect may not be executed based on the occurrence of a winning start in the second starting port 2004.

  Further, in the above-described example, when the specific announcement effect is being executed based on the occurrence of the start winning in the first starting opening 2002, the variable display according to the execution number of the specific announcement effect is not executed. Although the specific announcement effect is ended when the start winning in the second starting opening 2004 occurs, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the starting winning in the second starting opening 2004, In the case of starting the variable display of the decorative symbol, the specific notice effect is temporarily interrupted, and the specific advance effect is resumed based on the fact that the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the winning winning in the second starting opening 2004 has been completed. Is also good. Also, in this case, a notice indicating that the specific notice effect has been interrupted (“notice effect effect is being interrupted”) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the like while the decorative pattern is being fluctuated based on the winning start in the second start opening 2004. You may make it. In addition, even when the specific notice effect is temporarily interrupted when the decorative display based on the start winning prize in the second starting opening 2004 is started, the second special operation based on the starting prize in the second starting opening 2004 is performed. If the lottery result is a big hit, the process may end without restarting the specific notice effect.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, a story completed with three episodes is executed as a specific notice effect so that one episode is displayed for each change display of the decorative pattern executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Since the specific notice effect is executed for all three episodes, it is possible to give hope to the fluctuation display to be executed next, so that the player will pay attention to the story being executed. . For this reason, in this example, when the specific notice effect is being executed, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 displays the story being executed (for example, “the third episode”). .

  In the above-described embodiment, a series of stories is executed as a specific notice effect by dividing the decorative symbol into a plurality of variable displays performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in correspondence with the multiple display of the special symbol. However, in the multiple display of the decorative pattern (so-called pseudo continuous change) performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in response to the single variable display of the special symbol, a series of stories is produced as a specific notice effect. The decorative pattern may be divided into a plurality of variable displays and executed.

  In this example, the specific announcement effect can be executed only in the case where the number of reservations is “4”, which is the maximum value of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, in step S304 of the above-mentioned announcement determination process. However, even if the number of reservations is not the maximum value, the specific notice effect may be executed, and in this case, the number of executions of the specific notice effect is determined to be a number not exceeding the number of reservations. You may. For example, when a winning start is generated in the first starting port 2002 in a state where the number of reserved special first symbols is “2”, the number of times of execution of the specific announcement effect is “2” excluding a fluctuation display based on the newly generated starting winning. The number of times may not be exceeded. In addition, the probability of determining to execute the specific notice effect may be changed according to the number of reservations. For example, when the number of reservations is the maximum value, the specific notice effect is executed more than when the number of reservations is not the maximum value. Then, the probability of determination may be increased.

  In addition, as described above, a series of stories as the specific announcement effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays that are out of reach without a reach. The fluctuation display without the reach is usually the fluctuation pattern most frequently executed, and is the one in which the player cannot have the highest expectation for the big hit. In this example, by executing the specific announcement effect over the fluctuation display without the reach, even if the fluctuation display in which the player cannot have the most expectation for the big hit is performed, the expectation for the big hit is performed. Can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, when the specific notice effect is executed, the variable display that executes the series of stories is always lost, and in the variable display immediately after completing the series of stories (the variable display that caused the execution of the specific notice effect) The probability of a big hit increases. That is, it is possible to make the player guess that the result of the variable display is incorrect in the three variable displays in which the series of stories is executed as the specific announcement effect, and the variable display immediately after completing the series of stories (specific For the variable display executed immediately after the end of the announcement effect), a big hit can be expected. On the other hand, in the three variable displays for executing a series of stories, excessive expectation for the big hit can be suppressed.

  Further, in the variable display immediately after executing the series of stories as the specific notice effect (variable display that caused the execution of the specific notice effect), an effect related to the series of stories executed as the specific notice effect is executed. You may do so. In this way, it is possible to execute the variable display that caused the execution of the specific notice effect in conjunction with the multiple display of the variable display that executes the specific notice effect, and to execute the specific notice effect from the start of execution of a series of stories. It is possible to gradually increase the expectation of the player for the big hit by executing a related effect for a long period of time until the change display.

  The story to be executed by one variation display among the plurality of variation displays of the decorative symbol for executing the series of stories as the specific notice effect is changed by the number of suspensions when the variation display is started. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new game property such as adjusting the driving of the game ball aiming at a change in the number of holdings in order to view all the different stories for each number of holdings. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lottery for determining whether or not to make a big hit is executed based on occurrence of a start winning prize in the first starting opening 2002 and a start winning prize in the second starting opening 2004. Yes, the greater the number of start winnings in the first starting opening 2002 and the number of starting winnings in the second starting opening 2004, the more advantageous to the player. In the pachinko machine 1 in which such a game is executed, a more detailed story is displayed as a specific notice effect for a player whose advantage has been reduced by stopping driving of the game ball when the specific notice effect is executed. In order to give the privilege of doing so, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's emotion due to the decrease in the degree of advantage and gradually increase the expectation of the big hit.

[11. Hachirenso Chance Direction]
Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, of an eight-story-so chance effect performed during the big hit game. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the second special lottery result is “4R probable big hit”, “5R probable big hit”, “6R probable big hit”, “7R probable big hit”, “8R probable big hit”, “16R In the case of the "variable jackpot 3", the combination of the same odd symbols among the odd symbols of "1", "5", and "9" is stopped and displayed as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols, so that the decorative symbols are stopped. From the stop symbol, any of the following: 2 specific 4R probable big hits, 3 specific 5R probable big hits, 4 specific 6R probable big hits, 5 specific 7R probable big hits, 6 specific 8R probable big hits, or 3 specific 8-3 16R probable big hits It is not possible to determine whether the game has been won.

  And, the second special lottery result is "4R probable big hit", "5R probable big hit", "6R probable big hit", "7R probable big hit", "8R probable big hit", "16R probable big hit" When the jackpot game based on the jackpot game is started, an eight-story-so chance effect that notifies the player which jackpot has been achieved through the mahjong game as an effect during the jackpot game is executed. Hachirensou is a mahjong game where one player finishes eight times in a row, and the eighth completion is used for the role (Yumanuki; 36,000 for parents, 24,000 for children) ), Which is very difficult. Therefore, the player can guess that a special state will occur if the main character plays eight games in the mahjong game.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (A), the second special lottery result as a big hit symbol is “4R certain big hit”, “5R certain big hit”, “6R certain big hit”, “7R certain big hit”, “8R certain big hit”, In the case of "16R probable big hit 3", all of the middle left and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed as "5" as the big hits of the decorative pattern which can be commonly displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and then the big hit game is started. 162 (B), and the execution of the Hachiranso chance effect is notified (FIG. 164 (C)). In this example, the display of “the achievement bonus is achieved by the achievement of the cascade !?” is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to execute the cascade chance production. It can be understood that the bonus is given. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game is a jackpot game in which the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled or a big hit game in which the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled, the center winning game is Since a so-called right-handed game is performed in which a game ball is hit rightward in a front view from the center in the left-right direction in the upper part of the 2500, when starting a big hit game, “right-handed →” is displayed on the upper right part of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The display allows the player to rotate the handle lever 504 to adjust the launch strength so that a right-handed game is performed.

  Further, in this example, the Hachiranso chance production is started in a state where the main character has become a parent in the mahjong game, and the main character completes in each round of the jackpot game, or a character other than the main character (for example, The sub-character) is completed, or the result is a stream without anyone ending. Then, when the main character has completed, the next round is started by continuing the big hit game in which the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time, and characters (sub-characters) other than the main character complete. Or, if no one has completed the game, the big hit game in which the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time is ended. For this reason, the player pays attention to the result of the Hachiranso chance production while expecting the continuation of the jackpot game in which the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time. It should be noted that a big hit game in which the eight consecutive villa chance effects are executed always executes a big hit game of four or more rounds. Therefore, an effect in which the main character completes the game is always executed until the third round of the big hit game. As described above, since the main character always performs the effect of completing the game and continuing the big hit game until the third round, the appearance frequency of the effect in which the main character finishes and the big game is continued in the Hatsurenso chance production is performed. As the height increases, a good impression is given to the player with the chance to play the cascade, and the expectation for the continuation of the big hit game can be improved when the chance to play the cascade is executed.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU displays the mode in which the main character takes the mahjong tile in the mahjong game (FIG. 164 (D)) when the Hachiranso chance production is started, and that the main character hits the hit tile. By displaying a mode in which the main character completes, a big hit game in which the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time is notified and a second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time. Is notified of the number of continuations (number of consecutive holidays) (FIG. 164 (F)). In this example, as shown in FIG. 164 (F), the number of turf sticks is notified as “one place” in the same manner as in the mahjong game, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game (sequence number ). Also, in this example, the number of rounds being executed is displayed at the lower left of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the number of turf sticks according to the number of extended games is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3114. The turf stick displayed on the sub liquid crystal display measure 3114 is increased and displayed every time a jackpot game for controlling the opening of the second big prize opening 2006 for a long time (every time a round of the jackpot game continues). It is possible to confirm the number of consecutive villas (rounds) for the production of eight consecutive villas.

  In addition, when the present big hit game is executed based on the result of the second special lottery of “4R probable big hit”, the peripheral control MPU performs the same effects as in FIGS. 164 (D) to 164 (F). After the display is executed in each round up to the third round of the big hit game, when the fourth round of the big hit game is started, “third home” is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (FIG. 164 (G)), and the main A mode in which the character takes the mahjong tile in the mahjong game is displayed (FIG. 164 (H)). Then, after displaying a mode in which a character other than the main character (sub-character) has completed or nobody has completed the process, the mode has been changed (in the example of FIG. 164 (I), no one has completed the process). (The mode that has become a flow bureau is displayed), the total score of the main character in the mahjong game executed during the production of the Hachiranso chance is displayed (FIG. 164 (J)), and the big hit game is ended (FIG. 164 (J)). FIG. 164 (K)).

  On the other hand, when the big hit game of this time is executed based on the second special lottery result of “16R probable big hit 3”, the peripheral control MPU is the same as in FIGS. 164 (D) to 164 (F). After the effect display is executed in each round up to the seventh round of the big hit game, when the eighth round of the big hit game is started, “seven realities” is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (FIG. 165 (A)) and again. A mode in which the main character takes the mahjong tile in the mahjong game is displayed (FIG. 165 (B)). Then, a mode in which the main character completes due to the hit of the tile by the main character is displayed (FIG. 165 (C)), which is executed during the achievement of the Hachi-Ren-so and the Hachi-Ren-so chance production. After the total score of the main character in the mahjong game is displayed (FIG. 165 (D)), the "winning bonus!" Is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without ending the jackpot game, and the jackpot game is continued ( FIG. 165 (E)). As described above, in the 9th to 16th rounds of the jackpot game executed during the bonus bonus, the opening / closing pattern in which the game ball can enter while the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time is executed. . In conventional gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the large winning opening is controlled to be opened and closed for a short time so that the player does not realize that the large winning opening is controlled to be opened and closed, and a normal left-handed game is performed. However, in the case of the present example, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by allowing a game ball to enter while controlling the opening of the second big winning opening 2006 for a short time. By continuously displaying “→”, the player is positively notified that a right-handed game is to be performed, thereby promoting the acquisition of prize balls by the player.

  As described above, in the present example, when the second special lottery result is “16R probability change big hit 3”, the opening and closing pattern in which the game ball can enter is controlled by opening the second special winning opening 2006 for a long time. After the execution of the eight rounds, the opening and closing pattern in which the game ball can enter is executed for eight rounds while the second special winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time. In addition, in each round from the execution of the above-mentioned Hachiranso chance effect to the main character's eighting villa, the opening and closing pattern in which game balls can enter is executed by controlling the opening of the second special winning opening 2006 for a long time. You. Then, after the main character attains the Hachi-Renso by performing the Hachi-Ren Chance production, an opening / closing pattern in which game balls can enter while controlling the opening of the second big winning opening 2006 for a short time as a bonus bonus. Is to be executed. Thereby, when the main character has achieved the Hachi-Ren-so opportunity by executing the Hachi-Ren-so chance effect, the role-full bonus is executed after the Hachi-Rang-so chance effect, and the eight rounds executed during the Hachi-Ren-so chance effect And 8 more rounds. In addition, in the opening / closing pattern in which game balls can enter while controlling the opening of the second special winning opening 2006 for a short time with a bonus bonus, a maximum of two game balls can be inserted in a single round. 2006 can be entered. For this reason, when the winning bonus is executed, the opening and closing pattern in which the game ball can enter is executed by executing the opening and closing pattern in which the second large winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time without executing the winning bonus, and the round is executed after eight rounds. As compared with the case of ending the big hit game, the player can acquire 240 more prize balls. As described above, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game changes according to the result of the production of the Hachirensou Chance, so if the Hachirensou Chance production is executed, pay attention to the production result and pay a special bonus. Can be expected.

  In this way, the long-running opening control of the second special winning opening 2006 is not executed in the role fulfilling bonus executed when the main character has achieved the eight-run villa by executing the eight-run villa chance effect, and the short-time opening control is performed. Only run. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to the player that a new big hit different from the up to eight rounds of the big hit game has been given, and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game when the winning bonus is executed.

  In the above-described example, when the main character has achieved the eight consecutive villas by performing the eight consecutive villa chance production, the second special winning opening 2006 is set for a predetermined time (in this example, 0. 0 in each of the nine rounds and thereafter). (6 seconds), the short-time opening control for opening the game ball to an open state is executed once, but after the main character has achieved the cascade, the player can further acquire the prize ball. The opening / closing mode (opening time, opening / closing frequency, opening / closing interval, etc.) of the second winning port 2006 in the bonus bonus is not limited to the above. For example, the second big winning opening 2006 may be controlled to be opened for a short time a plurality of times in each round after the 9th round, or a maximum of a predetermined number of the second big winning openings 2006 may be set in each round after the 9th round. The opening control may be performed only once at an interval of time (for example, five game balls) that can be accepted.

  Further, in the above example, only when the second special lottery result is “16R probable big hit 3”, the cascade effect is executed and the main character executes the effect to achieve the cascade. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to execute an eight-so-so chance effect even when another big-hit that executes a 16R big-hit game is executed. When the player has achieved Hachirensou, the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened and closed by any one of a plurality of opening and closing patterns having a different number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player as a useful bonus when the player has achieved the eight consecutive villas. You may. In addition, in the case where a plurality of jackpots having different numbers of times of performing the opening control of the second big winning opening 2006 in a short time in each round after the 9th round can be executed, the eight-run-so chance production can be executed. During the production of the Zhou chance or when the bonus bonus is started (during the interval from the end of the 8th round to the start of the 9th round), the number of times that the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time in each round during the bonus bonus etc. is suggested. An effect may be executed. In this case, the larger the number of times that the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time in each round during the bonus bonus, the greater the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is increased. It is possible to improve the entertainment interest by paying attention to the effect of the game.

  In addition, the content of the production of the Hachiranso chance production may be changed in accordance with the result of the second special lottery. For example, the total score in the mahjong game in the Hachireiso chance production is equal to or greater than a predetermined score. If so, an opening / closing pattern in which the number of prize balls obtainable by the player is larger than in the case where the score is less than this point may be executed. More specifically, when the above-mentioned Hachi-Renso chance production can be executed even when the second special lottery result is the above-mentioned “16R probability change big hit”, the second special lottery result becomes “16R probability change big hit 1”. And then play the Mahjong game so that the score obtained by the main character is 100,000 or more by the 8th round of the jackpot game. The two-prize winning opening 2006 is kept open for a predetermined time (29 seconds in this example), or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls is received in the second winning prize opening 2006. After the game ball is set to the open state in which the game ball can be received, the opening and closing pattern for setting the second special winning opening 2006 to the closed state in which the game ball cannot be received for a predetermined time (1.0 second in this example) is repeated eight times. (Remaining 8 rounds On the other hand, if the result of the second special lottery is “16R probable big hit 3”, the main character has won 100,000 points by the eight rounds of the big hit game by executing the cascade production. After executing the mahjong game so that the number of points is less than the point, after the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for a predetermined time (0.6 seconds in this example) as a normal role full bonus, the game ball can be opened. By repeating the opening and closing pattern of closing the game ball in a closed state for a predetermined period of time (2.0 seconds in this example) eight times (over the remaining eight rounds), an eight-story villa chance effect is executed. Therefore, if the score obtained by the main character is 100,000 or more, an opening / closing pattern with a larger number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player may be executed as a useful bonus than when the score obtained is less than 100,000. .

  In the above example, the special round of the jackpot game can be executed as the bonus bonus only when the main character has performed the eight consecutive villa chance production and the eight main villas are executed (after the execution of the eight rounds). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special round is also executed when the main character has completed the eight-village opportunity production without performing the eight-village operation (when the eight-village chance production has been completed in less than eight rounds). It may be obtained. In this case, the second large winning opening 2006 is set so that the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is smaller than the bonus bonus executed after the main character performs the eight consecutive villa chance production and the eight consecutive villas. Opening / closing control may be performed. For example, when the result of the second special lottery is the above “4R probable big hit”, an eight-story villa chance effect is executed, and the second special winning opening 2006 is held for a predetermined time (up to four rounds). In this example, the opening state is maintained for 29 seconds) or an opening capable of accepting game balls until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls is accepted in the second special winning opening 2006. After the state, the second large winning opening 2006 is opened and closed for a predetermined period of time (1.0 second in this example) so that the game ball cannot be received, and during the execution of the fourth round, The character can be harmed After ending the Hachirensou chance production without breaking, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for a predetermined time (0.6 seconds) to be able to receive game balls, and then a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second) The opening / closing pattern of closing the game ball in an unacceptable closed state is executed four times (over the remaining four rounds), thereby executing an eight-story-village chance effect, so that the main character does not perform the eight-story-six. A special round that allows a maximum of one game ball per round to be entered may be executed when the Hachiranso chance production ends in a round less than the round.

  In addition, when the second special lottery result is “16R probable big hit 3” as described above, the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a long time until the eighth round is executed, so that the maximum per round is achieved. In this way, ten game balls can enter the second special winning opening 2006, and after the 9th round, the second large winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened for a short time, so that a maximum of two playing balls per round can be set. The ball can enter the two major winning openings 2006. It should be noted that the short-time opening control of the second special winning opening 2006 executed after the 9th round is not performed according to the timing at which the ball launching device 680 hits the game ball, but is controlled at a predetermined timing. Therefore, if the driving timing of the game balls is shifted, it becomes difficult to enter two game balls per round into the second special winning opening 2006. On the other hand, at least after the eight rounds of the jackpot game have been started (until game balls accepted in the second big winning opening 2006 are fired in the 16th round), the ball launching device 680 intermittently intervenes in the second attacker passage 2543a. In the case where game balls are continuously driven into the game, two game balls per round can be allowed to enter the second special winning opening 2006 with an extremely high probability (about 9 out of 10). I have. In other words, if the second special lottery result is "16R probability change big hit 3", after the eight rounds of the big hit game have been started, the firing of the game ball is temporarily interrupted and the firing is restarted with the start of the nine rounds Or, at least after 8 rounds of the jackpot game has been started (16 rounds, the game balls received in the second big winning opening 2006) as compared with the case where the game balls are fired with a launching strength that cannot be shot into the second attacker passage 2543a. Even if the game ball is intermittently driven into the second attacker passage 2543a (until the is fired), the degree of advantage is higher (the number of award ball acquisitions is larger). As described above, when the game ball is continuously driven into the second attacker passage 2543a intermittently, the degree of advantage is increased. Therefore, the player obtains the prize ball fairly without being influenced by the skill (skill level) of the player. It is possible to obtain the effect that the decrease in the operation rate can be suppressed from the gaming shop side.

  Further, in the mahjong game executed in each round of the above-described Hachisangso chance production, the big hit game is configured to be continued until the next round without ending the big hit game when the main character is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of completion modes having different numbers of rounds may be provided so that the big hit game is reliably continued when the main character has completed. For example, depending on the result of the second special lottery, a winning mode indicating that the game can be continued until the next round (for example, up to four rounds if this time is three rounds) and the next next round (for example, if this time is three rounds, Either one of the settlement modes indicating that the game can be continued up to five rounds) may be executed by lottery or the like. As a result, it is possible to focus on the production result of the Hachirensou Chance production, and to make everyone feel delighted, so that the entertainment interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, the jackpot game in which the Hachiranso Chance production is executed always has four or more rounds of a big hit game. Therefore, in the Mahjong game in the Hachijenso Chance production, the main character is always completed until the third round. And perform an effect to continue the big hit game. In this way, in the round in which the jackpot game always continues irrespective of the type of jackpot, as a result of the production of the Hachiranso chance, the jackpot game always continues in the upper limit round (4 rounds in this example) regardless of the type of jackpot. The effect result may be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to watch the eight-story-villa chance production at ease until at least the round in which the jackpot game continues regardless of the type of the jackpot. Also, until the upper limit round in which the jackpot game is continued (4 rounds in this example), an effect of whether or not the jackpot game is continued is not executed for each round, and the upper limit round in which the jackpot game is always continued (this By executing a series of effects (for example, four rounds), an effect of whether or not to continue from the upper limit round in which the jackpot game continues to the next round may be executed.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It is.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol is not limited to be executed with priority, and a maximum of eight variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be held are displayed in the order in which the hold occurred. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine of a type in which the game is started in the (starting winning order generation order in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004) (the reservation is exhausted).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1112 Opening 1120 Panel holder 1600 Main liquid crystal display device 2000 Front unit 2500 Center role 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3100 Under the back movable action unit 3110 After the back under the first decorative body (first decorative body, decorative member, decorative unit)
3111 First decorative surface 3112 Second decorative surface 3114 Sub liquid crystal display device (effect display device, decorative member, decorative unit)
3115 First hinge portion 3120 Rear lower second decorative body (second decorative body, decorative member, decorative unit)
3121 First decorative surface 3122 Second decorative surface 3124 Second hinge portion 3125 Decorative body support shaft (support shaft, decorative unit)
3126 Second decoration body side operation gear (under-axis gear, decoration unit)
3127 Bearing member 3130 Rotation drive unit 3131 Rotation drive unit base 3131a Main part 3131b Sub part 3131c Upper bearing part 3131d Lower bearing part 3132 Rotation transmission member 3132a Sleeve part 3132b Connection part 3132c First decorative body side operation gear (axial gear)
3133 First drive gear (upper drive gear)
3134 Rear bottom first drive motor (upper drive motor, drive motor)
3136 Second drive gear (lower drive gear)
3137 Lower back second drive motor (lower drive motor, drive motor)
3142 Unit cover 3143 Rack member 3143a Rack gear 3150 Slide unit 3151 Unit base 3152 Slide guide 3153 Transmission gear member 3154 Driving gear 3155 Rear lower third drive motor 3157 Slide cover

Claims (1)

Display means for displaying the effect,
Acquisition means for acquiring start information when a start condition is satisfied;
Start-time lottery means for performing a predetermined winning lottery based on the start information in which the start condition is satisfied among the start information obtained by the obtaining means,
If the winning lottery is performed by the starting lottery means and the winning lottery result is obtained, a special display result is derived and displayed on the display means, while the winning lottery is performed by the starting lottery means and the winning lottery result is obtained. Display control means for causing the display means to derive and display a non-special display result,
A storage unit that stores start information in which the start condition is not satisfied among the start information acquired by the acquisition unit,
Before the start lottery means performs the winning lottery based on the start information acquired by the acquisition means when the start condition is satisfied, the start information is determined by the start lottery means to be the winning lottery result. And whether the display control is to be performed in any of the plurality of variation modes, and a preliminary determination unit that determines whether the display control is to be performed.
Only the defeat start information that is determined by the preliminary determination means to not belong to the value determined as the winning lottery result and that the variation mode is determined to be a normal defeat mode without a reach mode is stored in the storage means. In the state where the winning start information newly determined by the obtaining means in the stored state and the winning start information determined to belong to the value determined as the winning lottery result by the prior determination means is stored. , A specific notice effect is executed by the notice execution means,
It is possible to reduce a period until the non-special display result is derived and displayed according to the number of stored pieces of the start information stored in the storage unit,
The specific notice effect is a first specific notice effect that is executed when a period until the non-special display result is derived and displayed according to the storage number of the start information is reduced, and the period is shortened. There is a second specific notice production that is executed when there is no
A part of the first specific notice effect and the second specific notice effect have a common effect, and the effect that is not displayed in the second specific notice effect is the first specific notice effect. Displayed at
The first specific notice effect, which is common to a part of the second specific notice effect performed when the period until the non-special display result is derived and displayed, is determined by the preliminary determination. Means for determining that the winning lottery result does not belong to the value determined as the winning lottery result, and that the fluctuation mode is determined to be a normal loss mode without a reach mode is continuously stored in the storage means. A gaming machine characterized by being able to be executed in a symbol change corresponding to each of the consecutively stored defeat start information.